JP6870256B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display means are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which data is stored in advance, and a predetermined display is performed by a display means using the data read from the memory (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-125418

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform display by the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably displaying by a display means.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes an arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the above-mentioned. Generated data generated by a data generation means having a drawing setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on a viewpoint and generating generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane. And the generated data storage means to store
A display control means for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The arrangement means includes a predetermined arrangement means for arranging special object data as the object data in the virtual three-dimensional space and changing the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space between update timings .
The drawing setting means
When determining the data to be drawn on each dot in the generated data having a plurality of dots, an object grasping means for grasping the object data to be referred to in order from the front side of the virtual three-dimensional space, and an object grasping means.
When the special object data is grasped by the target grasping means in the case of determining the data to be drawn on a predetermined dot among the plurality of dots, the specific parameter data set for the special object data is set. To determine the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot among the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target determining means.
Equipped with a,
Of the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot is the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space. It is a configuration that changes according to
When the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is a predetermined arrangement mode, it is assumed that the special object data does not exist in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target is drawn on the predetermined dot. There is no difference in position between the data and the data to be actually drawn on the predetermined dot in the virtual three-dimensional space, or the amount of deviation is relatively small.
The drawing setting means is characterized by comprising visual effect means for producing a predetermined visual effect when the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is the predetermined arrangement mode. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform display in the display means.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the main display apparatus (a) to (j). (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the main display device. It is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit for demonstrating the 1st sub display device and the 2nd sub display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the movement mode of each sub-display device (a), (b). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a big hit generation lottery and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the distribution side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process which is executed in the distribution side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric structure of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the production CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process for display control executed by the effect CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of a register used when the drawing process is executed in 2D control part and 3D control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the drawing list for 2D (a)-(c). (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list for 3D. It is a flowchart which shows the 2D drawing process which is executed by a 2D control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 3D drawing process which is executed by the 3D control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how drawing data is created with execution of 3D drawing processing. (A) to (c) are time charts for explaining the timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is pre-transferred. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area for before transfer and the storage area for after transfer. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the advance transfer area, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the identification information counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the search table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the address information of a drawing list is rewritten and the address ID of a search table is rewritten, (a) to (d). It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output processing executed by the production CPU. (A) to (e) The image data required to start the effect for the game round is read into the pre-transfer area at least at the timing when the effect for the next game round can be started. It is a time chart showing the situation. It is a flowchart which shows the advance transfer process which is executed in the advance transfer control part. It is a flowchart which shows the rewriting process of the address information executed by the advance transfer control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of a file table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between VRAM and an index area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of an index table. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer execution process which is executed by the transfer controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of one drawing list which was set by collecting the image data corresponding to each display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) the execution target table for display control. It is a flowchart which shows the creation process of the drawing list executed by the production CPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for outputting an image signal to each sub-display device. (A) to (e) A state in which one drawing data is created in order to display an image for one frame on each of the sub-display devices, and each sub-display device using the one drawing data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the image for one frame is displayed in each of. (A) to (d) are time charts showing how an image signal is output to each display device. It is a flowchart which shows the writing process which is executed in 2D control part. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process to the drawing area for sub-display executed by the 2D control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the signal output processing executed in the 2nd display circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the execution target table for display control in a displacement effect period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the right-handed notification image displayed by each display device (a), (b). (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data stored in the memory module, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as the right-handed notification image on the sub side. .. (A) to (d) is a time chart showing how the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for right-handed notification executed by the effect CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the effect using the image for rotation period (a) to (e). It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the rotation movement display executed by the effect CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) to (d) the method of creating image data for displaying an image for a rotation period in the pachinko machine design stage, and (e) explains the content of the data stored in the memory module. It is explanatory drawing for this. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the event which is the execution target of the abnormality notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of (a)-(e) abnormality notification image. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the abnormality notification image in the period when the effect of displacing the sub-display device is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence processing of the notification command executed by the production CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for notification which is executed by the effect CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data stored in a memory module. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of normal moving image data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of special moving image data. It is a time chart which shows the state that the decoding process of the moving image data is executed by using the period of displaying the image using the attached image data (a) to (c). It is a flowchart which shows the use setting process of moving image data executed by the effect CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process which is executed by the moving image decoder. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing area for sub-display in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data composition processing for sub-display executed by the 3D control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the rewriting process of the address information executed by the advance transfer control part in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output processing which is executed by the effect CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance transfer process which is executed in the advance transfer control part. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the main display device of the 1st display mode in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(l) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display symbol of the 1st decorative symbol. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the main display device in the 2nd display mode. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display symbol of the 2nd decorative symbol. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the combination of the display symbols corresponding at the time of switching at the time of switching from a 1st display mode to a 2nd display mode. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the combination of the display symbols corresponding at the time of switching at the time of switching from a 2nd display mode to a 1st display mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the common display symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table which is referred to by the effect CPU in order to display and control the unit display part of the upper part and the 2nd decorative symbol on the left in the 2nd display mode. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how each sub-display device is arranged in front of a main display device, and (b) the relationship between the moving range of each sub-display device and the display position of a common display part is explained. It is explanatory drawing for this. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the display of a common display part is maintained at the time of a reach effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the display content of the main display device in an opening / closing execution mode. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the common display unit is hidden in the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a symbol executed by the effect CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the refraction object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the traveling direction of ray data changes by a refraction object (a) and (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the display mode of the image by (a), (b) the backmost data, the 1st background data and the 2nd background data changes depending on the existence of a refraction object. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of an image in the situation where the uniform α value applied to each pixel of a refraction object is set to the specific uniform α value which is a value larger than other situations. (A), (b) is a time chart showing how the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object is changed according to the rotation position of the refraction object. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for refraction display effect executed by the effect CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for refraction display effect executed by 3D control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a1)-(c2) reverse display effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the data structure of a memory module, (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of each dot, and (c) the data structure of each dot of the layer data for inversion is explained. It is explanatory drawing for this. (A) to (f) are time charts showing how the reverse display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for reverse display effect executed by the effect CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for the reverse display effect executed by the 3D control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process using the layer data for inversion executed by the 3D control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(d) movement display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of a bone object. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the first animation data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second animation data. It is a time chart for explaining the type of animation data to be used when each of (a) to (e) the first movement display effect, the second movement display effect, and the third movement display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the movement display effect executed by the effect CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement process of the bone object executed by 3D control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another form concerning the display of the common display symbol in (a), (b) common display part. (A) to (c) are time charts showing how the number of unit display units displayed on the common display unit fluctuates. (A) to (d) is a time chart showing how the number of unit display units of the common display unit is switched as the display mode is switched.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 21 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 21.

An inner rail portion 22 and an outer rail portion 23 are attached to the game board 21 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 22 and the outer rail portion 23. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 21 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 24 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 21 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33 or when the balls are entered into the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Will be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 21a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 21, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 21a. Further, a large number of nails 21b are planted on the game board 21 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 21a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 21. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the general electric power, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the main display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a big hit generation lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or winning a prize in the second operating port 34. Then, as a stop result after the variable display of the pattern is performed, the display corresponding to the result of the big hit occurrence lottery is performed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

Regarding the main display device 41 In detail, the main display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the effect control device 80 described later. The main display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the main display device 41, when the special figure display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the variation of the symbol is displayed accordingly. It is said. That is, when the special figure display unit 37a performs the variable display, the main display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in the game round in which the result of the jackpot generation lottery is the jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line preset in the main display device 41.

The display contents of the main display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 (a) to 3 (j) are diagrams showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed on the main display device 41, and FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are display surfaces of the main display device 41. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), the symbols which are a kind of the symbols are 9 kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the main display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol sequence Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols" and even numbers (2,4,5,6,8) are assigned. The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

By the way, when a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the special figure display unit 37a also stops and displays the 15R probability variation compatible pattern corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, but this 15R probability variation compatible symbol is displayed on the main display device 41. The main symbol constituting the combination of the same specific symbols to be stopped and displayed in the above can be stopped and displayed regardless of the odd-numbered symbol. Further, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the special figure display unit 37a also stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, but the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped on the main display device 41. Even if the main symbol constituting the same non-specific diagram or other combination to be displayed is any even-numbered symbol, the display may be stopped. Further, since the special figure display unit 37a has only one display area in which a plurality of segment indicators are arranged, a plurality of identification information such as numbers are not displayed at the same time. On the other hand, in the main display device 41, a plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set as described above, and a plurality of symbols are displayed at the same time. In this regard, the number of display areas capable of displaying identification information on the special figure display unit 37a does not correspond one-to-one with the number of symbol display areas on the main display device 41, and further, the main display device It can be said that it is smaller than the number of display areas of the symbol in 41.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the main display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern that is variablely displayed on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the pattern.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if a big hit is won in the big hit generation lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electric winning device 32. Shifts to the open / close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 21, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult to generate a prize than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the main display device 41.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. The game area PA is variable because the center frame 42 provided in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the main display device 41 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 21. An upper region that is a region above a predetermined height position of the display unit 36, a left region that is continuous below the upper region and is a region to the left of the variable display unit 36, and a lower region that is below the variable display unit 36. The right region, which is the region to the right of the variable display unit 36, and the lower region, which is the region below the left region and the right region, which are continuous and below the variable display unit 36. And, it is divided into. In this case, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided in the lower region. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 42a formed in the center frame 42, and the game ball discharged from the center of the stage 42a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 wins the first operating port 33. In addition to being easy, the entrance portion of the guidance passage that enables the guidance of the game ball onto the stage 42a is formed so as to allow the game ball to enter from the left side region. Therefore, it is more likely that the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side region than the case where the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It becomes easy for the game ball to enter. On the other hand, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right side region. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode occurs, if the launch operation has been performed so that the game ball flows down in the left area, it is necessary to change the launch operation mode so that the game ball flows down in the right area. There is.

Here, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a first sub display device 43 and a second sub display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41. The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a variable display unit 36 for explaining the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44.

Both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by an effect control device described later. The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and are other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a dot matrix display. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same type of display device is used in the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, and among the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may use different types of display devices, such as one being a liquid crystal display device and the other being a dot matrix display device.

The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices having the same shape, and the resolution of the display surface, the shape of the display surface, and the size of the display surface are the same. Both the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 have a rectangular shape. Both the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41, and further, the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display. The total area of the display surface of the device 44 is also smaller than the display surface of the main display device 41. Furthermore, the dimension of the long side on the display surface of the first sub display device 43 is shorter than the dimension of any side of the square display surface of the main display device 41, and the long side on the display surface of the second sub display device 44 The dimension of is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface in the main display device 41. As a result, even if the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are provided separately from the main display device 41, the player's attention to the main display device 41 is extremely reduced. It becomes possible to prevent this.

Both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in front of the display surface of the main display device 41. The first sub-display device 43 is provided with a first drive unit 45 for sliding and rotating the first sub-display device 43 in front of the main display device 41, and the second sub-display device 44 is provided with a first drive unit 45. Is provided with a second drive unit 46 for sliding and rotating the second sub-display device 44 in front of the main display device 41.

The first drive unit 45 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 above the rectangular opening 42b that exposes the display surface of the main display device 41 in the center frame 42 toward the front of the game board 21. The second drive unit 46 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 below the opening 42b. That is, the center frame 42 is provided with a pair of upper and lower drive units 45 and 46.

The first drive unit 45 and the second drive unit 46 have the same configuration. Specifically, the drive units 45 and 46 can reciprocate laterally along the drive rails 45a and 46a extending in the lateral direction and the drive rails 45a and 46a in the lateral direction, and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can be moved. The slide drive motors 45c and 46c capable of reciprocating the supporting members 45b and 46b in the vertical direction and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotatably supported by the supporting members 45b and 46b are rotationally driven. It includes rotary drive motors 45d and 46d. Each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is supported by the rotary drive motors 45d and 46d so that the display surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the same direction as the display surface of the main display device 41 faces. When the 45d and 46d are in the driving state, the pachinko machine 10 rotates about the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

The support members 45b and 46b have a long plate shape, and are mounted on the slide drive motors 45c and 46c so that their longitudinal directions are vertical. In this case, the combination of the first sub-display device 43 and the rotary drive motor 45d is mounted on the lower end side of the support member 45b of the first drive unit 45, and the second is on the upper end side of the support member 46b of the second drive unit 46. A combination of a sub-display device 44 and a rotary drive motor 46d is mounted. When the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are in a drive state in which the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction, the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction and are integrated with the support members 45b and 46b accordingly. The combination of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the rotary drive motors 45d and 46d moves in the vertical direction. Further, when the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are in a drive state in which they move laterally along the drive rails 45a and 46a, the slide drive motors 45c and 46c move laterally, and the slide drive motors 45c move accordingly. , 46c, the sub-display devices 43, 44, the support members 45b, 46b, and the rotary drive motors 45d, 46d move laterally.

The state shown in FIG. 5 is a state in which each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is arranged at the initial position. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 is arranged on the upper side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a horizontally long posture, and the lower half of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is the display of the main display device 41. In front of the surface, it is exposed from the opening 42b and the upper half is hidden behind the center frame 42. Further, the second sub-display device 44 is also arranged at the lower side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a horizontally long posture, and the upper half of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 is the display surface of the main display device 41. The lower half is exposed from the opening 42b in front of the center frame 42 and is hidden behind the center frame 42. In the situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the two sub-display devices 43 and 44 are vertically separated from each other. Further, in the situation where both the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 in the horizontal direction are the same. As a result, the entire lower surface of the first sub-display device 43 faces the entire upper surface of the second sub-display device 44.

6 (a) and 6 (b) are explanatory views for explaining an example of the movement mode of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are in a drive state in which the support members 45b and 46b are moved downward, so that the slide drive motors 45c and 46c maintain a horizontally long posture. The first sub-display device 43 moves downward and the second sub-display device 44 moves upward while maintaining a horizontally long posture. Then, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are brought close to each other to a position where the lower surface of the first sub-display device 43 in the horizontally long posture and the upper surface of the second sub-display device 44 in the horizontally long posture face each other at a short distance. By moving in the vertical direction, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 6A. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be apparently continuous, and a square or rectangular surface is formed by these display surfaces. Will be done. This position is the first parallel position. At the first juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 exists so as to extend in the lateral direction. A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first parallel position is provided, and the distribution control device 70, which will be described later, uses the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is specified that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first parallel position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are stopped.

In the state of FIG. 6A, the slide drive motor 45c of the first drive unit 45 is in a drive state for moving the first sub-display device 43 to the right and downward, and the rotary drive motor 45d of the first drive unit 45 is moved. The first sub-display device 43 is in a drive state of rotating clockwise, and the slide drive motor 46c of the second drive unit 46 is in a drive state of moving the second sub-display device 44 in the left and upward directions. When the rotary drive motor 46d of the drive unit 46 is in a drive state in which the second sub display device 44 is rotated clockwise, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are placed in the second parallel position as shown in FIG. 6 (b). It will be in the state of being placed in. In the second parallel position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are in a vertically long posture, and the left side of the first sub-display device 43 in the vertically long posture and the right side of the second sub-display device 44 in the vertically long posture are close to each other. They will face each other at a distance. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be apparently continuous, and a square or rectangular surface is formed by these display surfaces. Will be done. At the second parallel position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 extends in the vertical direction. A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second parallel position is provided, and the distribution control device 70, which will be described later, uses the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is specified that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second parallel position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotary drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped. In addition to the first parallel position and the second parallel position, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the initial position and each intermediate position described later is provided, and the distribution control device 70 described later provides each detection. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotary drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped.

In addition to the initial position, the first parallel position, and the second parallel position, the positions where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged include the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and the first parallel position shown in FIG. 6 (a). There is a position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at an intermediate position with the installation position. In addition to that, there is a position where the first sub-display device 43 moves to the right and the second sub-display device 44 moves to the left from the second juxtaposed position shown in FIG. 6 (b). ing. In the former case, each of these intermediate positions has a positional relationship in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are vertically separated from each other, and in the latter case, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 43 and the second. The sub-display device 44 and the sub-display device 44 are separated from each other in the lateral direction. Further, in the state where the first sub-display device 43 is arranged at the initial position, the second sub-display device 44 corresponds to the position corresponding to the first parallel position, the position corresponding to the second parallel position, and each intermediate position. In the state where the second sub-display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the first sub-display device 43 is placed at a position corresponding to the first parallel position and a second parallel position. It may be placed at the corresponding position and at the position corresponding to each intermediate position.

When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial position, the support members 45b and 46b are exposed from the opening 42b of the center frame 42. In this case, since the support members 45b and 46b are formed to be colorless and transparent, the support members 45b and 46b can be made inconspicuous and the image displayed on the main display device 41 is supported. It is possible to prevent the members 45b and 46b from hiding.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 21 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a. The lower bulging portion 56 is provided with an effect button 57 for changing the content of the display effect on the main display device 41 according to a manual operation.

A main control device 60, a distribution control device 70, and an effect control device 80 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism unit including a payout device 68, a power supply and launch control device 65, and a payout control device 66. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 60>
The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. In the main control device 60, the board box accommodating the main control board 61 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening is provided. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, and an adhesive layer is used as an adhesion target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and a launch control device 65 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power supply and launch control device 65 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 61 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 61 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 66 and the effect control device 80 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 62 and the power supply and the launch control device 65. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 62, so that the MPU 62 executes a process for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to winning balls such as a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 62, a big hit generation lottery and a big hit result type lottery are executed based on the winnings in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and a reach generation lottery for each game and a lottery for determining the variable display time are executed. To do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 will be described.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, a setting of the symbol display of the main display device 41, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the like. Reach generation when the main display device 41 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display unit 37a, and the main display device 41. It is decided to use the fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in. Further, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. Each of these counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is provided in the lottery counter area 64a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is a reserved storage area 64b as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Stored in.

The hold storage area 64b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 → Each numerical information is stored in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored. .. The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and at the start of one game round. Is a big hit generation lottery based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 63 as a winning / losing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are: (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

The mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing execution mode is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end, and one opening is until 30 seconds have passed or the winning opening is won. It is continued until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings in the large winning opening. Continues until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 24 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 67 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Will be done. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed, the opening time for one opening, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening are higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to say. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of winnings is set shorter than the opening time for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the game ball is set for one opening. The product of the firing cycle and the maximum number of winnings may be set longer than the opening time. In addition, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, so that the latter is substantially shorter. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not generated in the special electric winning device 32.

As a support mode in the universal accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the general operating port 34 is A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the general electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), But in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and once more. The opening time of is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the general map display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times to be executed are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. You may be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shorten the one-time variable display time on the general map display unit 38a), shorten the average time of the secured time, and increase the winning probability, and apply any one condition or any combination of conditions. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. Then, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot generation lottery becomes the jackpot state winning and the state shifts to the jackpot state.

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot generation lottery becomes the jackpot state winning and the state shifts to the jackpot state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the jackpot generation lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. And "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, "1" is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the main display device 41. The expected effect is that the main display device 41 capable of displaying the fluctuation of the symbol is provided, and the stop display result after the fluctuation display is specially displayed in the game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the main display device 41 is started. Display state for.

There are two types of expected effects, the above-mentioned reach effect and the advance notice effect for expecting the occurrence of the reach effect and the occurrence of the special display result in the stage before the reach effect occurs.

In the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode is created by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect.

About the reach effect Specifically, as a preliminary step to end the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is performed on a preset effective line in the display surface of the main display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may hold the above, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 4, one of the valid states is obtained when the variable display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. It becomes a reach production by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

In the notice effect, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface of the main display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol rows. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background image has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect can occur in any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63. If so, it will be executed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is performed not by the main control device 60 but by the distribution control device 70.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, "1" is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation display time on the special figure display unit 37a and the variation display time of the symbol on the main display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the timer interrupt process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the main display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The general electric service opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 64c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 7, the payout control device 66 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and the power supply and the launch control device 65 are also connected. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 66, for example, based on the result of the winning determination to the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. The payout control device 66 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 68 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A launch permission command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the power supply and the launch control device 65 based on the fact that the launch control device 24 is operated. The power supply and the launch control device 65 drive the game ball launch mechanism 67 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 60.

A special figure display unit 37a and a general map display unit 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 62. That is, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 62.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door of the special electric winning device 32 and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, the drive control of the special electric winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 62 so that the large winning opening is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the utility accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 62 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, a distribution control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and various commands for effect are transmitted to the distribution control device 70.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the main display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the firing control device 65 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 64 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 64 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the distribution control device 70 in order to recognize the current game state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 62 has a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 64, the read numerical information is added by 1, and then the read source counter is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle). First, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each of them. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the RAM 64 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric winning driving unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the relevant information is concerned. Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started and the information for switching to the closed state is started. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signal received from each prize detection sensor is read, and the presence or absence of a prize in the general prize opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 is present. Execute the process to identify.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 24 is continued, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 64b is less than the upper limit number, the prize is generated. A process of sequentially storing each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 64b is executed as hold information. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a jackpot occurs to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. The lottery process and, if the jackpot winning is supported, the distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the held information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning. In addition to executing the reach determination process for determining, the process of selecting the variation display time of the game times is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence / absence of the reach is read from the ROM 63, and the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determine the variable display time of the game times. Then, the variation command including the information on the variation display time of the determined game times and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the variation of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a. Start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41. Further, the MPU 62 starts measuring the variation display time when the variation command and the type command are transmitted.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variable display time corresponding to the game round elapses during the execution of one game round, the special figure display unit 37a displays the jackpot occurrence lottery process and distribution of the current game round. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and the measurement of the final display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained for the final display time. In this case, if it is a game time that results in a normal jackpot, the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and if it is a game time that results in a 15R probability variation jackpot, it corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The pattern to be displayed is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and if the game is a game that results in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game round is out of order and corresponds to the result, a new game round can be started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64b. Execute the process. If the hold information is not stored, wait until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and a closing command indicating that the round game is completed is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the jackpot generation lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Executes the processing of. In the opening / closing execution mode, an opening period is generated over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect of making the player recognizable that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred in this opening period is executed. After that, a round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after the predetermined number of round games are executed, an ending period occurs for a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect of making the player recognizable that the opening / closing execution mode ends in this ending period is executed. ..

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed in step S214. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the held information, and a process for performing an effect for a general drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease in the number of reserved information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a on the special figure hold display unit 37b is set. At the same time, the output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the normal figure display unit 38a is reflected in the normal figure hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information to be updated.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 66 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Distribution control device 70>
Next, the distribution control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distribution control device 70 executes an effect to be executed by the various display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. To the various drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 based on the control of the distribution control board 71 having a function of determining the content, the distribution control board 71, and the effect control device 80 described later. The output integrated board 72 has a function of aggregating the outputs of the drive signals of the above.

The distribution control board 71 includes an MPU 73. The MPU 73 is a ROM 74 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 73, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 74 is executed. A certain RAM 75, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 74, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 74 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 74, and the RAM 75 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 73 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 73. An effect control device 80 is connected to the output side of the MPU 73, and an output integrated board 72 is connected to the output side. By the way, the electrical connection between the distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 is the distribution side connector 76a provided on the distribution control board 71 and the output integration side connector 76b provided on the output integration board 72. Is done by connecting without interposing a signal line. The electrical connection between the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector 76b is made in a detachable state.

The output integrated board 72 includes a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. The motor drive circuit 77 includes a slide drive motor 45c and a rotary drive motor 45d for moving the first sub display device 43, and a second sub display device based on the drive data output from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. This is a circuit for outputting a drive signal to the slide drive motor 46c for moving the 44 and the rotary drive motor 46d. The MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 outputs the drive data corresponding to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d to the motor drive circuit 77 at the timing corresponding to each. The motor drive circuit 77 is individually electrically connected to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, and the drive motor 45c corresponding to the drive data received from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. , 45d, 46c, 46d are individually driven and controlled.

The harness connector 78 is provided so as to exist in the middle of the electric path for outputting signals from the motor drive circuit 77 to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. Further, the harness connector 78 is provided in the electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 provided in the effect control board 81 of the effect control device 80, which will be described later, to the display light emitting unit 53, and in the effect control board 81. It exists in the middle of the electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54. As described above, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d are mounted on the game board 21, and the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are mounted on the front door frame 14. The signal lines for outputting signals to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are all relayed by the relay board provided on the game board 21. In this case, each of these signal lines is provided as a harness in which one end is integrated into one connector member and the other end is integrated in one connector member. Then, one end of the harness is electrically connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72 in a detachable state, and the other end of the harness is detachably connected to the harness connector provided on the relay board. It is electrically connected in a good condition.

As will be described in detail later, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the effect control device 80. In this case, the signal line for outputting the signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and the signal line for outputting the signal to the speaker unit 54 are the signal lines for outputting the signal to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. Since it is integrated on the output integrated board 72, it becomes necessary to disconnect the electrical connections between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display / light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and the control device side at the time of maintenance or the like. In this case, the work locations are concentrated on the output integrated board 72, and the workability can be improved.

Further, each signal line for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is integrated into one harness and provided at one end of the harness. The connector member is connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72. In this case, by removing the harness from the harness connector 78, the electrical connections between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and the control device side can be collectively released. This makes it possible to improve workability during maintenance and the like.

The electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting unit 53 and the electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54 are electric paths formed on the distribution control board 71. The circuit and the output integrated board 72 are connected to the harness connector 78 through an electric circuit formed on the integrated board 72, but the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 does not intervene in these electric paths. As a result, in a configuration in which the distribution control device 70 is interposed in the electric path for outputting signals to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the light emitting circuit 87 and the sound output circuit are provided in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It is possible to prevent the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 from intervening in the process for outputting the signal from the 88. The distribution control board 71 is formed in an electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting unit 53 and an electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54. The configuration may not include an electric circuit.

As described above, the distribution control device 70 is provided with not only the distribution control board 71 but also the output integrated board 72, and these distribution control boards 71 and the output integrated board 72 are the distribution side connector 76a and the output integrated side connector. It is electrically connected in a detachable state using 76b. The output integrated board 72 is provided with a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. As a result, when it becomes necessary to make the presence / absence of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and the increase / decrease in the number different between models, or when each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, display light emitting unit 53, and speaker unit When it becomes necessary to make the mode of electrical connection to 54 different between the models, it is only necessary to change the configuration of the output integrated board 72 between the models, and the configuration of the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80. (Excluding the structure of programs and data) can be used as it is between these models.

The distribution control device 70 may be mounted on a pachinko machine that is not provided with various display devices 41, 43, and 44. In this case, the wiring board is connected to the distribution control device 70 instead of the effect control device 80, and the wiring of the distribution control device 70 connected to the effect control device 80 in the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the wiring board. Make sure you are connected. Further, the software sound source is mounted on the distribution control board 71, and the dot display or the 7-segment display is connected to the output integrated board 72. In this case, the sound output control from the software sound source is executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 through the wiring routed using the wiring board, and the display control of the dot display or the 7-segment display is performed. It is preferable that the configuration is executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71.

The process executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 will be described. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as a main MPU 62, a main ROM 63 and a main RAM 64, and the MPU 73, ROM 74 and RAM 75 of the distribution control board 71 are on the distribution side. It is called MPU73, distribution side ROM74 and distribution side RAM75.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) on the distribution side MPU 73.

First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and control of the effect control device 80 is executed. In the table setting process, for example, the control pattern table for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is set. In the following step S302, the contents of the display control of the display devices 41, 43, 44, the contents of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and the contents of the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are provided in the effect control device 80 for the effect. The command selection process for instructing the CPU 82 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the effect CPU 82 according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301.

After that, in step S303, a movable object control process for performing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is executed. In the movable object control process, drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is executed according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301. After that, the pointer update process is executed in step S304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, identify which is the result of the jackpot generation lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of this game round, and specify the result. The information is written to the RAM 64.

After that, the notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the change display time corresponding to the occurrence status of the notice effect (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not each display device 41, 43, 44 will perform the advance notice effect in this game round. As such a notice effect, as described above, in a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the main display device 41, or in some cases. In a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in the symbol row, the character is displayed on any of the display devices 41, 43, 44 separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are those in which the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. The advance notice effect can occur in any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the advance notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the advance notice effect with a lower appearance rate in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. Is set to be easy to occur.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table stored in advance in the distribution side ROM 74 is read into the distribution side RAM 75. The advance notice lottery table is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variable command and a type command. Then, the value is acquired from the advance notice lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and the advance notice lottery result information corresponding to the acquired value is read out from the advance notice lottery table. Identify.

When a negative determination is made in step S403, or when the process of step S404 is executed, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the variation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect. (Step S405: YES), the reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406). That is, when the variation display time of the game times determined by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 62 If the variation display time of the game times determined in is not corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

As already explained, the reach effect corresponds to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. Further, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and the background image and the predetermined characters are displayed as moving images on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The reach effect is produced by the above, and the combination of the reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surface of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are predetermined. Includes those that produce a reach effect by displaying the characters of the above as a moving image. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the reach effect corresponding to the jackpot result has a lower appearance rate. It is set to be easy to occur.

In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table stored in advance in the distribution side ROM 74 is read out to the distribution side RAM 75. The reach lottery table is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variable command and a type command. Then, a value is acquired from the reach lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and the reach lottery result information corresponding to the acquired value is read out this time from the reach lottery table. Identify from.

When a negative determination is made in step S405 or the process of step S406 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same odd-numbered symbol combination may be selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even-numbered symbol combination may be selected in both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result is such that the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on ~ L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game time is an error result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the change command and the type command. Then, when the reach effect occurs, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the same symbols is not established. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is reached on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result this time.

After that, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the control pattern table setting process, the result of the advance notice lottery process (step S404), the presence / absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406) when the reach effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process (step S406). The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the distribution side ROM 74 and stored in the distribution side RAM 75.

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In this process, information on the variation display time of the current game is specified from the content of the variation command received this time from the main MPU 62, and the specified variation display time information is provided in the distribution side RAM 75. Set in the variable time counter. The fluctuation time counter is a counter for the distribution side MPU 73 to specify the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display device 41 is terminated and the final display of the symbol is started in the current game round. The value set in the fluctuation time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started on the distribution side MPU 73, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

In a situation where the execution control of the effect is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), the value of the fluctuation time counter of the distribution side RAM 75 set in step S409 is When it is "0" (step S411: YES), the information of the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the fixed time counter provided in the distribution side RAM 75 (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started on the distribution side MPU 73, that is, every time 4 msec elapses. After that, the confirmation display start command is transmitted to the effect CPU 82 (step S413). As a result, in the effect CPU 82, each symbol that is standby and displayed on the main display device 41 is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the confirmed display state is displayed for a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display of the main display device 41 is controlled so as to be maintained.

In the table setting process, in addition to each of the above processes, other processes are executed in step S414. In other processing, for example, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 62, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main MPU 62. Executes a process for ending the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, in the situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demo display effect is read out.

<Production control device 80>
Next, the effect control device 80 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the effect control device 80.

The effect control device 80 includes an effect CPU 82, a memory module 83, a work memory 84, an effect LSI 85, a VRAM 86, and an effect control including a light emitting circuit 87 and a sound output circuit 88 already described. A substrate 81 is provided.

The effect CPU 82 has a function as a main control unit in the effect control device 80, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the distribution side MPU 73, and various commands transmitted from the distribution side MPU 73 are input to the effect CPU 82. The effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the memory module 83 and the work memory 84 via the external bus 89, and the program and various data stored in the memory module 83 based on the command received from the distribution side MPU 73. Is instructed to be transferred to the work memory 84. Further, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the effect LSI 85 via an external bus 89, and outputs image signals to the display devices 41, 43, 44 based on the command received from the distribution side MPU 73. A drawing instruction to be generated, a light emission instruction to output the light emitting drive data to the light emitting circuit 87, and a sound output instruction to output the sound output driving data to the sound output circuit 88 are given. The main display device 41 displays a 2D image (two-dimensional image) or a 3D image (three-dimensional image), and also displays an image in which these 2D image and the 3D image are integrated. Further, the 3D images are not displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and only the 2D images are displayed.

The work memory 84 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 83 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work memory 84 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The work memory 84 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work memory 84 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the work memory 84 based on a data transfer instruction from the effect CPU 82 to the memory module 83. Specifically, all control data such as programs and data used by the effect CPU 82 are read into the work memory 84 when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. Then, the effect CPU 82 reads the control data transferred to the work memory 84 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The memory module 83 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and stores various image data for displaying images on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in advance. The memory module 83 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is satisfactorily executed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 83 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

The various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes image data for 2D images such as sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44, background data, and moving image data. include. Further, the various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes image data for a 3D image such as object data such as a character displayed on the main display device 41 and texture data pasted on the object data. It has been.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of the bitmap image at each pixel. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

Further, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices having three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture data is image data to be pasted on each polygon of the object data, and by pasting the texture data on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. To. The way of holding the texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and color palette data referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

In addition to the control data and various image data used by the effect CPU 82, the memory module 83 is determined by the display and light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern and from the speaker unit 54. Sound output data for performing sound output is stored in advance. The light emission data is data in a state in which the luminance data corresponding to the time-series lighting pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when the light emission control is executed in the effect LSI 85. Decoding processing is executed on the light emission data, and the data developed by the decoding processing is used. The sound output data is data in which the sound data corresponding to the time-series sound output pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when the sound output control is executed in the effect LSI 85. Decoding processing is executed on the output sound output data, and the data expanded by the decoding processing is used.

The VRAM 86 outputs various data necessary for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, various data necessary for outputting sound from the speaker unit 54, and image output to the display devices 41, 43, 44. It is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for the purpose. The VRAM 86 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The speed required for reading data of the VRAM 86 is faster than that of the memory module 83. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 86 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The effect LSI 85 has a function of drawing on each display device 41, 43, 44 using the image data read by the VRAM 86 based on a drawing instruction from the effect CPU 82, and based on a light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. Based on the function of controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 using the data read into the effect LSI85 and developed by the decoding process, and the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82, the data is read into the effect LSI85. It has a function of controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 using the data output and expanded by the decoding process.

Specifically, the effect LSI 85 includes an I / F 91, a transfer controller 92, a register 93, a pre-transfer control unit 94, a moving image decoder 95, a 2D control unit 96, a 3D control unit 97, and a first display. It includes a circuit 98, a second display circuit 99, a light emitting decoder 101, a light emitting control unit 102, a sound decoder 103, and a sound output control unit 104. Each of these circuits 91 to 104 is connected to each other via an internal bus 105, and the internal bus 105 is connected to an external bus 89 via an I / F 91.

The transfer controller 92 executes data transfer based on transfer instructions from the advance transfer control unit 94, the 2D control unit 96, the 3D control unit 97, the light emission control unit 102, and the sound output control unit 104. Specifically, data transfer from the memory module 83 to the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 and data transfer from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 are executed. In addition, data is read from the VRAM 86. The register 93 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data.

The pre-transfer control unit 94 is image data required when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 create drawing data for one frame based on the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. However, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the drawing process is read by the VRAM 86 by the time the drawing process is executed. As a result, the image data required for the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 to execute drawing is in a state of being read in advance by the VRAM 86.

The moving image decoder 95 executes the decoding process of the moving image data transferred to the VRAM 86. Although the details will be described later, a plurality of decoded image data (2D still image data) are created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the plurality of decoded image data are expanded in the register 93. .. The decoded image data expanded in the register 93 is used when the drawing process is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute processing by the control program according to the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. In addition, all the control programs for operating the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the effect LSI 85, and the control program is provided. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may execute a predetermined process depending on the contents of the drawing list and the drawing list. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 83.

When the drawing process is executed by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the drawing data for one frame is created in the VRAM 86 using (or by processing) the image data read into the VRAM 86. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44 is updated at a predetermined update timing. It means that. Although details will be described later, the VRAM 86 is provided with two frame areas for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44 as areas for creating drawing data for one frame. Each frame area is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame on the corresponding display devices 41, 43, 44. Specifically, each frame area includes a large number of unit areas in which dots (pixels) of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are associated with a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes. The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Incidentally, the 3D control unit 97 has a geometry calculation unit and a rendering unit. The geometry calculation unit arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 93. In addition, the geometry calculation unit executes various coordinate conversion processes when arranging the object data in the world coordinate system and after arranging the object data. Finally, the object is clipped so as to correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface. The rendering unit creates two-dimensional data by projecting each object data on a predetermined two-dimensional plane based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, and pastes the texture data to obtain the two-dimensional data. Create drawing data for a certain frame.

Since two frame areas are provided for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44, the drawing data created in one frame area of the main display device 41 is used, for example. In the situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is being executed, drawing data to be used in the future is created in the other frame area of the main display device 41. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame area.

The first display circuit 98 is an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 based on drawing data created in one frame area to be output out of the two frame areas corresponding to the main display device 41. Is generated, and the image signal is output to the main display device 41. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the first display circuit 98. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the main display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data.

The second display circuit 99 is each of the sub-display devices 43, 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame area to be output among the two frame areas corresponding to the sub-display devices 43, 44. An image signal corresponding to the dots is generated, and the image signal is output to the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the second display circuit 99. The transferred image data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolutions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is generated and output based on the gradation data.

The light emitting decoder 101 is based on the light emitting instruction from the effect CPU 82, until the light emitting data required when the light emitting control unit 102 executes the light emitting control at a predetermined timing becomes the timing to execute the light emitting control. A transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the data is read by the VRAM 86. Further, the light emitting decoder 101 creates the expanded luminance data by reading the light emitting data pre-transferred to the VRAM 86 and executing the decoding process on the light emitting data, and the created luminance data after expansion. Is stored in the register 93. As a result, the expanded luminance data of the light emitting data is stored in the register 93 by the time when the predetermined timing is reached.

The light emission control unit 102 outputs the luminance data expanded in the register 93 to the light emission circuit 87 based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the luminance data is output from the light emitting circuit 87, and the display light emitting unit 53 is put into a light emitting state in a manner according to the luminance data.

The sound decoder 103 executes the sound output control based on the sound output data required when the sound output control unit 104 executes the sound output control at a predetermined timing based on the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. A transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the data is read by the VRAM 86 by the time the timing is reached. Further, the sound decoder 103 creates sound data after expansion by reading the sound output data pre-transferred to the VRAM 86 and executing decoding processing on the sound output data, and the created sound data after expansion. Is stored in the register 93. As a result, the sound data after expansion of the sound output data is stored in the register 93 by the time when the predetermined timing is reached.

The sound output control unit 104 outputs the sound data expanded in the register 93 to the sound output circuit 88 based on the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the sound data is output from the sound output circuit 88, and a sound is output from the speaker unit 54 in a manner according to the sound data.

<Processing configuration of CPU 82 for production>
Next, the process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the effect CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

When the first display circuit 98 outputs an image signal for one frame to the main display device 41, the first display circuit 98 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface and includes the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots lined up on the line, and the image signal is output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface. When the second display circuit 99 outputs an image signal for one frame to the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the second display circuit 99 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of each display surface, and outputs the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots arranged on the horizontal line included in, and the image signal is output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface. In this case, the effect LSI 85 outputs a V interrupt signal to the effect CPU 82 at the timing when the image signal is output to the last dot for all of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to update the image of one frame. Is made to recognize that the production CPU 82 is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the image update cycle for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, the command analysis process is first executed (step S501). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer provided in the work memory 84 is analyzed. Here, when the effect CPU 82 receives the strobe signal from the distribution side MPU 73, it executes the command interrupt process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received from the distribution side MPU 73 is transferred to the command buffer of the work memory 84.

After that, the command correspondence process is executed on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S502: YES) (step S503). In the command correspondence process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 83. The execution target tables include a table for executing display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, a table for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and sound output control of the speaker unit 54. There is a table for. In the execution target table for display control, when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44, one frame of the image at each update timing of the image is displayed. The contents of the processing required for are defined. In the execution target table for light emission control, when the display light emitting unit 53 is to execute light emission by the light emission pattern corresponding to the received command, the contents of the processing necessary for causing the light emission at each light emission control timing are defined. ing. The execution target table for sound output control is required to output sound at each sound output control timing when the speaker unit 54 executes sound output according to the sound output pattern corresponding to the received command. The content of the process is defined.

The commands received by the effect CPU 82 from the distribution side MPU 73 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of the advance notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, a command for starting confirmation display, a command for starting notification, and so on. There is a notification release command, etc. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect or notification corresponding to each of these commands on the display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is read out.

When a negative determination is made in step S502 or when the process of step S503 is executed, task process for light emission control (step S504), task process for sound output control (step S505), and task process for display control (step). S506) is executed.

In the task processing for light emission control, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the usage target of the light emission control, it is produced in order to realize the light emission mode corresponding to the current instruction timing. Various data necessary for giving a light emission instruction to the LSI 85 are set. Specifically, when it is the timing to instruct the execution of the light emitting data decoding process, the address information of the area where the light emitting data is stored in the memory module 83 and the register 93 indicate the various data. The address information of the area for transferring the light emission data and the information for instructing the light emission decoder 101 to decode the light emission data are present. Further, when this time is the timing for instructing the change of the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 53, the above-mentioned various data includes an area in which data to be used among the light emitting data expanded in the register 93 is stored. Address information etc. exists.

In the task processing for sound output control, the sound output mode corresponding to the current instruction timing is realized by referring to the control data of the current processing times in the execution target table set as the usage target of the sound output control. Therefore, various data necessary for instructing the effect LSI 85 to output sound are set. Specifically, as the various data, when it is the timing to instruct the execution of the decoding process of the sound output data, the address information of the area where the sound output data is stored in the memory module 83, the register 93. There is address information of the area to which the sound output data is transferred, and information for instructing the sound decoder 103 to decode the sound output data. Further, when this time is the timing for instructing the change of the sound output mode of the speaker unit 54, the data to be used among the sound output data expanded in the register 93 is stored in the various data. Area address information etc. exists.

In the task processing for display control, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the usage target of the display control, the image for one frame corresponding to the current instruction timing is displayed. Therefore, various data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the effect LSI 85 are set. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 83, the information of the frame area of the target for which drawing data should be created using the image data of the control target, and the control. There is coordinate information when writing the target image data, scale information when writing the image data, and uniform α value (semi-transparent value) information when writing the image data.

After that, the list output process is executed (step S507). In the list output processing, a light emission list for setting the light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, a sound output list for setting the sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, and the current processing time. Each of the drawing lists for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the instruction timing of is created, and the created various lists are transmitted to the effect LSI 85. In this case, in the light emission list, the light emission data grasped by the task process for light emission control immediately before is set as the usage target. The light emitting decoder 101 of the effect LSI 85 executes decoding processing of light emission data according to the light emission list, and the light emission control unit 102 of the production LSI 85 outputs the light emission data to the light emission circuit 87 according to the light emission list. Further, in the sound output list, the sound output data grasped by the task processing for the immediately preceding sound output control is set as the usage target. The sound decoder 103 of the production LSI 85 executes decoding processing of sound output data according to the sound output list, and the sound output control unit 104 of the production LSI 85 performs sound output to the sound output circuit 88 according to the sound output list. Output data. Further, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the task process for display control immediately before is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 create drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM 86 according to this drawing list. The processing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 will be described in detail later.

The task processing for display control in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the setting process for starting control is executed (step S601). In the control start setting process, based on the currently set display control execution target table, a process for setting an individual image for which control (calculation) is newly started in the effect CPU 82 at this processing time. To execute. The individual image is defined by one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for a pattern and image data for a back surface, or a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is a 3D image of Ruichi.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, it is determined whether or not an individual image to be controlled starts exists in this processing time. To do. If it exists, the work memory 84 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and one-to-one with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate free buffer area to correspond. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer area.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S602). The control update target is an individual image for which the setting process for starting control has been completed and may be included in the image for one frame after this processing.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S603). In the background arithmetic processing, if it is the backmost image that constitutes the background image or the 2D image of the background characters, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and uniform α value in the virtual two-dimensional plane. And various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as α data specification is calculated and derived. On the other hand, in the background arithmetic processing, if it is the backmost image that constitutes the background image or the 3D image of the background characters, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and brightness in the world coordinate system are used. It executes a process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as light information for attaching an image, camera information for projecting, and Z test designation.

After that, the effect calculation process is executed (step S604). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, notice effect, and jackpot effect is executed. In addition, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for the individual image to be displayed when various notifications are performed.

After that, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S605). In the operation calculation process for symbols, among the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target.

Incidentally, in each of the processes of steps S603 to S605, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S601 is executed. Further, in each process of steps S603 to S605, animation data set so as to change various parameters of individual images according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in the memory module 83 in advance, and is pre-transferred to the work memory 84 before the timing needs to be read by the effect CPU 82.

After that, the drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S606). In the drawing instruction target grasping process, one frame of the individual image targeted for control update by each of the arithmetic processes of step S603, step S604, and step S605 is selected as the image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction. Execute the process of grasping the included individual images. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle and the scale of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. By setting the individual images specified in the drawing list as only the individual images to be displayed instead of all the individual images whose control has already started, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 display the individual images. It is not necessary to sort the individual images of the above, and even if the individual images are not sorted, it is not necessary to wastefully draw the individual images that are not the display targets. As a result, the processing load of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can be reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the effect CPU 82 and the individual image to be controlled by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may be the same. In that case, it is not necessary to execute the process of step S606.

The contents of displaying the 2D image and the 3D image will be described by using the drawing list created based on the result of the task processing for display control.

When the image is displayed on the main display device 41, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the back side, and when a predetermined display effect occurs, the effect is produced in front of the background image. An effect image such as a character for a game is displayed, and in the case of an effect for a game round, a design image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed in front of the background image and the effect image. .. In this case, the background image and the effect image are displayed as a 3D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97, and the symbol image is displayed as a 2D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96. Therefore, as the drawing list for displaying the image on the main display device 41, the drawing instruction is given by the 3D drawing list for displaying the 3D image for the background image and the effect image, and the 2D image is displayed for the symbol image. A drawing instruction is given by a 2D drawing list for display. As an image display on the main display device 41, a 3D image is displayed for the background image and the effect image to enable realistic image display, and a 2D image is displayed for the design image to reduce the processing load. Is possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image, a 2D image may be displayed for the effect image and the symbol image, and the 3D image may be displayed for the background image and the symbol image. The 2D image may be displayed for the effect image, the 2D image may be displayed for the background image and the effect image, and the 3D image may be displayed for the design image.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the register 93 used when the drawing process is executed by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 111 for main display as an area used for displaying an image on the main display device 41. The drawing area 111 for main display includes a 2D drawing area 112 in which drawing data for displaying a symbol image as a 2D image on the main display device 41 is created, and a background image and an effect image as 3D images on the main display device 41. A 3D drawing area 113 in which drawing data for displaying the image is created is provided. Further, the drawing area 111 for the main display is provided with a first frame area 114 for the main and a second frame area 115 for the main. The main display device is formed by synthesizing the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 in each of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115. Drawing data for one frame to be displayed on 41 is created. In this case, in a situation where drawing to the main display device 41 is executed using the drawing data created in one of the main frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115, the other frame area 115. Drawing data to be used in the future is created for the frame area.

On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on the back side, and a predetermined display effect is produced. When it occurs, an effect image such as an effect character is displayed in front of the background image. In this case, these background images and effect images are displayed as 2D images. That is, although the 2D image is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the 3D image is not displayed. Therefore, with respect to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the drawing instruction by the 3D drawing list is not given, and the drawing instruction by the 2D drawing list is given. By configuring the images displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to use only the 2D image without using the 3D image, not only the main display device 41 but also the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided. In the configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying an image on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 116 for sub-display as an area used for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. The drawing area 116 for sub-display is provided with a first frame area 117 for sub and a second frame area 118 for sub. In each of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, the 2D control unit 96 creates drawing data for displaying the background image and the effect image as 2D images on the sub display devices 43 and 44. Will be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, in each of the sub-use first frame area 117 and the sub-use second frame area 118, drawing data and a second drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 are provided. Drawing data for the sum of drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the sub-display device 44 is created. In this case, drawing to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is performed using the drawing data created in one of the sub-use first frame area 117 and the sub-use second frame area 118. In the running situation, drawing data to be used in the future is created for the other frame area.

As described above, both the 2D image and the 3D image can be simultaneously displayed as the image for one frame on the main display device 41, and the 2D image is displayed as the image for one frame on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In, each time the image update timing for one frame is reached, the image for one frame is updated in each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44, and the image for each frame at the image update timing is updated. A combination of at least one 2D drawing list and at least one 3D drawing list is provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 for updating. That is, when the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96 for at least one 2D drawing list and the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for at least one 3D drawing list are completed, the display devices 41, 43, 44 are completed. Creation of drawing data for one frame of the image is completed.

Next, a drawing list for 2D for displaying a 2D image will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c).

Header information is set in the 2D drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which frame area 114, 115, 117, 118 to draw the drawing data for displaying the image corresponding to the 2D drawing list, is set. There is. Specifically, information indicating which of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115 to draw the drawing data for displaying the image on the main display device 41 is set. Information indicating which of the first frame area 117 for the sub and the second frame area 118 for the sub to draw the drawing data for displaying the image on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is set. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the 2D drawing list includes frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118 of each image data as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame. Information on display order priority data indicating the drawing order to the data, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored are set. In detail, the information of the display order priority data is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the combination of the parameter information and the address information is set so that each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence. ..

The display order priority data is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display surface in the image for one frame are first drawn. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the 2D drawing list of FIG. 17A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame area to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (0), P (1), P (2), .... Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), the background data parameter P (0) indicates a position on a virtual two-dimensional plane (frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118) when the background data is written. Coordinate information, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and the magnification when writing to the frame area with respect to the size set as the initial state of the background data. Information on the scale to be shown, information on a uniform α value indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data, and information on specifying α data indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target are set. There is. As shown in FIG. 17C, the types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but the information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The 2D control unit 96 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinates. To do so. As a result, the information capacity (that is, the amount of data) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the effect LSI85 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel at a corner such as an upper left or an upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, it becomes easier for the effect LSI 85 to recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored is set in the address information A (0), A (1), A (2), .... Here, when each image data is used in the effect LSI 85, the image data is not directly read from the memory module 83 and used, but is provided in the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 by the time when the use of the image data is started. The image data is read into the pre-transfer area 86a (see FIG. 13) and the image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a for use. In this case, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the memory module 83 is used as address information except for the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data. The information of the address ID corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored is set. Then, when the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 transfers the image data from the address area of the memory module 83 corresponding to the information of the address ID to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area 86a is used. The information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data has been transferred is overwritten with the address information corresponding to the image data to be read this time in the 2D drawing list.

On the other hand, since the decoded image data is written in the expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) for moving images provided in the register 93, it does not need to be read from the memory module 83. Therefore, when the decoded image data is set in the 2D drawing list, the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is the area in which the decoded image data to be used this time is stored in the development area 119 for moving images. The address is set. Since the decoded image data is treated by the pre-transfer control unit 94 as not being transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not rewrite the address information corresponding to the decoded image data in the drawing list. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially blank, and the address information is used in the pre-transfer area 94 and the decoded image data is used in the moving image development area 119. The configuration may be such that information for specifying the address of the area where is stored is set.

The 2D drawing list in which the address information has been rewritten is the target of the drawing process in the 2D control unit 96, and the 2D control unit 96 is set as the address information in the 2D drawing list during the drawing process. Image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a corresponding to the above or the development area 119 for moving images. By the way, moving image data can be set as the image data to be used in the drawing list for 2D, but when the moving image data is set, the moving image data is first read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Decoding processing by the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 is executed on the moving image data that has been output and read out in the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, the plurality of decoded image data obtained by the decoding process are stored in the development area 119 for moving images as described above. However, the moving image data itself is excluded from the execution target of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96.

In this way, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address ID information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored is set as the address information in the memory module 83. On the other hand, the address information for specifying the transfer destination area from the memory module 83 of the image data is not set. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82. Further, since the effect CPU 82 does not need to set the address information for specifying the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred in the 2D drawing list, the effect CPU 82 is used for producing the 2D drawing list. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 82.

Further, when the transfer of the image data from the memory module 83 in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the address information of the 2D drawing list is the image data to be transferred in the memory module 83. The information of the address ID corresponding to the address of the area in which is stored is rewritten to the information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data to be transferred is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, even if the information corresponding to the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is not initially set in the 2D drawing list, the 2D control unit 96 may execute the drawing process in advance. The information corresponding to the address of the area of the transfer area 86a is set in the 2D drawing list.

Next, a drawing list for 3D for displaying a 3D image will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 18A and 18B.

Header information is set in the 3D drawing list as in the 2D drawing list. The content of the header information is the same as in the case of the drawing list for 2D. In the 3D drawing list, in addition to the above header information, as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time, each image data is added to the world coordinate system. Information on display order priority data indicating the arrangement order, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored are set. In detail, the information of the display order priority data is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the combination of the parameter information and the address information is set so that each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence. ..

In the 3D drawing list of FIG. 18A, the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B is set as the third object, and so on. Has been done. Further, the image data for the effect is set in the order after the image data for the background. For example, the object A for the effect is set as the mth, the object B for the effect is set as the m + 1th, and so on. There is.

Parameter information P'(0), P'(1), P'(2), ..., P'(m), P'(m + 1), ..., Multiple types of parameter information are set. ing. Regarding the parameter information P'(0) of the image data for the back surface, specifically, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the information of the coordinates indicating the position in the world coordinate system when the image data for the back surface is set. (X value information, Y value information, Z value information), rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back surface, and initial image data for the back surface. For the scale set as the state, the scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system and the uniform α indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when setting the image data for the back surface. Value information and is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. Moreover, although the information of this coordinate is set for the object data, it is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 83 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI85 at the time of texture mapping.

The parameter information P'(0) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when projecting image data for the back surface on a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and image data for the back surface. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case of rendering is set.

In the parameter information P'(0), information specified by the Z test indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for erasing the hidden surface, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is for each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis when a large number of objects or 2D images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment that sequentially refers to the distance from the viewpoint and sets the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint to the corresponding unit area in the frame area.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame area for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When applying the Z sort method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of the numerical information and the arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when displaying an effect image or the like.

In the parameter information P'(0), information on α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and information on fog designation indicating whether or not fog is applied and an application target are set. Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, a Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained. In this case, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. As a result, the effect of setting the fog can be obtained while not impairing the texture.

Address information A'(0), A'(1), A'(2), ..., Similar to the 2D drawing list, contains information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored. It is set. In this case, in the 3D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address ID information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as the address information. Corresponds to the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a when the transfer of the image data to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is completed in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85. The point that the address information is rewritten to the information, and when the decoded image data is set in the drawing list for 3D, the address information is the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the expansion area 119 for moving images. The point that the information corresponding to is set from the beginning and the rewriting process for the address information by the advance transfer control unit 94 is not executed is the same as the drawing list for 2D. However, in the 3D image, since the image data of the object and the image data of the texture are required to display one kind of individual image, the image data of the object and the image data of the texture are set as one drawing target. At the same time, address information is set for each of the image data of those objects and the image data of the texture.

Next, the 2D drawing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a 2D drawing process executed by the 2D control unit 96. The 2D control unit 96 executes the 2D drawing process by using the program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the 2D control unit 96 when the supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D control unit 96 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 2D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 2D drawing list in the register 93 for which the execution of the drawing process has not been completed. (Step S701). The 2D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 2D drawing area 112 in the drawing area 111 for the main display by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 2D control unit 96 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. .. When the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 2D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 by the drawing process is one frame. The 2D creation completion flag is cleared to "0" when the drawing data is drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create the drawing data for the minutes. Further, when there is an unfinished 2D drawing list, when there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and when there is a 2D drawing list that has not yet been executed for drawing processing. Applicable when there is a drawing list for.

When the value of the 2D creation completion flag is "0" and there is an incomplete 2D drawing list, the drawing target update process is executed (step S702). In the drawing target update process, when one new 2D drawing list is to be executed this time, the image data set first of the display order priority data in the 2D drawing list is drawn this time. Select as the execution target of the process. On the other hand, if this time is in the process of creating one 2D drawing list, the image data set as the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data of the image data that was the execution target of the previous drawing process. Is selected as the execution target of this drawing process.

After that, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data to be executed this drawing process is transferred or the decoded image data to be executed this drawing process is expanded for the moving image. The address of the area of the expansion area 119 of the above is grasped from the address information in the drawing list for 2D (step S703). In this case, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving images, the image data is read from the address of the expanding area 119 for moving images.

Further, the parameters to be applied to the image data to be executed in the drawing process this time are grasped by executing an operation or the like using the parameter information in the 2D drawing list (step S704). After that, the writing process for drawing the image data to be executed this drawing process in the area to be drawn with the parameters grasped in step S704 applied is executed (step S705). In this writing process, if drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is created, the writing process is executed on the 2D drawing area 112 of the register 93, and the images are displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. When creating drawing data for this purpose, write processing is executed in the frame area on the side of the register 93, which is the target for creating the drawing data this time, out of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118. ..

After that, it is determined whether or not the execution of the processes of steps S702 to S705 is completed for all the image data specified in one or two drawing lists for 2D corresponding to the image display for one frame ((). Step S706). When the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame is one, the image data in the last order among the plurality of types of image data that are the drawing instruction targets in the 2D drawing list. Creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data. Further, when the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame is two, the order in which the drawing processing is executed is a plurality of types that are the drawing instruction targets in the rear 2D drawing list. The creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order among the image data of. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data this time. When the creation completion data is set (step S706: YES), the execution of the processes of steps S702 to S705 is completed for all the image data specified in the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame. “1” is set in the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 to mean that the data has been created (step S707).

Next, the 3D drawing process executed by the 3D control unit 97 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a 3D drawing process executed by the 3D control unit 97. The 3D control unit 97 executes the 3D drawing process by using the program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the 3D control unit 97 when the supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 3D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 3D drawing list in the register 93 for which the execution of the drawing process has not been completed. (Step S801). The 3D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the drawing area 111 for the main display by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 3D control unit 97 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. .. When the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, the 3D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 by the drawing process is one frame. The 3D creation completion flag is cleared to "0" when the drawing data is drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create the drawing data for the minutes. Further, when there is an unfinished 3D drawing list, when there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and when there is a 3D drawing list that has not yet been executed for drawing processing. Applicable when there is a drawing list for.

When the value of the 3D creation completion flag is "0" and there is an incomplete 3D drawing list, the processes of steps S802 to S810 are executed. In the processing of steps S802 to S810, it is first determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in one 3D drawing list, and the creation completion data is set. If so, only one 3D drawing list is set as the execution target of the processes of steps S802 to S810. On the other hand, when the creation completion data is not set, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in the drawing list for 3D in the next order, and the creation completion data is determined. If is set, the two 3D drawing lists up to that point are collectively targeted for execution of the processes of steps S802 to S810. As a result, even when a plurality of 3D drawing lists are set as 3D drawing lists for displaying an image for one frame, it is possible to appropriately create 3D drawing data. ..

In step S802, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a or the development area 119 for the moving image in which the image data for the background designated as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list is stored is obtained from the address information in the 3D drawing list. Grasp (step S802). In this case, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving images, the image data is read from the address of the expanding area 119 for moving images. After that, the setting process for the background is executed (step S803).

In the background setting process, it is determined whether or not the background image data whose address information has been grasped in step S802 has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the free buffer area to be referred to for arranging it in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if the free buffer area is secured, the initialization process of that area is executed. After that, the world conversion that converts the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data for the background into the coordinate values of the world coordinate system so as to have the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the parameter information in the 3D drawing list. Execute the process and set it in the buffer area secured above. If it is arranged, the parameters to be applied to the target background image data can be grasped by executing calculations using the parameter information in the 3D drawing list, and the buffer area already secured can be used. Executes the update processing of various set parameters. Further, in the background setting process, the control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

After that, the addresses of the pre-transfer area 86a in which the image data for the effect designated as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list is stored and the area of the expansion area 119 for the moving image are grasped from the address information in the 3D drawing list. (Step S804). In this case, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address in the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the expansion area 119 for moving images, the image data is read from the address of the expanding area 119 for moving images. After that, the setting process for the effect is executed (step S805).

In the setting process for the effect, it is determined whether or not the image data for the effect whose address information is grasped in step S804 is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, various parameter update processes are executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. Further, in the setting process for the effect, the control end process for erasing the image data for the effect that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

By executing the processes of steps S802 to S805, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 21, the objects are arranged by the 3D drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 designated as are arranged with the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale also specified by the drawing list for 3D is completed. .. Note that FIG. 21 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PCs 2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S806). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the 3D drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set to the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 21, the viewpoint PC 11 shown in the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC 11 is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and the camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

After that, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S807). In the conversion process to the field of view coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems is converted into a field of view coordinate system corresponding to the field of view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S808). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S807 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, each individual image extracted in step S807 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 21) corresponding to the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the main display device 41 to be drawn in that state. To clip.

After that, the lighting process is executed (step S809). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the 3D drawing list, and each object extracted by the clipping process is shaded or reflected based on the virtual light source. Calculate.

After that, each individual image clipped in step S808 and further completed in the lighting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection), and the projected data is projected. By executing the color information setting process, drawing data for 3D is created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the register 93 (step S810). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units for the projected data. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting the corresponding texture data to the projected data is executed. In addition, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping or transparency mapping is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S801 or the process of step S810 is executed, "1" is set in the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 (step S811). After that, by determining whether or not "1" is set in both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93, the 2D control unit for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is determined whether or not the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for the drawing process by 96 and the drawing list for 3D corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed (step S812). That is, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data of the image for one frame in each display device 41, 43, 44 is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S812, both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag are cleared to "0" (step S813). After that, the drawing data composition process is executed (step S814). In the drawing data composition process, the first frame area 114 for the main and the second frame area 115 for the main of the register 93 are first created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area for which the drawing data is to be created this time. The drawing data is written, and then the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 is written. In this case, since the α value of complete transparency is set in the area where the image data is not set in the 2D drawing area 112, the drawing data written from the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area to be created is compared with respect to the drawing data. Only the drawing data of the portion corresponding to the symbol image in the 2D drawing area 112 is additionally drawn. When drawing the drawing data of the part corresponding to this pattern image, the area where the opaque α value is set is overwritten, and the area where the translucent α value is set is semi-transparent. Blending processing using the α value is performed. By executing the drawing data composition process, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the main display device 41 is completed. As for each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, as described above, the image data is directly drawn with respect to the frame area to be created among the sub-first frame area 117 and the sub-second frame area 118, so that the image data is 2D. When "1" is set in the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 in the drawing process (FIG. 19), the creation of drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is completed. doing.

<Structure related to handling of drawing list in production LSI85>
Next, a configuration related to the handling of the drawing list in the effect LSI 85 will be described. As described above, two frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118 are provided in each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and 1 is based on the drawing data created in one of the frame areas. In the situation where the image for one frame is displayed, drawing data for displaying the image for one frame at the update timing of the next image is created for the other frame area. Further, the image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 is used when creating the drawing data, but the image data used when creating the drawing data is before the timing of creating the drawing data using the image data. The data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86.

The timing at which the drawing data is created and the timing at which the image data is pre-transferred will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22 (a) shows the pre-transfer period of the image data, FIG. 22 (b) shows the period for creating the drawing data, and FIG. 22 (c) shows the update timing of the images of the display devices 41, 43, 44. ..

As shown in FIG. 22 (c), the main display is displayed at each of t1 timing, t2 timing, t3 timing, t4 timing, t5 timing, t6 timing, t7 timing, t8 timing, and t9 timing. The image update in the device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, drawing data is created at each of the timings t1 to t9. These drawing data are drawing data of the frame order corresponding to the next update timing with respect to the frame order corresponding to the current image update timing. For example, at the timing of t1, the image at the kth frame is updated on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as shown in FIG. 22 (c), whereas the image at the k + 1th frame is updated as shown in FIG. 22 (b). Creation of drawing data for displaying the image of is started. As described above, since the double buffer method is adopted in each display device 41, 43, 44, the image is displayed using the drawing data created in one frame area. Drawing data corresponding to the update timing of the next image is created for the frame area of.

In the configuration in which the image is displayed and the drawing data is created in each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 as described above, the image data used when creating the drawing data is the drawing data created by using the image data. The data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing prior to the creation start timing of. There are a plurality of types of such advance transfer modes. One aspect is a mode in which the image data used when creating the drawing data is read out by using the immediately preceding creation period with respect to the creation period of the drawing data created by using the image data. Specifically, at the timing of t1, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image at the k + 1th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22 (b), whereas the drawing data is started as shown in FIG. 22 (a). The reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 2nd frame into the VRAM 86 is started. Similarly, at the timing of t2, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 2nd frame is started as shown in FIG. 22 (b), whereas the creation of drawing data is started as shown in FIG. 22 (a). Reading of the image data required for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the frameth frame to the VRAM86 is started, and at the timing of t3, the image of the k + 3rd frame is displayed as shown in FIG. 22B. The creation of the drawing data of the above is started, while the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 4th frame to the VRAM 86 is started as shown in FIG. 22 (a). At the timing of t4, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image at the k + 4th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22 (b), whereas the creation of the drawing data for displaying the image at the k + 4th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22 (a). Reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image to the VRAM 86 is started. According to such an image data reading mode, it is possible to limit the data capacity of the image data that needs to be reliably read to the VRAM 86 to two frames.

In another aspect of the pre-transfer, the reading period of the image data required to create the drawing data for one frame is not limited to the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, but is drawn. One image update timing while ensuring that the image data used when creating the data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing prior to the creation start timing of the drawing data created using the image data. This is an embodiment in which the image data is read so as to straddle the period between the image data and the next image update timing. In other words, in the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is completed and the predetermined frame is read. In this mode, the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the images of the next frame in the next order to the eyes is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image at the k + 5th frame is started at the timing of t5, and the image at the k + 6th frame is displayed at the timing of t6. The creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 7th frame is started at the timing of t7, the creation of the drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 7th frame is started at the timing of t7, and the drawing for displaying the image of the k + 8th frame is started at the timing of t8. The creation of data is started, and the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k + 9th frame is started at the timing of t9, whereas as shown in FIG. 22A, the timing of t9 starts from the timing of t9. Over the timing in the middle of the timing, the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the images in the k + 6th frame to the k + 9th frame is read into the VRAM 86. According to such an image data reading mode, the period required for reading the image data required for creating the drawing data for displaying the image at the predetermined frame is one image update timing and the next image update timing. Even if it is longer than the interim period, it is possible to absorb the excess period by using the free time of reading caused by the period required for reading the image data being shorter than the period between the image update timings. It becomes.

The instruction for pre-transferring the image data to the effect LSI 85 by the effect CPU 82 is given by using the drawing list as described above. In the drawing list at the stage transmitted from the effect CPU 82, information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set in association with the type of image data required for creating the drawing data. However, the information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the VRAM 86 is not set. When the image data is transferred to the VRAM 86 by the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85, the information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is the information of the image data in the VRAM 86. It is rewritten with the information corresponding to the address of the forwarding area. Then, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 use the drawing list after the address information has been rewritten to specify the area where the image data is read in the VRAM 86 and from that area. Drawing data is created using the read image data.

In correspondence with such handling of the drawing list, an area in which the drawing list is stored is set in the register 93 of the effect LSI85. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an area in which the drawing list is stored in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85.

As shown in FIG. 23, the register 93 contains a storage area 121 for pre-transfer in which drawing lists transmitted from the effect CPU 82 are sequentially stored, and a drawing list stored in the storage area 121 for pre-transfer. When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the above to the VRAM 86 is completed, the drawing list overwritten with the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area is sequentially stored in the storage area 122 for post-transfer. And are provided. The storage areas 121 for pre-transfer are provided with the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer, and the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 is sequentially stored in the storage areas 121a to 121t. Specifically, when a new drawing list is transmitted from the effect CPU 82 in a situation where the drawing list is stored up to the mth storage area, the drawing list is stored in the m + 1 storage area. Further, when the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs the pre-transfer of the image data specified by the drawing list, the pre-transfer targets the drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in order from the drawing list. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first storage area 121a before transfer is the execution target of the pre-transfer, and when the drawing list is the execution target of the pre-transfer, the first storage area before the transfer is executed. After clearing "0" of 121a, the drawing list stored in the m + 1 storage area is shifted to the m storage area. The number of drawing lists that can be stored in the storage area 121 for pre-transfer is not limited to 20, and it is optional as long as the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be completely processed by the effect LSI 85. is there. By the way, in order to display an image for one frame on each display device 41, 43, 44, one or two drawing lists for 2D corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame are as described above. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to the image display are used, a maximum of four storage areas out of the first to 20th storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer can display an image for one frame. It is used to store the drawing list corresponding to.

The storage area 122 for post-transfer is provided with the first to 20th storage areas 122a to 122t after transfer, and the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the pre-transfer of the image data and rewrites the address information. The list is sequentially stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t. Specifically, when the pre-transfer of the image data for one drawing list in the pre-transfer control unit 94 is completed in the situation where the drawing list is stored up to the nth storage area, the drawing list is rewritten with the address information. After that, it is stored in the n + 1 storage area. When the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 creates drawing data, the drawing process is executed in order from the drawing list previously stored in the storage area 122 for post-transfer. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first storage area 122a for post-transfer is the target of execution of the drawing process, and when the drawing list is the target of execution of the drawing process, the first storage after transfer is performed. After clearing the area 122a to "0", the drawing list stored in the n + 1 storage area is shifted to the nth storage area. The number of drawing lists that can be stored in the storage area 122 for post-transfer is not limited to 20, and all the drawing lists for which pre-transfer has been completed can be processed by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. If there is, it is optional. By the way, in order to display an image for one frame on each display device 41, 43, 44, one or two drawing lists for 2D corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame are as described above. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to the image display are used, four storage areas out of the first to 20th storage areas 122a to 122t for post-transfer can be used for displaying an image for one frame. Used to store the corresponding drawing list.

A storage area group for storing the 2D drawing list and a storage area group for storing the 3D drawing list may be separately provided as the storage area 122 for post-transfer. In this case, the reading of the 2D drawing list by the 2D control unit 96 and the reading of the 3D drawing list by the 3D control unit 97 are set in the storage area between the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list. It is possible to do it independently regardless of.

Next, the configuration of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 to which the image data is pre-transferred and the handling of the image data read into the pre-transfer area 86a will be described. FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance transfer area 86a.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the pre-transfer area 86a is set as a part of the VRAM 86. The pre-transfer area 86a has a storage capacity capable of storing and holding a large number of image data at one time. Specifically, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided so that 256 image data can be stored and held at one time. Each data storage area 123 has the same storage capacity, and the storage capacity is a capacity capable of storing image data having the maximum storage capacity. Further, even if a plurality of image data having a total storage capacity smaller than the storage capacity of one data storage area 123 exists as a read target to the advance transfer area 86a, the plurality of image data Reads one image data for one data storage area 123.

When the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads out the image data according to the drawing list, the data storage area 123, which is the target of reading out the image data, is sequentially changed in a predetermined order. Specifically, the data storage area 123 is set so that the order of the 0th to the 255th is generated, and the final address in the kth data storage area 123 is the start in the k + 1th data storage area 123. It is a serial number with the address. When the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads one image data into the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 has the following order with respect to the data storage area 123 that stores the image data to be read in the execution time of the pre-transfer immediately before that. The image data to be read this time is stored in the data storage area 123.

In order to specify the type of the data storage area 123 of the read destination, the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is provided with an identification information counter 124 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24 (b). The identification information counter 124 has a data capacity of 1 byte, and any of the information corresponding to the numbers "0" to "255" can be set. When the pre-transfer control unit 94 stores one image data in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 stores the image data in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124. Then, after the image data is stored, the value corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124 is added by 1, and the image data storage target is updated to the data storage area 123 in the next order.

In the configuration in which 255 data storage areas 123 are provided as described above, in the next pre-transfer processing time when image data is stored in the 255th data storage area 123, the 0th data storage is performed. Area 123 is the transfer destination for image data. In this case, the image data that has already been read into the 0th data storage area 123 will be deleted when the new image data is read. However, the number of data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a is set so that the image data instructed to be read by the drawing list is not erased without being used when creating the drawing data. Specifically, an image in which the mode of pre-transfer as shown in the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22A is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of subsequent use when creating drawing data. In this mode, the number of data is the largest, but the number of data storage areas 123 is larger than the maximum number of image data assumed in this case. More specifically, the image data for 3 frames will be read into the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of subsequent use, but the number of image data for 3 frames is larger than the maximum number of image data assumed. However, the number of data storage areas 123 is large. As a result, although the image data is pre-transferred according to the predetermined drawing list, the image data that should have been pre-transferred is deleted from the pre-transfer area 86a at the stage of creating the drawing data corresponding to the predetermined drawing list. It is possible to prevent the situation that it has been closed.

In the configuration in which 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a, a transfer instruction of the same image data as the image data already read in any of the data storage areas 123 can be given by the drawing list. .. In this case, if the image data is purposely read from the memory module 83 and read into the pre-transfer area 86a, the reading efficiency deteriorates. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, if the image data targeted for the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the image data is not read from the memory module 83. It has become.

However, as described above, the advance transfer control unit 94 has a configuration in which the data storage area 123 to be read out of the image data is sequentially updated in a predetermined order by referring to the identification information counter 124 of the register 93. .. Therefore, when the image data targeted for the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in any of the data storage areas 123, the advance transfer control unit 94 uses the image data as data corresponding to the current identification information counter 124. Copy to storage area 123. That is, although the image data is not read from the memory module 83, the data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it is possible to read the image data to the data storage area 123 in the order according to the identification information counter 124, and to improve the reading efficiency of the image data. If the image data targeted for the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current identification information counter 124, the image data is maintained in that state without being copied. However, only the identification information counter 124 is updated.

In order to enable the advance transfer control unit 94 to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the register 93 of the effect LSI 85 is set. A search table 125 is provided. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125.

As shown in FIG. 25, the search table 125 is set so that the identification information set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a is serially numbered in the order of the data storage area 123. And the address ID is set so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with each identification information. The address ID is data that enables the advance transfer control unit 94 to specify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. More specifically, the address ID is information set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82, and the address ID is an area in which the corresponding image data is stored in the memory module 83. Corresponds to the start address of. As described above, when the pre-transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data instructed in the drawing list from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 in the area where the image data is read out in the pre-transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address is overwritten with the address information of the drawing list, and at that time, the address ID corresponding to the start address among the address ID groups previously set in the address information of the drawing list is displayed in the search table 125. The image data is written in the storage area of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of the read data storage area 123. As a result, the address ID of the start address corresponding to the image data stored in the data storage area 123 is set in the search table 125 corresponding to each data storage area 123. Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 can specify by referring to the search table 125 whether or not the image data to be transferred is already read into the pre-transfer area 86a by the drawing list. At the same time, if it has already been read, the type of the data storage area 123 from which the image data has been read can be specified.

A state in which the address information of the drawing list and the address ID of the search table are rewritten will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d). FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI85, and FIG. 26B is a diagram before the pre-transfer of image data according to the drawing list is performed. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in the situation, and FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list after the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the rewriting of the address information is completed. FIG. 26D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in the situation after the pre-transfer of the image data according to the drawing list is completed.

As shown in FIG. 26A, in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the addresses of "A253" to "A257" are used as the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0". The ID range is set, and the address ID range of "B348" to "B350" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1", and the display order priority data is "1". The range of address IDs of "C001" to "C003" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data of "2". In this case, the image data whose display order priority data is "0" is stored in the memory module 83 in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "A253" to "A257", and the display order priority data. The image data of "1" is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs of "B348" to "B350" in the memory module 83, and the display order priority data is "2". Is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs of "C001" to "C003" in the memory module 83.

When the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list of FIG. 26 (a), the pre-transfer target image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a by first referring to the search table 125. It is specified whether or not the data has already been read into any of the data storage areas 123 of. Since the start address of the address ID is used for this identification, if the display order priority data is image data of "0", it is specified whether or not "A253" is set in the search table 125, and the display order is displayed. If the priority data is "1" image data, specify whether "B348" is set in the search table 125, and if the display order priority data is "2" image data, "C001" is searched. Specify whether or not it is set in the table 125.

According to the drawing list shown in FIG. 26 (a) in the search table 125 of the aspect shown in FIG. 26 (b) and the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 of the image data read destination is “123”. When pre-transferring the image data, the start address (“A253”) of the address ID set for the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is the identification information of “120” in the search table 125. It is set as the address ID corresponding to. Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not read the image data whose display order priority data is "0" from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but instead stores the data storage area corresponding to the identification information of "120". The image data stored in 123 is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information of "123". In this case, the reading efficiency is improved in that it is not necessary to read the image data from the memory module 83. Further, in the search table 125, the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "123" is rewritten to the start address of the address ID of the image data as shown in FIG. 26 (d). By rewriting the information of the address ID of the search table 125 in this way, it is possible to associate the storage status of the image data in each data storage area 123 with the contents of the search table 125.

Even if the image data is copied in this way, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information of "120" is stored and held as it is, and the identification of "120" in the search table 125 is performed. The information of the address ID corresponding to the information is maintained in "A253". In this case, the search table 125 has a plurality of identification information whose address ID information is "A253", but whether or not the image data to be pre-transferred has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a. Since the identification is performed in order from the identification information having the smallest value, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information having the smallest value when the image data whose start address of the address ID is "A253" is the target of advance transfer. The image data from is copied from.

On the other hand, for the image data whose display order priority data is "1" and "2", the start address of the address ID is not set in the search table 125 shown in FIG. 26 (b). Therefore, these image data are pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, when the advance transfer is completed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed, so that the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "124" in the search table 125 is as shown in FIG. 26 (d). "B348" is set as the information, and "C001" is set as the address ID information corresponding to the identification information of "125" in the search table 125.

When the pre-transfer of each image data is performed as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 executes the rewriting process of the identification information of the drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0" includes the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. Is overwritten. Specifically, since the image data whose display order priority data is "0" is copied to the data storage area 123 whose identification information corresponds to "123", the address corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0". "123" is overwritten in the information. In addition, images other than the decoded image data set in the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data in which the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is set. The address information corresponding to the data is also overwritten with the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. In the address information corresponding to the decoded image data, information for making it possible to specify the address of the area in which the decoded image data is stored in the development area 119 for moving images is set from the beginning.

On the other hand, the image data is stored in the address information corresponding to the image data in which the display order priority data is the image data after "1" and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data. The identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is not written, but the data indicating "1" is written as the offset value. In the next transfer processing round after the transfer processing round in which the image data is read into the data storage area 123 corresponding to the predetermined identification information, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information after 1 addition to the predetermined identification information is the image. It becomes the data transfer destination. Therefore, the address information corresponding to the image data in which the display order priority data is the image data after "1" and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data is "1" as an offset value. Data indicating the above will be written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

The processing configuration for enabling the pre-transfer of the image data as described above and the rewriting of the drawing list after the pre-transfer will be described below. First, the drawing list output process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The drawing list output process is executed as a part of step S507 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14) when the output timing of the drawing list shown in the execution target table for display control is reached. Incidentally, the output mode of the drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 is shown at the timing of t1 to t5 in FIG. 22 (a) or at the timing of t5 to t9 of FIG. 22 (a). Is defined in the execution target table for display control.

First, it is determined whether or not the demo display is being displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 (step S901). The demo display is a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo without starting the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is completed. This is a display effect that is started when (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed. In the demo display, the first demo period and the second demo period occur alternately. In the first demo period, in a situation where the same background image as when the effect for the game is performed is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. An image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed over a predetermined period. In the second demo period, the display of the image in which the symbol performs the predetermined operation in the situation where the predetermined background image is displayed is terminated, and the moving image by the maker name, the model name, or the predetermined character is displayed.

Here, the effect for the game round is the main state in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44 immediately after the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. It starts from a state in which a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41. On the other hand, if the demo display is performed immediately after the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started without the effect for the game round being started, each display device 41 is in the first demo period. , 43, 44, the image in which the predetermined background image is displayed and the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 is performing a predetermined operation is displayed. Will be done. Further, regardless of which type of effect for the game round is executed, at the final timing of the effect for the game round, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 A predetermined background image is displayed in each of them, and in the main display device 41, a symbol corresponding to the stop result is stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Regardless of whether or not the effect for the open / close execution mode is started after the effect for the game round is finished, when the effect for the next game round is started, the effect for the previous game round is finished. It starts from the display state of the image at the timing. When the demo display is performed after the production for the game round is completed, the predetermined background image is displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44 in the first demo period, and the previous game is played. When the effect of turning is completed, an image in which the stopped-displayed symbols are performing a predetermined operation is displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41. That is, in the first demo period of the demo display, the display using the image displayed when the production for the next game round is started is performed. Therefore, in the first demo period of the demo display, the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round is read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When the demo is being displayed (step S901: YES), the value of the demo display counter provided in the work memory 84 is added by 1 (step S902). The demo display counter is for the effect CPU 82 to specify that it is time to start the first demo period by using all of the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round next time. It is a counter. When the value of the demo display counter after 1 addition is the start reference value of the first demo period (step S903: YES), after clearing the value of the demo display counter to "0" (step S904), the game Data is set so that the image data necessary for starting the reusing effect next time is specified in the drawing list this time (step S905). As a result, even in the situation where the demo display is continued, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round next time is periodically targeted for use, and is read into the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. It becomes.

Further, even if the demo is not displayed (step S901: NO), the timing before the end is executed at the start of supplying the operating power to the effect CPU 82 or when the ending period is executed in the effect for the open / close execution mode. In the case of (step S906: YES), data setting is performed so that the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round next time is specified in the drawing list this time (step S905). When the process of step S905 is executed in the open / close execution mode, it is used to create drawing data although the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round next time is set as the target of pre-transfer. It is not set as a target.

By executing the processes of steps S901 to S906, the image data required to start the effect for the game round is at least at the timing when the effect for the next game round can be started. It is in a state of being read into the pre-transfer area 86a. This situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 (a) shows the timing at which the drawing list gives an instruction to read the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round, and FIG. 28 (b) is necessary for starting the effect for the game round. The period during which the image data is read into the pre-transfer area 86a is shown, FIG. 28 (c) shows the period during which the effect for the game round is executed, and FIG. 28 (d) shows the effect for the open / close execution mode. Indicates the period during which is executed, and FIG. 28E shows the execution period of the demo display.

By starting the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the image data required for starting the effect for game rounds is pre-transferred from the memory module 83. Reading to the area 86a is performed. After that, at the timing of t2, the start waiting period elapses without starting the effect for the game round from the timing of t1, and the demo display is started as shown in FIG. 28 (e). In the demo display, the first demo period in which the image display using the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round is first started, so that FIG. 28 ( As shown in a), the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out.

Here, although 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the tori pre-transfer area 86a already described, the data storage area 123 to which the image data is read out is used for pre-transfer of the image data specified by the drawing list. Is overwritten. On the other hand, as described above, when the image data for which pre-transfer is specified by the drawing list has already been read into any data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is referred to as the memory module 83. It is stored in the data storage area 123 of the read destination by copying between the data storage areas 123, instead of being read from. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to read the image data into the data storage area 123 of the reading destination at an early stage.

In this case, at the timing of t2, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing of t1 is stored and retained. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the value of the current identification information counter 124. Therefore, the image data is data. In order to be erased from the storage area 123, it is necessary to make a round of switching the image data read target in the data storage area 123. That is, as the timing at which the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round is deleted from the pre-transfer area 86a, there is a margin for one round of switching the image data read target in the data storage area 123. It will be.

After that, the first demo period is restarted at the timing of t3 in the situation where the demo display is continued. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out. The first demo period is restarted when the value of the demo display counter, which is cleared "0" at the timing when the first demo period was last started and is updated periodically thereafter, reaches the start reference value. This start reference value is set so that the first demo period is started within a range in which all the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round next time is stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a. There is. As a result, while the demo display is being executed regardless of the duration of the demo display, all the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round is read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. It is in a state of being. With such a configuration, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round, which is copied between the data storage areas 123 at the timing of t2, is stored and retained. ing. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is copied between the data storage areas 123, so that the image necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is started. As the timing at which the data is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, there is a margin for one round of switching of the image data read target in the data storage area 123.

After that, when the condition for starting the effect for the game round is satisfied at the timing of t4, the demo display is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (e), and the effect for the game round is as shown in FIG. 28 (c). Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, at the timing of t4, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out. In the first demo period of the demo display, as already explained, the image data necessary for starting the production for the next game round is read into the pre-transfer area 86a, and during the duration of the demo display. Regardless, the first demo period is restarted so that the state in which the image data is read into the pre-transfer area 86a is maintained. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the image data necessary for starting the effect for this game round is stored and held in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the end timing of the effect for the game round is reached. In this case, as described above, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device 43 and the second display device 43 during the end period of the effect for the game round, regardless of which type of effect for the game round is executed. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop results are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image is read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. The pre-transfer of the image data required for displaying the image during the end period of the effect for the game round to the data storage area 123 is performed according to the mode of pre-transfer at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22 (a). It has been As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer the image data required to display the image in the end period of the effect for the game round, the end period of the effect for the game round can be set. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), a new production for the game round is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out at the timing of t6. As described above, when a new effect for game rounds is started after the effect for game rounds is finished, the image is displayed from the display state at the timing when the previous effect for game rounds is finished. In addition, the production for this game round has started without the transition to the demo display after the production for the previous game round has ended. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the image data necessary for starting the effect for this game round is in a state of being read out to the data storage area 123, so that the image data is stored between the data storage areas 123. Copying is performed, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the situation where the effect for the game round is continued, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the image data necessary for executing the reach effect etc. in the effect for the game round this time. By the advance transfer to the data storage area 123, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the production for the game is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the production for the game is used at least until the end period of the production for the game. It does not become.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the end timing of the effect for the game round is reached. In this case, as described above, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device 43 and the second display device 43 during the end period of the effect for the game round, regardless of which type of effect for the game round is executed. A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop results are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image is read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. The pre-transfer of the image data required for displaying the image during the end period of the effect for the game round to the data storage area 123 is performed according to the mode of pre-transfer at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22 (a). It has been As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer the image data required to display the image in the end period of the effect for the game round, the end period of the effect for the game round can be set. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

Since the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the effect for the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 28 (d). After that, at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is continued, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the effect for the game round read out during the end period in the effect for the immediately preceding game round. The image data required to start the data storage area 123 is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the effect for the open / close execution mode is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is used at least until the end timing of the effect for the open / close execution mode. It does not become a situation.

After that, at the timing of t10, it becomes a predetermined pre-end timing when the ending period is executed in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, at the timing of t10, the next game is as shown in FIG. 28 (a). The image data necessary for starting the effect of reuse is read out to the data storage area 123. This image data is stored at least until the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finished and the effect for the new game round or the demo display is started.

After that, at the timing of t11, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is completed as shown in FIG. 28 (d), and the effect for a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 28 (c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is read out at the timing of t11, but the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 at the timing of t10. The image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

As described above, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 is sequentially deleted along with the pre-transfer of other image data, the game times are at the timing of starting the effect for the game times. The image data necessary for starting the effect for the purpose has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if it takes a certain period of time to read the image data required for starting the effect for the game round from the memory module 83, the game round can be affected by the influence of the read period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the start of the production is delayed occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), when a negative determination is made in step S903, when the process of step S905 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S906, the image data for 2D is aggregated. The process is executed (step S907). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in this process is specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round and used in the drawing process of the 2D control unit 96 is aggregated. Included in the specific target in the process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is equal to or greater than the reference number (for example, 10) (step S908). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of numbers. When the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number (step S908: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S909). All of the 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is set in the one 2D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the drawing list for 2D (step S910). As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19) for one or two 2D images corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S908: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S911). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is distributed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the creation completion data in the 2D drawing list to be executed later in the drawing process (step S912). Specifically, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the drawing list for 2D. As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19) for one or two 2D images corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

If the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 as described above is less than the reference number, those image data are set in one 2D drawing list, and if the number is equal to or more than the reference number, a plurality of 2D drawing is performed. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 2D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 2D image data required to display an image for one frame fluctuates, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list can be set to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 2D drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 from becoming extremely large, and accordingly, one 2D drawing list. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S910 or step S912 is executed, the image data aggregation process for 3D is executed (step S913). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in this process is specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round and used in the drawing process of the 3D control unit 97 is aggregated. Included in the specific target in the process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is equal to or greater than the reference number (for example, 10) (step S914). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of numbers. When the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number (step S914: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S915). All of the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is set in the one 3D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list (step S916). As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20) for one or two 3D images corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S914: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S917). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is distributed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data in the 3D drawing list to be executed later in the drawing process (step S918). Specifically, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20) for one or two 3D images corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

If the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 as described above is less than the reference number, those image data are set in one 3D drawing list, and if the number is equal to or more than the reference number, a plurality of 3D drawing is performed. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 3D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 3D image data required to display an image for one frame fluctuates, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list can be set to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 3D drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 from becoming extremely large, and accordingly, one 3D drawing list can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

When the process of step S916 is executed or the process of step S918 is executed, the drawing list of the output target to the effect LSI 85 is grasped (step S919). In this case, at least one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list are grasped, and at most two 2D drawing lists and two 3D drawing lists are grasped. After that, a process for outputting one drawing list out of the plurality of drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI 85 is executed (step S920). Then, when the output of all the drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI85 is not completed (step S921: YES), the process of step S920 is performed until the output of all the drawing lists is completed. repeat. As a result, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame is output.

In this case, one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list may be alternately output targets. With this configuration, even if at least one of the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list is two as the drawing list for displaying the image for one frame, the effect LSI 85 has 2D. The drawing list for 3D and the drawing list for 3D are transmitted alternately. Then, by transmitting the drawing list in this way, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list are alternately stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. It becomes. As a result, for example, after the 2D control unit 96 reads the 2D drawing list from the transfer first storage area 122a in the transfer storage area 122, the 3D drawing list is stored in the transfer first storage area 122a. Will be shifted, and the 3D control unit 97 will be able to read the 3D drawing list. Therefore, it is possible for the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 to execute the drawing process at the same time.

Next, the pre-transfer process executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pre-transfer control unit 94 executes the pre-transfer process periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle) by using the programs and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance. All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the pre-transfer control unit 94 when the supply of operating power to the effect LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advance transfer control unit 94 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

In the pre-transfer process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a drawing list for which pre-transfer has not been completed (step S1001). Specifically, if the pre-transfer processing for one drawing list is started, but the pre-transfer processing for all the image data set in the one drawing list is not completed, the pre-transfer processing is performed in advance. This means that there is a drawing list that has not been transferred. Further, even when the pre-transfer processing for one drawing list is completed, the pre-transfer processing is still performed in the pre-transfer storage area 121 (see FIG. 23) in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85. If there is a drawing list that is not the execution target, it means that there is a drawing list for which pre-transfer has not been completed.

When there is an unfinished drawing list (step S1001: YES), the image data to be pre-transferred in this pre-transfer process is grasped (step S1002). In this case, if the timing is in the middle of the pre-transfer processing for one drawing list, the display order priority data is next to the image data that was the target of the pre-transfer processing in the previous processing times in the drawing list. The image data in the order of is grasped as the target of this advance transfer. Further, when it is the start timing of the pre-transfer processing for the new drawing list, the image data in the first order of the display order priority data in the drawing list is grasped as the target of the pre-transfer this time.

When the image data to be pre-transferred grasped in step S1002 is the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data (step S1003: YES), steps S1004 to S1015. The process proceeds to step S1016 without executing the process of. On the other hand, when the image data to be pre-transferred grasped in step S1002 is not the decoded image data (step S1003: NO), the value of the identification information counter 124 (see FIG. 24B) of the register 93 is set to 1. Add (step S1004). Then, when the value of the identification information counter 124 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the identification information counter 124 (step S1005: YES), the value of the identification information counter 124 is cleared to "0" (step). S1006).

When a negative determination is made in step S1005, or when the process of step S1006 is executed, the address information set in the drawing list corresponding to the image data to be transferred in advance grasped in step S1002 can be referred to. , The start address in the range of the address ID corresponding to the image data is grasped (step S1007). Then, by executing the collation process of the search table 125 (FIG. 25), it is specified whether or not the start address is set corresponding to any of the identification information of the search table 125 (see FIG. 25). (Step S1008).

When it is specified in the collation process that the start address is not set in the search table 125 (step S1009: NO), the read setting process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1010). Specifically, the range of the address ID set in the address information of the drawing list corresponding to the image data to be transferred in advance this time is output to the transfer controller 92. Further, in order for the transfer controller 92 to recognize the transfer destination of the image data to be pre-transferred this time, the current value of the identification information counter 124 is output to the transfer controller 92 as identification information in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. .. As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is read from the memory module 83, and the read image data is written to the transfer destination area of this time in the data storage area 123. The processing content of the transfer controller 92 for transferring the image data will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is specified in the collation process of step S1008 that the start address is set in the search table 125 (step S1009: YES), the copy setting process in the advance transfer area 86a is executed (step S1011). Specifically, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information for which the start address is set in the search table 125 is stored in the data corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. The transfer controller 92 is instructed to copy to the area 123. In this case, the identification information corresponding to the copy source data storage area 123 and the identification information corresponding to the copy destination data storage area 123 are output to the transfer controller 92. As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is written to the transfer destination area of this time in the data storage area 123 without requiring reading of the image data from the memory module 83.

When the process of step S1010 or step S1011 is executed, the rewrite process of the search table 125 is executed (step S1012). Specifically, the information of the address ID of the search table 125 corresponding to the data storage area 123 which is the area of the transfer destination this time is made to correspond to the image data of the target of the advance transfer of this time in the drawing list. Overwrite the information of the start address in the range of the address ID set in the address information. This makes it possible to match the contents of the search table 125 with the contents of the type of image data actually stored in each data storage area 123.

After that, on condition that the image data targeted for the pre-transfer this time is moving image data (step S1013: YES), a decoding instruction of the moving image data is given to the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 (step S1013: YES). Step S1014). At the time of this decoding instruction, the information for enabling the moving image decoder 95 to identify the area in which the moving image data that is the target of the decoding instruction this time is stored in the data storage area 123, and the information for the moving image in the register 93. The moving image decoder 95 is provided with information for making the moving image decoder identifiable an area for storing the decoded image data obtained by the decoding process on the moving image data in the developing area 119. As a result, the moving image data that is the target of the decoding instruction in the moving image decoder 95 is subjected to the decoding process, and the decoded image data created by the decoding process is placed in the area designated in the developing area 119 for the moving image. Written.

When a negative determination is made in step S1013, or when the process of step S1014 is executed, the address information rewriting process is executed (step S1015). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the rewriting process of the address information.

In the address information rewriting process, the image data targeted for this pre-transfer is decoded into the image data set in the drawing list corresponding to the first display order priority data and the immediately preceding display order priority data. It is determined whether or not the data is one of the set image data (step S1101). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the address information corresponding to the image data targeted for the pre-transfer this time in the drawing list includes the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored this time. Is overwritten (step S1102).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1101, the data indicating that the offset value with respect to the identification information of the data storage area 123 to which the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data has been pre-transferred is "1" is obtained. In the drawing list, it is written in the address information corresponding to the image data to be pre-transferred this time. By uniformly writing the data indicating that the offset value is "1" instead of writing the identification information in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information. .. On the other hand, since the image data set in the drawing list corresponding to the first display order priority data is not set before that, the identification information is overwritten on the address information as described above. Further, since the decoded image data is stored in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93, the address of the corresponding area in the expanding area 119 for moving images is set in the address information of the decoded image data. Therefore, since the address information cannot be specified by the offset value for the image data in which the decoded image data is set in the immediately preceding display order priority data, the identification information is overwritten in the address information as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the pre-forwarding process (FIG. 29), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, or after the address information rewriting process is executed in step S1015, one drawing list is used in this processing time. On condition that the pre-transfer is completed (step S1016: YES), the pre-transfer completion process is executed (step S1017). In the pre-transfer completion process, the drawing list for which the pre-transfer has been completed this time is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23) of the current storage target in the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. As a result, the drawing list is subsequently executed by the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Further, in the pre-transfer completion process, if there is a drawing list for which pre-transfer has not been completed in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in the register 93, a new drawing list is created from the first pre-transfer storage area 121a. Is read, and a process for shifting the drawing list between the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t in the storage area 121 before transfer is executed.

<Effect of configuration related to handling of drawing list in production LSI85>
By transferring the image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, when the image data is used in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the image data is read directly from the memory module 83. Instead, it may be read from the advance transfer area 86a. In this case, when the predetermined image data is the target of the transfer instruction to the pre-transfer area 86a, if the predetermined image data is not stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area from the memory module 83 If the predetermined image data is read out to the 86a and the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the predetermined image data is not transferred from the memory module 83. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined image data from being further transferred from the memory module 83 even though the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is possible to improve the reading efficiency of the image data from the module 83.

When a transfer instruction is issued for the image data that has already been read into any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. To. This makes it possible to store the image data in the data storage area 123 designated as the transfer instruction while eliminating the need for further reading of the image data from the memory module 83.

A search table 125 in which data corresponding to the type of image data stored in each data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a is set is provided, and a transfer instruction can be made by referring to the search table 125. It is specified whether or not the image data that is the target of the above is stored in any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to efficiently specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When the image data is transferred to any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the correspondence between the data storage area 123 that is the transfer destination and the type of image data is reflected. The contents of the search table 125 are updated. As a result, the contents of the search table 125 can be made to correspond to the latest storage state of the advance transfer area 86a.

In the drawing list, an address ID for specifying an area in which the image data is stored is set in the memory module 83 as information corresponding to the image data to be used, and the memory module 83 is set in the advance transfer control unit 94. When the image data is transferred from the to the pre-transfer area 86a, the area where the image data is stored is specified in the memory module 83 by using the address ID. In this case, the information set as the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. As a result, when the search table 125 is used to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the address ID provided in the drawing list is used. Can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when the identification is performed.

The drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 corresponds to one image data to be used, and data is set in a configuration in which a plurality of address IDs corresponding to the areas stored in the memory module 83 are set. The information set in the search table 125 as the information for specifying the type of image data stored in the storage area 123 is only the address ID corresponding to the start address. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 in the search table 125, and whether the image data is stored in the advance transfer area 86a. It is possible to reduce the processing load when the search table 125 is referred to in order to specify whether or not.

The image data required to start the effect for the game round is periodically read out to the pre-transfer area 86a during the demo display, and is set to the timing before the end of the open / close execution mode, so that the pre-transfer area 86a It becomes the reading target to. As a result, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is sequentially erased along with the pre-transfer of other image data, the timing for starting the effect for the game round is started. In, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if it takes a certain period of time to read the image data required for starting the effect for the game round from the memory module 83, the game round can be affected by the influence of the read period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the start of the production is delayed occurs.

When the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 according to the address ID set in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit 94 displays the image in the pre-transfer area 86a. Set the identification information for identifying the area where the data is stored in the drawing list. As a result, it is not necessary to set both the address ID and the identification information in the drawing list from the beginning, so that the amount of information in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is set in the drawing list. It is possible to increase reliability.

When the image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a according to the address ID of the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is generated. It is set as the address information of the drawing list so as to overwrite the address ID. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information in the drawing list provided to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 after the transfer of the image data is completed.

The amount of identification information that is overwritten by the address information of the drawing list when the transfer of image data is completed is smaller than the address ID originally set in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the advance transfer control unit 94 overwrites the identification information on the address information.

The register 93 has a storage area 121 for pre-transfer that stores the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, and a storage area 122 for post-transfer that stores the drawing list for which the identification information has been set by the pre-transfer control unit 94. And are provided individually. As a result, the area in which the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 and the drawing list in which the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the identification information is set is stored is clearly distinguished, and these drawing lists are separated. It is possible to make a clear distinction.

The decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is stored in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data is excluded from the target of pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a by the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the identification information is not set in the address information corresponding to the decoded image data. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance transfer control unit 94 from unnecessarily executing the information setting for the address information of the drawing list.

In the drawing list, the offset value is "1" for the address information corresponding to the image data in which the display order priority data is the image data after "1" and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data. The data indicating that is written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

In the configuration in which the image data is stored over a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86, when the transfer of the image data to the VRAM 86 is completed, the identification information corresponding to the plurality of areas is set in the address information of the drawing list. In this case, since the plurality of areas in the VRAM 86 are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, the advance transfer control unit 94 is compared with the configuration in which all the addresses corresponding to the plurality of areas are set. It is possible to suppress the amount of information set in the address information of the drawing list.

A plurality of drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing. This makes it possible to prevent the amount of information in one drawing list provided by the production CPU 82 from becoming extremely large, and various information is mixed in one drawing list. It is possible to prevent the processing load of the effect LSI 85 from increasing.

The information necessary for causing the 2D control unit 96 to execute the 2D drawing process is provided by the production CPU 82 as a 2D drawing list, and the information necessary for causing the 3D control unit 97 to execute the 3D drawing process is for 3D. It is provided by the production CPU 82 as a drawing list. This makes it possible to identify whether the image data to be used corresponds to the 2D drawing process or the 3D drawing process for each drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when specifying the type of image data in the effect LSI 85.

When the number of 2D image data to be used is equal to or larger than the reference number at one update timing, the 2D image data is distributed and set in a plurality of 2D drawing lists. Further, when the number of 3D image data to be used is equal to or more than the reference number at one update timing, the 3D image data is distributed and set in a plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, the amount of information of one drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed to a certain amount, and the transmission period of one drawing list is prevented from becoming extremely long. Is possible.

Even when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided in order to display an image at one update timing, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are one. The creation completion data for making it possible to specify in the effect LSI 85 that the data is aggregated and used at the update timing is set in the last-order 2D drawing list or the last-order 3D drawing list. This makes it possible for the effect LSI 85 to grasp that the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are for displaying an image at one update timing.

The function of pre-transferring image data according to the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 is assigned to the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the function of creating drawing data according to the drawing list is assigned to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Is assigned to. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load as compared with the configuration in which these processes are collectively executed by one control means.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute the drawing process by using the drawing list in which the pre-transfer of the image data is completed in the pre-transfer control unit 94. As a result, the functions of each process can be distributed to a plurality of control means without providing the same drawing list from the effect CPU 82.

<Configuration related to transfer controller 92>
Next, a configuration for transferring data in the transfer controller 92 of the effect LSI 85 will be described.

As described above, the image data is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 based on the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 pre-transfer the VRAM 86 when creating the drawing data. The image data is read from the area 86a, and the moving image decoder 95 reads the moving image data from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 during the decoding process of the moving image data. In addition to reading the image data, the light emitting decoder 101 pre-transfers the light-emitting data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads the pre-transferred light-emitting data from the VRAM 86 during the decoding process of the light-emitting data. Further, the sound decoder 103 pre-transfers the sound output data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 at the time of decoding the sound output data, and reads the pre-transferred sound output data from the VRAM 86. The process of reading these various data is executed by the transfer controller 92.

Here, as described above, in the drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, an address ID corresponding to the physical address of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set as the address information of the image data. The physical address itself is not set. As described above, data other than image data is set in the memory module 83, and there is an area in which no data is stored. Then, a part of the area of the memory module 83 is used as an area for storing the image data, and the address range of the area for storing the image data is the entire address range of the memory module 83. It becomes a narrower range than. In such a configuration, the address ID specified as the address information in the drawing list is information for specifying only the area in which the image data is stored in the memory module 83. In this case, since the number of address IDs that can be used is smaller than the number of physical addresses of the memory module 83, the data capacity for designating one address ID is also the data capacity for designating the physical address. Is smaller than Then, since the data capacity for designating one address ID becomes smaller, the data capacity of the address information specified in the drawing list can be reduced, and as a result, the data capacity of the drawing list can be reduced. Is possible.

Since the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the address ID as information for specifying the address of the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83, the image data from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 When the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the above, the address ID is provided to the transfer controller 92. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31, the transfer controller 92 is set with a file table 126 that defines the correspondence between the address ID and the physical address. The file table 126 has a one-to-one correspondence with the address ID (ID (0), ID (1), ID (2), ..., ID (n + 2)) and the physical address of the memory module 83 (AD (0). ), AD (1), AD (2), ..., AD (n + 2)) are set. By referring to the file table 126, the transfer controller 92 identifies the physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID specified by the advance transfer control unit 94, and reads the image data from the area of the specified physical address. I do.

The above-mentioned address conversion in the transfer controller 92 is performed not only for the memory module 83 but also for the VRAM 86. This content will be described below. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the VRAM 86 and the index area.

As shown in FIG. 32, the VRAM 86 is partitioned into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c. Specifically, it is divided into three regions, a first index region 127a, a second index region 127b, and a third index region 127c. The area included in the first index area 127a is an area in which physical addresses are continuous in the area of VRAM86, and the area included in the second index area 127b is an area in which physical addresses are continuous in the area of VRAM86. The area included in the first index area 127a and included in the third index area 127c is an area in which the physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and the first index area 127a and the second index area 127b. It is an area not included in. Further, the final address of the area included in the first index area 127a is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b, and the final address of the area included in the second index area 127b. The address is continuous with the start address of the area included in the third index area 127c. The first index area 127a is used as an area for pre-transferring light emission data, and the second index area 127b is used as an area for pre-transferring sound output data. Further, the third index area 127c is used as an area to which image data is pre-transferred. That is, the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is the third index area 127c.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 128 that defines the correspondence between the index areas 127a to 127c and the physical address of the VRAM 86. The index table 128 is set in the transfer controller 92.

As shown in FIG. 33, identification information is set in each of the first index region 127a, the second index region 127b, and the third index region 127c. The identification information of the first index area 127a is used when the light emitting decoder 101 reads the light emitting data to the VRAM 86 and when the transfer controller 92 specifies the area to which the light emitting data is read out in the VRAM 86 and also emits light. When the light emitting data is read from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 101, it is used when instructing the transfer controller 92 of the area of the reading source of the light emitting data in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the second index area 127b is used when the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data to the VRAM 86 and when the transfer controller 92 specifies the area to read the sound output data in the VRAM 86, and also the sound. This is used when the sound output data is read from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 103 and the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the area of the sound output data in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the third index area 127c is used when the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads the image data to the VRAM 86 and instructs the transfer controller 92 to read the image data in the VRAM 86, and also uses 2D control. It is used when the unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the image data from the VRAM 86 and instruct the transfer controller 92 of the area from which the image data is read in the VRAM 86. Further, when the pre-transfer control unit 94 copies the image data between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, it is used when instructing the transfer controller 92 of the storage source and storage destination areas of the image data. Will be done.

The identification information of each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c is associated with the area of a plurality of consecutive physical addresses in the VRAM 86. For example, the identification information of "0" in the first index area 127a is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses A (0) to A (4), and "0" in the second index area 127b. The identification information of "0" is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses A (640) to A (644), and the identification information of "0" in the third index area 127c is A (1920) to A ( It is associated with an area of five consecutive physical addresses in 1924). The number of physical addresses associated with each identification information is constant at five. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of physical addresses associated with the identification information may be different for each type of index areas 127a to 127c.

When the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the data to the VRAM 86 or the data from the VRAM 86 due to the plurality of physical addresses associated with one identification information in this way, the instructing side Can specify an area corresponding to a plurality of physical addresses simply by specifying one identification information without specifying a plurality of physical addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to specify the area.

While the number of identification information set in the first index area 127a is 128, the number of identification information set in the second index area 127b and the identification set in the third index area 127c The number of information is 256 each. That is, the number of set identification information differs depending on the types of index areas 127a to 127c. Further, since the number of physical addresses associated with each identification information is the same as described above, the physical addresses of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c are assigned according to the types of index areas 127a to 127c. The total number of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of identification information set in each index area 127a to 127c may be the same, and the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c may be used. The total number of the above may be the same.

In the configuration in which the index areas 127a to 127c are set as described above, when the transfer controller 92 receives a data read instruction to the VRAM 86 or a data read instruction from the VRAM 86, any of the types of the target to which the instruction is given is used. It is specified whether the index areas 127a to 127c of the above are to be read out. Specifically, the transfer controller 92 specifies the first index area 127a as a read target when receiving an instruction from the light emitting decoder 101, and the second index area when receiving an instruction from the sound decoder 103. 127b is specified as a read target, and when an instruction is received from any of the advance transfer control unit 94, the 2D control unit 96, and the 3D control unit 97, the third index area 127c is specified as the read target. The configuration for identifying the target receiving the instruction in the transfer controller 92 is arbitrary, but for example, information for identifying the side giving the instruction is set in the data for giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92. The configuration is conceivable. Since the side giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92 is configured to specify only the identification information without specifying the types of the index areas 127a to 127c, it is necessary for the side giving the instruction to specify the area to the transfer controller 92. It is possible to reduce the data capacity.

Hereinafter, the transfer execution process executed by the transfer controller 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The transfer controller 92 is provided with a circuit for executing the transfer execution process as a preset dedicated circuit, but the transfer controller 92 is not limited to this, and the programs and data stored in the memory module 83 or the like can be stored. It may be configured as a general-purpose circuit that executes transfer execution processing by using it.

In the transfer execution process, if the data read instruction from the memory module 83 is received (step S1201: YES) and the read instruction is received from the pre-transfer control unit 94 (step S1202: YES), the transfer execution process is performed in advance. The physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID received from the transfer control unit 94 is specified by referring to the file table 126 (step S1203). On the other hand, when the read instruction is received from other than the pre-transfer control unit 94, the physical address of the memory module 83 is received from the side issuing the read instruction.

After that, the types of the index regions 127a to 127c are specified from the type of the target for which the read instruction is given, and the identification information received from the side giving the read instruction is specified. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1204).

After that, the read start process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1205). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address of the area in which the data to be read is stored in the memory module 83 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the memory module 83. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the memory module 83. Then, the output data is written in the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the physical address group specified in step S1204.

When the reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1206: YES), "1" is set in the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1207). As a result, the side that gives the read instruction identifies that the read of the data to be read to the VRAM 86 is completed. When it is specified that the reading of the data to be read is completed on the side that gives the reading instruction, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

In the transfer execution process, when the data read instruction from the VRAM 86 is received (step S1208: YES), the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target to which the read instruction is given, and the read instruction is given. Identify the identification information received from the receiving side. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the types of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1209). In addition, the information of the area to be written received from the side issuing the read instruction is specified (step S1210). In this case, the register 93 is mentioned as the area to be written. Further, when the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the area to be written becomes the data storage area 123, that is, the third index area 127c. ..

After that, the read start process from the VRAM 86 is executed (step S1211). In this case, the address signal for specifying the physical address group specified in step S1209 and the data read instruction signal are transmitted to the VRAM 86. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the VRAM 86. Then, the output data is written in the area to be written specified in step S1210.

When the reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1212: YES), "1" is set in the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1213). As a result, the side that gives the read instruction identifies that the read of the data to be read from the VRAM 86 is completed. When it is specified that the reading of the data to be read is completed on the side that gives the reading instruction, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

<Effect of configuration related to transfer controller 92>
Each area of the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c, and each area included in each index area 127a to 127c is specified by using the identification information set for each index area 127a to 127c. It is possible. Then, when it is necessary to read data from the VRAM 86 in the control execution unit such as the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the types of index areas 127a to 127c and the index areas 127a to 127c are included in the transfer controller 92. By specifying the identification information set in the above, the area of the VRAM 86 in which the data to be read is stored is specified by the transfer controller 92. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the area to be read from the data in the control execution unit.

Further, the identification information of 1 in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is information for collectively designating a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86. As a result, the amount of information required to specify the area to be read out of the data can be reduced as compared with the case where the address is specified for each of the plurality of areas and the data is read from the plurality of areas.

A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 included in one index area 127a to 127c are areas where addresses are continuous. Further, the plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 designated by one identification information are areas where the addresses are continuous. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 designated by the types of index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information.

The correspondence of the VRAM 86 area with respect to the combination of the type information of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information of each index area 127a to 127c is set in the index table 128, and the transfer controller 92 refers to the index table 128. By doing so, the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the above combination is specified. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 that is the target of reading data in the transfer controller 92.

A plurality of index areas 127a to 127c are set. This makes it possible to set the index areas 127a to 127c according to each purpose. Further, the number of VRAM86 areas included in the index areas 127a to 127c is different depending on the type. This makes it possible to set the size of the index regions 127a to 127c to a size suitable for each purpose.

<Configuration for displaying images on a plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for collectively updating the images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 when the image update timing is reached will be described.

As described above, the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing. A drawing list is output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to update the image, but the drawing list may be created individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Instead, the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are collectively set in one or two drawing lists. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists as compared with the configuration in which drawing lists are individually created for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which the image data corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, and 44 are aggregated and set. As shown in FIG. 35, as the image data for the background image that is the target of the drawing instruction, the first background image data for the main, the first background image data for the first sub, and the first for the second sub The background image data, the second background image data for the main, the second background image data for the first sub, the second background image data for the second sub, the third background image data for the main, and the second The third background image data for the 1st sub and the 3rd background image data for the 2nd sub are set. The first to third background image data for the main is image data for displaying the background image on the main display device 41, and the first to third background image data for the first sub is displayed on the first sub display device 43. The image data for displaying the background image, and the first to third background image data for the second sub is the image data for displaying the background image on the second sub display device 44. Further, it is image data corresponding to an image in which the first background image data is displayed as if it exists in the innermost side in each of the main, the first sub, and the second sub, and the second background image data. Is the image data corresponding to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side thereof, and the third background image data is the image data corresponding to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side thereof. ..

As described above, in the drawing list, display order priority data indicating the drawing order of the image data, parameter information, and address information are set for each image data to be drawn. However, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to two or more display devices 41, 43, 44 are set for one drawing list, the image data specified in the drawing list is any display device 41, 43. , 44 Dedicated data indicating whether it corresponds to 44 is not set in the drawing list. Instead, the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44 for which each image data is to be drawn are specified by using the display order priority data which is the data for indicating the drawing order of the image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, the value of the display order priority data is the first display target reference value for the image data such as the first to third background image data for the main corresponding to the main display device 41. It is set to less than "100". Further, for image data such as the first to third background image data for the first sub corresponding to the first sub display device 43, the value of the display order priority data is "100" or more, which is the first display target reference value. It is set to less than "200", which is the second display target reference value. Further, for image data such as the first to third background image data for the second sub corresponding to the second sub display device 44, the value of the display order priority data is set to "200" or more, which is the second display target reference value. Has been done.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 grasp the value of the display order priority data in relation to the first display target reference value and the second display target reference value, and thereby, the target of the drawing instruction in the drawing list. It is possible to grasp which display device 41, 43, 44 the image data is corresponding to. By designating the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 for which each image data is to be drawn using the display order priority data as described above, the image data corresponds to any of the display devices 41, 43, 44. There is no need to set the drawing list with dedicated data indicating whether or not it is done. This makes it possible to simplify the data structure of the drawing list. By the way, the maximum number of image data set as the drawing target on the main display device 41 in one drawing list is equal to or less than the first display target reference value (100 or less), and the first drawing list in one drawing list. The maximum number of image data set as a drawing target on the sub-display device 43 is equal to or less than the difference between the second display target reference value and the first display target reference value (100 or less).

The above drawing data is created by the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the effect CPU 82, but the information referred to for creating the drawing list is the execution target table for display control as already described. Is set to. The effect CPU 82 derives various data to be set in the drawing list by referring to the display control execution target table in the display control task process (step S506) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

36 (a) and 36 (b) are explanatory views for explaining an execution target table for display control. As shown in FIG. 36A, the execution target table for display control has a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information, and the task content information is set. The pointer information is information for the effect CPU 82 to specify which task content information should be referred to in each processing time in the display control task processing (step S506). When the execution target table for new display control is used, the information of the task content corresponding to the pointer information "0" is referred to, and then the process of the task process for display control (step S506) is performed. The pointer information to be referenced is updated so that it is added by 1 each time the time is newly executed, and the task processing for display control is performed by referring to the information of the task contents corresponding to the pointer information after the update. Is executed. In the task content information, the types of image data required to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing and the information required to derive various parameters applied to those image data are set. ing.

As described above, the images are updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing. Is the type of image data required to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing for all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image data thereof. The information required to derive the various parameters applied to is set. FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of data for a background image set as the content of one task in the execution target table for predetermined display control.

As the information of the content of the task, each image data is not set as it is, but the information of the address ID corresponding to each image data is set as the information of the type of image data. The information of this address ID is set in the address information of the drawing list. Further, a combination of display target data, display order data, and other information is set for each type of image data information. Other information is information used for deriving various parameters applied to each image data.

The display target data and the display order data are information used for deriving the display order priority data in the drawing list. Specifically, the display target data is data for the effect CPU 82 to specify which of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is the display device to be displayed. is there. Specifically, "0" of the display target data corresponds to the main display device 41, "1" of the display target data corresponds to the first sub display device 43, and "2" of the display target data. Corresponds to the second sub-display device 44. The display order data is data for specifying the drawing order in each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed by the effect CPU 82. In each display device 41, 43, 44, "0" of the display order data indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists in the innermost side, and "1" of the display order data indicates that the image data corresponds to the image. It indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side, and the display order data "2" corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side. Indicates that it is image data.

The effect CPU 82 sets the display order data as it is as the display order priority data of the drawing list for the image data whose display target data is “0”. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "0", "1", and "2" are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the main. Further, the effect CPU 82 sets the image data whose display target data is "1" as the display order priority data of the drawing list by adding the value of the first display target reference value "100" to the value of the display order data. Set. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "100", "101", and "102" are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the first sub. Further, the effect CPU 82 sets the image data whose display target data is "2" as the display order priority data of the drawing list by adding the value of the display order data to the value of the second display target reference value "200". Set. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "200", "201", and "202" are set as display order priority data corresponding to the first to third background image data for the second sub.

As described above, the display target data that specifies the type of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be drawn and the display that specifies the drawing order of the image data in each display device 41, 43, 44 are displayed in the task content information. Sequential data is set. As a result, in the process of creating the execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the designer can select the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed and the image data in each display device 41, 43, 44. It is sufficient to set each of the grasped information as it is while grasping the drawing order of the drawing list, and it is not necessary to grasp the offset value corresponding to each display device 41, 43, 44 in the display order priority data of the drawing list. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the design work can be improved accordingly.

Further, even when the display target data and the display order data are set instead of the display order priority data being set at the design stage, the display device 41, which is the display target in the drawing list, The distinction between 43 and 44 is performed using the display order priority data. As a result, it is not necessary to set dedicated data indicating which display device 41, 43, 44 the image data corresponds to in the drawing list, so that the data structure of the drawing list can be simplified. Become.

Hereinafter, the processing content for setting the display order priority data of the drawing list using the display target data and the display order data will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a drawing list creation process executed by the effect CPU 82. The drawing list creation process is executed when one drawing list is created in each of step S909, step S911, step S915, and step S917 in the drawing list output process (FIG. 27).

First, the write target pointer update process in the drawing list to be created this time is executed (step S1301). The write target pointer is information referred to in the drawing list to be created this time in order to specify the area for setting the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information in the effect CPU 82. When starting the creation of one new drawing list, the write target pointer is updated so that the value corresponds to the area of the first order in the drawing list, and the process of step S1301 is executed thereafter. The value of the write target pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is performed.

After that, among the image data set as the drawing list this time, the image data set as the content of this task in the execution target table for display control is "0". Is present or not (step S1302). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is the target of creation, the display target data is set to "0" in the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not the image data that has become is present. If the 3D drawing list is the target of creation, the display target data is "0" in the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). Determine if the image data exists. The contents of these processes are the same in step S1304 described later.

If there is image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: YES), the display order data corresponding to the image data is set as the display order priority data (step S1303). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "0", the display order of the image data is set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. The data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "0", the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the image data is supported. The display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

When there is no image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: NO), the execution target table for display control is included in the image data to be set in the drawing list this time. It is determined whether or not there is image data in which the display target data set in the content of the current task in the above is "1" (step S1304). If there is image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: YES), the first display target reference value "100" is set for the display order data corresponding to the image data. The added value is set as display order priority data (step S1305). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "1", the display order of the image data is set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. The value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "1", the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the image data is supported. The value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

When the image data whose display target data is "1" does not exist (step S1304: NO), it means that only the image data whose display target data is "2" exists. In this case, a process of adding the second display target reference value "200" to the display order data corresponding to the image data is executed as the display order priority data (step S1306). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "2", the display order of the image data is set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. The value obtained by adding "200", which is the second display target reference value, to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is "2", select the image data having the smallest display order data among those image data and correspond to the image data. The value obtained by adding the second display target reference value "200" to the display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

According to the above processing, the display order priority data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 can be obtained according to a certain processing mode by using the display target data and the display order data set in the task contents. It is possible to set it in the drawing list. Further, by setting the drawing list in order from the image data having the smallest display target data, the drawing list is set in the order of the main display device 41 → the first sub display device 43 → the second sub display device 44. Is possible.

In the drawing list creation process, when any of the processes of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306 is executed, the parameter information setting process is executed (step S1307), and the address information setting process is executed (step S1308). ). In the parameter information setting process, the parameter information derived in the task process for display control (step S506) immediately before the image data for which the display order priority data is set this time corresponds to the current write target pointer. Set as area parameter information. In the address information setting process, for the image data for which the display order priority data is set this time, the address ID set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control is set to the current write target pointer. Set as the address information of the area corresponding to.

After that, it is determined whether or not the image data to be written exists elsewhere (step S1309). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is the target of creation, it is the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), and this one 2D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various image data that are the target of setting to. If the 3D drawing list is the target of creation, the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) are set in one 3D drawing list this time. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various target image data. If there is image data that is not the execution target (step S1309: YES), after executing the write target pointer update process (step S1301), the image data that is not the execution target is step S1302. -The process of step S1308 is executed. As a result, the combination of the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information in the one drawing list of this time is set for all the image data to be set in one drawing list of this time. ..

<Effect of configuration for displaying images on a plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44>
In a configuration in which the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are provided, a drawing list (1 drawing list) in which information for displaying an image on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 is one. Hereinafter, the drawing list is provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in a state of being aggregated into the aggregate drawing list). As a result, the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the drawing lists are individually provided for each of the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44.

Information for displaying images on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregate drawing list. In this case, the effect LSI 85 may treat all the information set in the aggregate drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and corresponds to any of a plurality of different update timings. It is not necessary to execute a process for determining whether the information is information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing executed by using the aggregated drawing list in the effect LSI 85.

Image data designated as a target for use by using display order priority data for specifying the setting order of image data in the frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118 by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. Is specified which display device 41, 43, 44 corresponds to. As a result, it is not necessary to set the dedicated information for specifying the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the aggregate drawing list, so that the number of types of information set in the aggregate drawing list is suppressed. It becomes possible.

The image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set to a value less than the first display target reference value as the display order priority data, and the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is set as the first display target reference value as the display order priority data. A value equal to or greater than the value and less than the second display target reference value is set, and the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is set to a value equal to or more than the second display target reference value as display order priority data. As a result, in a configuration in which the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set are specified using the display order priority data, the image data designated as the target to be used is transferred to any of the display devices 41, 43, 44. Whether it corresponds is clearly distinguished in the display order priority data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the types of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

In the configuration in which the effect CPU 82 creates a drawing list based on the information set in the execution target table for display control, the display order priority data is not set as it is in the execution target table for display control. , Frame areas 114, 115, 117 in the display target data corresponding to the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set and the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display devices 41, 43, 44. The display order data corresponding to the setting order to 118 is set, and the display order priority data is derived by using the display target data and the display order data. As a result, when setting the execution target table for display control at the pachinko machine 10 design stage, the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set and the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be used. It is only necessary to set the setting order among the types of image data, and it is not necessary to set the final display order priority data. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

Regarding the image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43, the value obtained by adding the first display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data, and the image corresponding to the second sub-display device 44. As for the data, the value obtained by adding the second display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the display order priority data.

<Configuration related to display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for outputting an image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 will be described.

As described above, the effect LSI 85 is provided with a second display circuit 99 as a circuit for outputting an image signal to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting an image signal to each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. As shown in FIG. 38, the second display circuit 99 is provided with a first output unit 131 and a second output unit 132. The first output unit 131 outputs an image signal to the first sub display device 43, and the second output unit 132 outputs an image signal to the second sub display device 44. When outputting these image signals, of the sub-first frame area 117 and the sub-second frame area 118 provided in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85, the frame area 117, which is the output target of the image signal this time, The drawing data created in 118 is referenced. In this case, only one sub-first frame area 117 and one sub-second frame area 118 are provided, and as described above, the double buffer method is adopted, so that the sub-first frame area 118 is provided. In the situation where the drawing signal is output to the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame area of 117 and the second frame area 118 for the sub, the next update timing is set to the other frame area. Drawing data for displaying the image in is created. That is, one frame of image in the first sub-display device 43 is displayed and one frame of image in the second sub-display device 44 is displayed by one drawing data created in one frame area 117 and 118. Is displayed.

FIG. 39 shows a state in which one drawing data is created in order to display an image for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and each sub display device 43 using the one drawing data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the image of 1 frame is displayed in each of 4 and 44. In FIG. 39, only one image data is used for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. The case where only one image data is used will be described, but the same applies to the case where a plurality of image data are used to display one frame of images on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. ..

The data shown in FIG. 39 (a) is data that simply shows image data 133 for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43, and the data shown in FIG. 39 (b) is the second data. This is data that simply shows image data 134 for displaying an image for one frame on the sub-display device 44. The image data 133 and 134 are stored in the memory module 83 in advance as described above, and the image data 133 and 134 exist as individual data in the state of being stored in the memory module 83. These image data 133 and 134 are image data for a 2D image and are set as quadrangular data in which a plurality of pixels exist in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In the following description, the image data 133 is referred to as the first sub image data 133, and the image data 134 is referred to as the second sub image data 134.

FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram simply showing one frame area 117, 118 in which one drawing data for displaying an image for one frame is created on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. is there. The one frame area 117 and 118 is set as a rectangular data area in which a plurality of dots exist in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to the number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. There is. Specifically, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is determined by the number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It matches the value obtained by integrating the numbers (specifically, "1"). The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices having the same number of dots, and both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial positions. The number of dots in the vertical direction of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is the same, and the number of dots in the horizontal direction of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is also the same.

On the other hand, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It corresponds to the sum of 44 dots in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the second number of dots in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It matches the value obtained by integrating the above-mentioned predetermined number (specifically, "1") with the sum of the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the sub-display device 44.

Since the number of dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 is set as described above, the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and the drawing data for one frame on the second sub display device 44. Both drawing data for displaying an image can be created in one frame area 117, 118.

Regarding the setting mode of the first sub image data 133 and the second sub image data 134 in the frame areas 117 and 118, the first sub image data 133 has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above. Since it exists, the first sub image data 133 has a plurality of vertical lines composed of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction arranged side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 39 (a). Similarly, since the second sub image data 134 also has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, the second sub image data 134 is arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 39 (b). A plurality of vertical lines composed of a plurality of dots are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), since the frame areas 117 and 118 have a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, the vertical line composed of the plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction is in the horizontal direction. It means that multiple units are installed side by side.

In this configuration, the data of each vertical line of the first sub image data 133 is set by being dispersed in the vertical lines set at odd-numbered positions in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the image data 133 for the first sub is the odd-numbered data in the horizontal directions in the frame areas 117 and 118 while keeping the arrangement order in the horizontal direction in the image data 133 for the first sub. It is set to a vertical line. Further, the data of each vertical line of the second sub image data 134 is set by being dispersed in the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the image data 134 for the second sub is the even-numbered data in the horizontal directions in the frame areas 117 and 118 while keeping the arrangement order in the horizontal direction in the image data 134 for the second sub. It is set to a vertical line.

The image signals corresponding to the data set in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 are output to the corresponding dots in the first sub-display device 43 by the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99. To. Further, the image signals corresponding to the data set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 are the corresponding dots in the second sub-display device 44 by the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99. Is output to. As a result, the data corresponding to the image signal output to the first sub-display device 43 becomes the data as shown in FIG. 39 (d), and the data corresponding to the image signal output to the second sub-display device 44 is shown in FIG. The data is as shown in 39 (e).

The output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 in the second display circuit 99 is synchronized with the clock signal input to the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit provided in the effect LSI 85. Let's do it. Specifically, the second display circuit 99 has an image corresponding to one dot existing in the odd-numbered vertical line in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118 with respect to one pulse signal received as a clock signal. The signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and the image signal corresponding to one dot arranged side by side in a predetermined horizontal direction with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. More specifically, at the output timing of the first image signal for the drawing data created in the frame areas 117 and 118, the image signal corresponding to one dot existing in the upper left corner of the frame areas 117 and 118 in FIG. 39 (c). Is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged side by side with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. In the output timing of the next image signal, it corresponds to the odd-numbered dot in the horizontal direction among the two dots arranged side by side with respect to the two dots to be output of the image signal at the first output timing. The image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and the image signal corresponding to the even-numbered dots is output to the second sub-display device 44. After that, after the output of the image signal for one line in the horizontal direction is completed, the image signal is output by two dots in order from the left side for one line in the horizontal direction one step below.

The state in which the image signal is output to the sub-display devices 43 and 44 will be described while showing the relationship with the timing at which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41. FIG. 40 is a time chart showing how an image signal is output to each display device 41, 43, 44, and FIG. 40 (a) shows a first display circuit 98 and a second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit of the effect LSI 85. 40 (b) shows the period during which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, and FIG. 40 (c) shows the second display circuit 99. The period during which the image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43 is shown, and FIG. 40 (d) shows the period during which the image signal is output from the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 40A, the output of the pulse signal to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 as a clock signal is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 40B, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is started. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is started. To.

After that, FIG. 40 (c) shows the timing of t2 in which the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is continued. Thus, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is completed. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), an image corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44. The output of the signal is started.

After that, at the timing of t3, the output of one pulse of the clock signal is terminated as shown in FIG. 40 (a). In this case, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 40B, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is completed. As shown in FIG. 40 (d), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44 is completed.

After that, the same signal output as the timing of t1 to t3 is repeated at each of the timing of t4 to t6, the timing of t7 to t9, and the timing of t10 to t12. Then, by outputting each image signal synchronized with the output of the pulse signal in the clock signal as described above, the main display is performed using one drawing data created in one frame area 114, 115. The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are used by using one drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118 while the image for one frame is updated in the device 41. The image for one frame is updated in each of the above.

When 1 dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to 1 dot of the main display device 41, the output of the image signal corresponding to 1 dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 with respect to 1 dot of the main display device 41 is output. It is performed during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal, and when one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to the plurality of dots of the main display device 41, the frame areas 114 and 115 with respect to the plurality of dots of the main display device 41 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot is performed in the output period of one pulse of the clock signal. Further, when one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot of the first sub display device 43, an image corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 with respect to one dot of the first sub display device 43. When the signal is output for half the output period of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots of the first sub display device 43, the first sub display device 43 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is performed in the output period of half of one pulse of the clock signal. Further, when one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot of the second sub display device 44, an image corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 with respect to one dot of the second sub display device 44. When the signal is output for half the output period of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots of the second sub-display device 44, the second sub-display device 44 The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is performed in the output period of half of one pulse of the clock signal.

As described above, the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 and the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the second sub-display device 44 are in one frame area. By aggregating and creating 117 and 118, the number of frame areas 117 and 118 can be increased as compared with the configuration in which drawing data corresponding to each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is created in different frame areas. It becomes possible to suppress it.

An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43 with respect to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, and corresponds to another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. As a result, the timing at which the update of the image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is completed and the timing at which the update of the image for one frame on the second sub-display device 44 is completed are set to be substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing at which the update of one frame of the image of one of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is completed is larger than the timing at which the update of the image of one frame of the other is completed. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub-display device 44. The drawing data to be displayed is set to the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118. As a result, when the image signal is output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43. Since it is sufficient to output to the second sub-display device 44 as well as to output the image signal existing adjacent to the one dot to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of the dot to be output of the image signal is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration that enables the output of the image signal as described above will be described. First, the writing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The writing process is executed in step S705 in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19).

In the writing process, the display order priority data set in the drawing list is specified for the image data to be written this time, and the value of the specified display order priority data is the first display target reference value "100". It is determined whether or not it is less than (step S1401). When the value of the display order priority data is less than "100" which is the first display target reference value (step S1401: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the main display device 41. Since it means that the image data is to be created, a process for drawing the image data to be written this time is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 in the drawing area 111 for the main display of the register 93 ( Step S1402). As described above, the 2D drawing area 112 is an area for creating drawing data for a 2D image among the drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the main display device 41.

On the other hand, when the value of the display order priority data is "100" or more, which is the first display target reference value (step S1401: NO), the image data to be written this time is one of the sub-display devices 43, Since it means that the drawing data corresponds to 44 is the image data, the drawing process to the drawing area 116 for sub-display in the register 93 is executed (step S1403). FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

First, the display order priority data set in the drawing list is specified for the image data to be written this time, and the value of the specified display order priority data is less than "200", which is the second display target reference value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1501). When the value of the display order priority data is less than "200" which is the second display target reference value (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43. It means that it is image data for creating. In this case, first, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1502). The drawing count counter is a counter for the 2D control unit 96 to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction when the vertical line is set as one unit for the current image data. In step S1502, the orientation when drawing the image data in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, and the vertical line is specified in that orientation. The number of is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1503). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameter of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing count counter. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the data of the vertical line extracted in step S1503 is drawn with respect to the specified vertical line of the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1504). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameters, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may be drawn on a vertical line.

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1506). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1503 and S1504 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S1503 and S1504, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

When the value of the display order priority data is "200" or more, which is the second display target reference value (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44. It means that it is image data for creating. In this case, similarly to step S1502, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1507). Specifically, based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, the orientation when drawing the image data in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified, and in that orientation. The number of vertical lines is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1508). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameter of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing count counter. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the data of the vertical line extracted in step S1508 is drawn with respect to the specified vertical line of the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1509). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameters, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may be drawn on a vertical line.

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1511). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1508 and S1509 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S1508 and S1509, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Next, the signal output process executed by the second display circuit 99 of the effect LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. The second display circuit 99 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing signal output processing is set in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the program stored in the memory module 83 or the like and the program and the like. The configuration may be provided as a general-purpose circuit that executes signal output processing using data. This also applies to the first display circuit 98.

When the output of the pulse signal from the clock circuit is started, the signal output timing is reached (step S1601: YES). When the signal output timing is reached, the abscissa update process is executed (step S1602). In the abscissa update process, if this process is the first image signal output process for the drawing data that is the current image signal output target, the dots in the upper left corner of the frame areas 117 and 118 are images. Set the coordinate information so that the dots are the output target of the signal. On the other hand, if the processing time this time is not the output processing time of the first image signal, the abscissa information in the current coordinate information is updated so as to shift to the dot to the right by one dot. In this case, the vertical coordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is.

Further, as a result of updating the abscissa information so as to shift to the dot to the right by one dot, when the abscissa information exceeds the maximum value of the abscissa (step S1603: YES), the abscissa information is in the frame area. The information of the abscissa is cleared to "0" so as to be the information corresponding to the leftmost dot in 117 and 118 (step S1604). Further, the vertical coordinate information is updated so that the vertical coordinate information corresponds to the dots one step lower than the current vertical coordinate dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1605).

After that, the image signal set as the dot of the coordinate information of the result updated this time is output from the first output unit 131 to the corresponding dot of the first sub display device 43 (step S1606). The output period of this image signal is less than half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1607: YES), the abscissa update process is executed (step S1608). In the abscissa update process, the abscissa information of the current coordinate information is updated so as to shift to the dot to the right by one dot. In this case, the vertical coordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is. After that, the image signal set as the dot of the coordinate information of the result updated this time is output from the second output unit 132 to the corresponding dot of the second sub display device 44 (step S1609). The output period of this image signal is less than half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1610: YES), the current processing time of the signal output processing ends.

By executing the signal output processing as described above, each time one pulse signal is input to the second display circuit 99 as a clock signal as shown in the time chart of FIG. 40, the frame areas 117 and 118 are used. The image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and the image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44.

Here, as described above, the main display device 41 is non-displaceable, whereas the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displaceable. Specifically, the first sub-display device 43 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and in the execution period of the effect of moving the first sub-display device 43, FIG. 6A is shown. It is arranged at a position for display effect such as a first juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6B and a second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6B. Further, the second sub-display device 44 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and is as shown in FIG. 6A during the execution period of the effect of moving the second sub-display device 44. It is arranged at a position for display effect such as a first parallel position and a second parallel position as shown in FIG. 6B.

FIG. 44 shows an example of an execution target table for display control during the displacement effect period in which the effect of displacing the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is executed. In the displacement effect period shown in FIG. 44, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 43 are first arranged in the initial positions of both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. An image is displayed on each of the two sub-display devices 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position.

After that, the main display device 41 and the first sub are held in a situation where the second sub display device 44 is held at the initial position and the first sub display device 43 is displaced or is arranged at the position for display effect. An image is displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image for display effect, while the second sub-display device 44 displays an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position.

After that, the main display device 41 and the first sub are arranged in a situation where the first sub display device 43 is arranged at the initial position and the second sub display device 44 is displaced or is arranged at the position for display effect. An image is displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position, whereas the second sub-display device 44 displays an image for display effect.

After that, in a situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaced or arranged at a position for display effect, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the first sub-display device 43 are arranged. An image is displayed on each of the two sub-display devices 44. In this case, the image for display effect is displayed on both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44.

In the configuration in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaceably provided as described above, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at any positions. The frame areas 117 and 118 of the drawing area 116 for sub-display in the register 93 correspond to the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 by the constant processing already described at each update timing. Drawing data is aggregated and created. Further, using the aggregated drawing data, an image signal is output to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 by a certain process already described. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing configuration for creating the drawing data and the processing configuration for outputting the image signal according to the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. It will be possible.

<Effect of configuration related to display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 (hereinafter, also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter, also referred to as first drawing data). The second drawing data) is aggregated and created for one frame area 117 and 118, so that the drawing data corresponding to the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are placed in different frame areas. It is possible to reduce the number of frame areas 117 and 118 as compared with the created configuration. This makes it possible to display images on a plurality of sub-display devices 43 and 44 while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the frame areas 117 and 118.

Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in one frame area 117 and 118 at the same time. This makes it possible to overlap the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data.

At the same update timing, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used are set in one frame area 117 and 118. As a result, it is not necessary to individually target the first drawing data and the second drawing data set in one frame area 117 and 118 at different update timings, so that the processing load of the second display circuit 99 is reduced. It becomes possible.

The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub-display device 44. The drawing data to be displayed is set to the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118. As a result, when the image signal is output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43. Since it is sufficient to output to the second sub-display device 44 as well as to output the image signal existing adjacent to the one dot to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of the dot to be output of the image signal is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43 with respect to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, and corresponds to another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. As a result, the timing at which the update of the image for one frame on the first sub-display device 43 is completed and the timing at which the update of the image for one frame on the second sub-display device 44 is completed are set to be substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing at which the update of one frame of the image of one of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is completed is larger than the timing at which the update of the image of one frame of the other is completed. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

<Structure for displaying right-handed notification images 141 and 143>
Next, a configuration for displaying the right-handed notification images 141 and 143 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

As described above, in the game area PA, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area when the center frame 42 is used as a reference. Therefore, in order to generate a prize for the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball flows down in the right side region. In this case, in the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, a right-handed notification image indicating that the launch operation should be performed so that the game ball flows down the right area of the game area PA. Is displayed.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the right-handed notification images 141 and 143 displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), in the main display device 41, as a right-handed notification image 141 on the main side, the right-handed notification image 141 extends horizontally in the middle position in the vertical direction on the display surface of the main display device 41. The band-shaped image 141a is displayed, and the instruction image 141b for instructing right-handed striking is displayed so as to overlap the band-shaped image 141a from the front. The right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is continuously displayed in the open / close execution mode, and the display position and display mode on the main display device 41 are constant. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 46A, the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is displayed by using the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side stored in advance in the memory module 83.

In the open / close execution mode, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be arranged at the first parallel position as shown in FIG. 45 (a), and as shown in FIG. 45 (b). The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be arranged at the second parallel position. When these sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first parallel position or the second parallel position, the main display device 41 covers a part of the area where the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is displayed. The sub-display devices 43 and 44 face each other from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the visibility of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is reduced by the sub-display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial position such as the first parallel position or the second parallel position in the open / close execution mode, the first sub-display devices 43 and the second are displayed. A right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44. When the first sub display device 43 is arranged at the initial position in the open / close execution mode, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the first sub display device 43, and the open / close execution is executed. When the second sub display device 44 is arranged at the initial position in the mode, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the second sub display device 44.

One right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on a part of the display surface of the first sub display device 43, and one is displayed on a part of the display surface of the second sub display device 44. As shown in FIG. 46A, the memory module 83 stores the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side in advance, and causes the first sub-display device 43 to display the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side. In any case where the second sub-display device 44 displays the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side, the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side is used.

The position where the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 is the upper right corner portion in the state of FIG. 45 (a), and the sub-side right-handed notification on the first sub-display device 43. The display position of the image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the first sub-display device 43 is displaced. That is, the upper right corner portion of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45 (a) is the lower right corner portion in the state of FIG. 45 (b), but the sub in the first sub display device 43. Since the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the side is fixed, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the upper right corner of the first sub-display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45 (a). At the same time, in the state of FIG. 45 (b), it is displayed in the lower right corner portion of the first sub display device 43.

Similarly, the position where the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on the second sub display device 44 is the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45 (a), and the position on the sub side on the second sub display device 44 is. The display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the second sub-display device 44 is displaced. That is, the lower left corner portion of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45 (a) is the upper left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45 (b), but the sub side in the first sub display device 43. Since the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the lower left corner of the second sub-display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45 (a). In the state of FIG. 45 (b), it is displayed in the upper left corner portion of the second sub display device 44.

By fixing the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as described above, the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side in the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is determined. It is not necessary to switch the information of the coordinates to be attached according to the displacement state of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for displaying the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Further, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first parallel position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged vertically, they are arranged on the upper side as shown in FIG. 45 (a). The right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on the upper part of the first sub-display device 43, and the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on the lower part of the second sub-display device 44 arranged on the lower side. Is displayed. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the second parallel position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side, they are arranged on the left side as shown in FIG. 45 (b). The right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at the upper part of the second sub-display device 44, and the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at the lower part of the first sub-display device 43 arranged on the right side. Is displayed. That is, regardless of whether the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged side by side, the display area is above and below the display area. The right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at each position of. As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side regardless of whether the images are arranged in the first parallel position or the second parallel position.

The sub-display devices 43 and 44 are driven and controlled so that the state of being arranged in the first parallel position and the state of being arranged in the second parallel position are alternately repeated in the open / close execution mode. As a result, the situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are integrated and the situation in which the sub-display devices are rotated in the clockwise direction and the situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction are alternately repeated. On the other hand, in the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side, the player can easily grasp the content of the right-handed instruction regardless of the rotation position of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It is an image.

46 (b) and 46 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents displayed as the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side. As shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 46 (c), the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side has an annular outer edge, and the continuous instruction image 143a is displayed in the width portion of the annular shape. .. The continuous instruction image 143a is composed of two "right-handed" character images and two arrow images, so that the arrow images are present on both sides of the character image and the character images are present on both sides of the arrow image. It is arranged in a ring. In this case, one character image and one character image are arranged so as to face each other with the center of the ring in between and the upper side of each character image is the outer peripheral side. As a result, even when the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is arranged at a rotation position such that one character image faces downward, the other character image is displayed upward. Therefore, it is easy for the player to grasp the content of the character image regardless of the rotation position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Further, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side has a fixed display position on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and has a fixed direction (specifically) with the central portion of the ring in the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side as the center of rotation. Is displayed to rotate to the right and clockwise). As a result, regardless of the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged, the timing at which the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at the rotation position where the player can easily grasp the content of the character image is surely generated. Will be done.

In the configuration in which the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed so as to rotate in a certain direction, the rotation speed is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. A state in which the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) shows the period during which the right-handed notification is executed on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side displayed on the main display device 41. FIG. 47 (c) shows the period during which the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and FIG. 47 (d) shows the sub display devices 43 and 44 clockwise or clockwise. Indicates the period of rotation in the counterclockwise direction.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the right-handed notification should be started. In this case, at the timing of t1, the main display device 41 starts displaying the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side as shown in FIG. 47 (b), and each sub as shown in FIG. 47 (c). The display devices 43 and 44 start displaying the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Here, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed so as to rotate clockwise as described above, and the rotation speeds are the first speed, the second speed faster than the first speed, and the like. There is a third speed that is faster than the second speed. The lowest speed, the first speed, is the speed set when the integral parts of the sub-display devices 43, 44 rotate in the clockwise direction, and the second speed, which is the intermediate speed, is the speed set when the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43, 44 rotate in the clockwise direction. The third speed, which is the highest speed, is the speed set when the one piece of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Is.

When the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate in the clockwise direction, the rotation speed in the clockwise direction of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the lowest first speed, so that the sub side side When the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate in the same direction as the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be relatively reduced. .. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side from becoming unnecessarily fast.

When the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the rotation speed in the clockwise direction of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the highest third speed, so that the sub side When the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be relatively increased. It becomes. The rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is faster than the rotation speed when the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate in the opposite directions. As a result, even when the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate in the opposite direction, the player recognizes that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating in the clockwise direction. It becomes possible to make it.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 start rotating in the clockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the first speed. As a result, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be decelerated as the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 start rotating in the clockwise direction.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the rotation of the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 start rotating in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the third speed. As a result, it is possible to accelerate the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side as the integrated object of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the rotation of the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the right-handed notification should be terminated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the display of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side in the main display device 41 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displayed. The display of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is terminated.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side as described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a setting process for right-handed notification executed by the effect CPU 82. The setting process for right-handed notification is executed in the task process for display control in step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

When it is the start timing of the right-handed notification (step S1701: NO, step S1702: YES), the display start processing of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1703). In this process, the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side starts displaying the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) on the main display device 41. Is set to be the target of the drawing process, and the parameter information to be applied to the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side is derived.

After that, a process for setting the coordinate information of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1704). In this process, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the predetermined corner portion of the first sub display device 43, and the sub side is displayed in the predetermined corner portion of the second sub display device 44. Two fixed coordinate information corresponding to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are derived so that the right-handed notification image 143 is displayed. Further, in the process, in order to display the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side on the first sub-display device 43, a usage instruction is set for one right-handed image data 144 on the sub side, and a second sub-display is displayed. In order for the device 44 to display the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side, a usage instruction is set for one right-handed image data 144 on the sub side. Further, in step S1705, parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side used for the first sub display device 43 is derived and used for the second sub display device 44. Parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side is derived.

The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived in steps S1703 to S1705 is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data. The display of the image 141 is started, and the display of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is started on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

When it is the execution period of the right-handed notification (step S1701: YES), the update process of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1706). In this process, the parameter information for displaying the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is derived in the mode of the update timing corresponding to the update instruction this time. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the parameter information is set, the display content of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side in the main display device 41 is updated.

After that, similarly to step S1704, a process for setting the coordinate information for the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1707). In this process, the same coordinate information derived in step S1704 is used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 and the second sub-display device 44 used for the first sub-display device 43. Each of the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side is derived. As a result, the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side of the first sub-display device 43 is fixed, and the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side of the second sub-display device 44 is fixed.

After that, when it is not the rotation period of the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S1708: NO), the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is the second speed. The rotation information to be obtained is the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and the sub-side right-handed image used for the second sub-display device 44. It is derived as rotation information applied to each of the data 144 (step S1709). By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, it seems that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating at the second rotation speed in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed in.

When the rotation period of the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is clockwise and the rotation direction is clockwise (step S1708 and step S1709: YES), the first update process of the rotation information at the time of rotation is executed (step). S1711). In the first update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 becomes the first speed is provided by the first sub display device 43. It is derived as rotation information applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44 and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, it seems that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating at the rotation speed of the first speed in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed in.

When the rotation period of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is in the counterclockwise direction (step S1708: YES, step S1710: NO), the second update process of the rotation information at the time of rotation is executed. (Step S1712). In the second update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 becomes the third speed is provided by the first sub display device 43. It is derived as rotation information applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44 and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44. By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, it seems that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating at the rotation speed of the third speed in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed in.

When any of the processes of step S1709, step S1711, and step S1712 is executed, the other parameter setting process is executed (step S1713). In this process, parameter information other than the coordinate information and rotation information applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side used for the first sub display device 43 is derived, and the second sub display device 44 is subjected to the processing. Parameter information other than the coordinate information and rotation information applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side to be used is derived.

<Effect of configuration for displaying right-handed notification images 141 and 143>
The rotation operation is performed in the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, in the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side, the continuous instruction image 143a is arranged in a ring shape. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the content of the continuous instruction image 143a for notification even when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

In the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed as if it is rotating. As a result, the player can visually recognize the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side in the predetermined display direction regardless of the rotation position of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Since the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the operation mode of the rotation operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is any mode. Even so, the display content of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be set to a display content that is easy for the player to recognize.

<Structure for displaying the image 153 for the rotation period>
Next, a configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

The sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable as described above, and the first parallel position in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in the horizontal direction are provided. It is rotatable between the second side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position. In this case, when each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates from the first juxtaposed position to the second juxtaposed position, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 respectively. An image 153 for a rotation period is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

49 (a) to 49 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the effect using the rotation period image 153. In the situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the movement start timing to the parallel position is set, so that FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b) show. As shown, the movement of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 toward the first parallel position is started. During this moving period, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 do not display an image having continuity with the main display device 41, and the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device are not displayed. An image 151 for a moving period corresponding to each of the 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is displayed. By displaying the moving period image 151 individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 in this way, the sub-display devices 43, 44 move from the initial position to the first parallel position. The player can clearly grasp what he / she is doing. The drive control for displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed by the distribution side MPU 73 as described above.

After that, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are simultaneously arranged in the first parallel position, so that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 49 (b) and these sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged. A series of display surfaces are formed by the above. The state in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first parallel display position is maintained for the parallel display period. In this parallel display period, an image 152 for a parallel period such as a predetermined character image is displayed on a series of display surfaces formed by the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The parallel period image 152 is displayed over both sub-display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. In the area of the main display device 41 that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44, the parallel period image 152 different from the parallel period image 152 displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. Will be done.

After that, as the parallel display period elapses, the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate clockwise while maintaining the state of forming a series of display surfaces, and the integrated objects are simultaneously arranged in the second parallel position. Placed in position. In this rotation period, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d), the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. To. The rotation period image 153 is displayed over both the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 so as to straddle the boundary between the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43, and is displayed as the main. It is displayed over both the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. Further, the rotation period image 153 is displayed over both the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. Further, the display mode of the rotation period image 153 displayed over each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is the rotation of the integrated objects of the sub display devices 43 and 44. The display mode is irrelevant to the position. Specifically, the outer edge portion of the integrated object of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 that creates a boundary with the predetermined area of the main display device 41 changes with the rotation of the integrated object, but is predetermined during the rotation period. The display content of the image portion displayed over both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 at the timing is displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 at the timing before that in the rotation period. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the display content has continuity with the image portion displayed over the entire period. As a result, in the main display device 41, one display surface is formed by the area not facing each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 and the display surface of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and the one display surface is fixed. The rotation period image 153 that is recognized by the player as a vertical surface is displayed on the one display surface. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

After that, as the rotation period elapses, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 becomes a separation period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are separated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 49 (e). During the separation period, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 do not display images having continuity with the main display device 41, and the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 do not display images. An image 154 for a separation period corresponding to each of the second sub-display device 44 and the second sub-display device 44 is displayed. By displaying the images 154 for the separation period individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 in this way, the sub-display devices 43, 44 are directed from the second parallel position to the separation time position. It is possible to make the player know that the player is moving.

Here, as described above, each display device 41 is a rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating during the rotation period. , 43, 44, respectively. Then, although the integrated objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are actually arranged in the second parallel position, the player recognizes that the integrated objects are arranged in the first parallel position. A situation can occur. In such a situation, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 start moving toward the separated position, the player may feel unexpected in the operation. Then, by giving such an unexpectedness, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the image display.

Hereinafter, the processing configuration for performing the above-mentioned image display in each of the moving period, the parallel display period, the rotation period, and the separation period will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a rotation movement display setting process executed by the effect CPU 82. The rotation / movement display setting process is executed in the task process for display control in step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the case of the moving period to the parallel position (step S1801: YES), the use of various image data for displaying the moving period image 151 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 is set, and various of them are set. Various parameter information to be applied to the image data is derived (steps S1802 to S1804). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the moving period image 151 is displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Will be done.

In the case of the parallel display period (step S1805: YES), the use of various image data for displaying the image 152 for the parallel period is set on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, and the various image data are set. Various parameter information to be applied to is derived (step S1806 to step S1808). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the images 152 for the parallel period are displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Is displayed.

In the case of the rotation period (step S1809: YES), one display surface (hereinafter referred to as “1”) formed by the area of the main display device 41 that does not face each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 and the display surface of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. , The use of various image data for displaying the image 153 for the rotation period is set over the entire surface of the aggregated display surface, and various parameter information applied to the various image data is derived (steps S181-10). S1812). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Will be done.

Here, a method of creating image data 156 to 158 for displaying the image 153 for the rotation period at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51. When creating the image data 156 to 158, first, a plurality of 2D image data 155 for displaying a moving image over the entire aggregated display surface during the rotation period are created. The plurality of 2D image data 155 are created in a one-to-one correspondence with each update timing included in the rotation period. After that, from each of the 2D image data 155, the image data 156 corresponding to each of the display range by the main display device 41, the display range by the first sub display device 43, and the display range by the second sub display device 44 at the corresponding update timing. Cut out ~ 158.

Explaining the contents of the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49 (c), the 2D image data 155 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49 (c) will be described. First, it is created (see FIG. 51 (a)). When the data range corresponding to the display range by the main display device 41 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the portion displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 becomes blank data as shown in FIG. For the portion, image data 156 for displaying the image 153 for the rotation period can be obtained. Data for setting blank color information such as black is set in the blank data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D image data 155 may be used as it is as the image data 156 for the main display device 41. In this case, even if a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and at least one of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is not arranged in the parallel position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The image that should be originally displayed will be displayed on the main display device 41.

When the data range corresponding to the display range by the first sub display device 43 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, an image for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the first sub display device 43 as shown in FIG. 51 (c). Data 157 is obtained. Further, when the data range corresponding to the display range by the second sub display device 44 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the second sub display device 44 is displayed with the image 153 for the rotation period as shown in FIG. 51 (d). Image data 158 is obtained.

After cutting out the various image data 156 to 158 as described above, the various image data 156 to 158 are changed to the data format corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be used. Specifically, the resolution of the main display device 41 is 800 × 600, whereas the resolutions of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are both 572 × 180. Therefore, the image data 156 corresponding to the main display device 41 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the main display device 41, and the image data 157 and 158 corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44 are adjusted to the sub display device 43. , 44 Adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution.

Furthermore, while the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 3D image on the main display device 41, the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 2D image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In this case, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the main display device 41, the image data 156 is used as texture data to be attached to the plate-shaped polygon. On the other hand, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the image data 157 and 158 are used as sprite data. Therefore, adjustments are made to accommodate these data formats.

The image data 156 to 158 corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above are created for each update timing in the rotation period. Therefore, as image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the memory module 83, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51 (e), the first image data group 161 and the first sub for the main display device 41 The second image data group 162 for the display device 43 and the third image data group 163 for the second sub display device 44 are stored. Each of the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 includes a number of image data corresponding to the number of update timings included in the rotation period. The effect LSI 85 reads out image data corresponding to each update timing from the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 during the rotation period and uses the image data.

Returning to the explanation of the rotation / movement display setting process (FIG. 50), in the case of the separation period (step S1813: YES), various images for displaying the separation period image 154 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. While setting the use of the data, various parameter information to be applied to the various image data is derived (steps S1814 to S1816). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the image 154 for the separation period is displayed on the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Will be done.

<Effect of configuration for displaying image 153 for rotation period>
During the rotation period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the rotation period image 153 for making it difficult for the player to identify that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating is sub. It is displayed on the display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating without the player noticing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The rotation period image 153 is an image having no directionality in the direction along the display surface of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. As a result, in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating by displaying the image 153 for the rotation period on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Can be made difficult for the player to identify.

The rotation period image 153 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on the non-rotating display surface without following the rotation operation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it difficult for the player to identify that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, a part of the display surface of the main display device 41 exists around the display surface of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and a part of the display surface thereof. In the area of, the image corresponding to the rotation period image 153 in the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to display an image related to the rotation period image 153 displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 around the sub-display devices 43 and 44 that are performing the rotation operation, and the main image can be displayed. The display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can perform an integrated display effect.

In particular, in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the display surface of the main display device 41 exists over the entire circumference of the display surface of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is a part of the display surface of the main display device 41, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It becomes easy to display an image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the presence.

Images having continuity are displayed on the display devices 41, 43, 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display devices 43, 44. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to these images to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

The rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 differ between the timing at which the rotation period starts and the timing at which the rotation period ends. In this case, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate in a situation where the image 153 for the rotation period is displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. The rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are different. As a result, it is expected that the player recognizes that the rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without noticing it, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Before and after the rotation period, images that the player can easily recognize the rotation position of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and during the rotation period, the sub display devices 43 and 44 perform a rotation operation. The rotation period image 153, which is difficult for the player to recognize, is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to give the player a strong impression that the rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without being noticed.

<Structure for displaying the abnormality notification image 176>
Next, a configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, there are a plurality of types of events to be executed for abnormality notification. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event to be executed for abnormality notification. As shown in FIG. 52, the events to be executed for the abnormality notification include magnet detection, radio wave detection, large winning opening abnormality detection, disconnection abnormality, game ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. , Vibration detection, door opening, and frame opening exist. Magnet detection is an event in which a magnetic force is detected by a magnetic force detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. Radio wave detection is an event in which radio waves are detected by a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. The large winning opening abnormality detection is an event of detecting the entry of a game ball into the special electric winning device 32 in a situation other than the opening / closing execution mode. The disconnection abnormality is a connection confirmation signal received by the main MPU 62 from the winning detection sensors provided in the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. It is an event that has not happened. The game ball discharge abnormality is an event in which the discharge of the game ball from the payout device 68 is not detected even though the payout device 68 is driven and controlled in order to pay out the game ball. The movable body abnormality is an event in which the general electric accessory 34a is not opened even though the drive control is performed so that the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state. The full tank abnormality is an event in which the lower plate 56a is full with a game ball. Vibration detection is an event in which vibration is detected by a vibration detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. The door opening is an event in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The frame opening is an event in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

When the above-mentioned event occurs, the display light emitting unit 53 emits light for abnormality notification, and the speaker unit 54 outputs an abnormality notification sound. Further, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. In the abnormality notification image 176, an image corresponding to the type of the event that triggered the execution of the abnormality notification is displayed, and specifically, characters indicating the type of the event are displayed. In this case, as described above, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable, and as the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displaced, the main display device 41 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The range changes. Along with this, the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 differs depending on the position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged.

53 (a) to 53 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176. In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are both arranged at the initial positions, the display surfaces of the main display device 41 face each other above and below the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as shown in FIG. 53 (a). Most of the area except for a part of the area is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the display range 171 at the time of non-operation excluding a part of the upper and lower areas facing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is an abnormality notification. It is the display range of the image 176.

The display range 171 at the time of non-operation is set to a size capable of displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 displayed in a predetermined size at the same time. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which the abnormality notification is executed. In this case, if eight or more events to be executed for the abnormality notification occur at the same time, the abnormality notification image 176 cannot be displayed for some of the events. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52, priorities are set for the events to be executed by the abnormality notification, and the events to be executed by the abnormality notification are selected according to the priorities.

The highest priority is set for the first event group corresponding to fraudulent activity that may cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. The first event group includes magnet detection, radio wave detection, and grand prize opening abnormality detection. Next, the priority of the second event group, which may prevent the game from proceeding normally, is set high. The second event group includes disconnection abnormality, game ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. Then, even in a situation where the game is performed normally, the priority of the third event group that can occur at the time of maintenance or the like is set to the lowest. The third event group includes vibration detection, door opening and frame opening.

Since the display range 171 at the time of non-operation is set to a size capable of displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 at the same time as described above, all the events included in the first event group and the second event group Even if all the events included in the above occur at the same time, it is possible to simultaneously display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of these events. On the other hand, if not only all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group but also the events included in the third event group occur at the same time, they are included in the third event group. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event is not displayed. In this case, even if the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is displayed first, all the events included in the first event group and all included in the second event group thereafter. When the above events occur at the same time, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group that has been executed up to that point is interrupted, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the event on the higher priority side is interrupted. The display of the image 176 is started. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event on the higher priority side.

Further, after that, in the situation where the events included in the third event group continue, at least one of the events on the higher priority side is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event is completed. The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is started. As a result, when there is a margin in the display area of the abnormality notification image 176, it is possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event occurring at that time.

If the predetermined event has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed and the predetermined event occurs again, the abnormality notification that has already been performed has been performed. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, when the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the effect image.

Next, a case where the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed will be described. When the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 has a region between the initial position and the first parallel position (see FIG. 53 (b)) and the first parallel position. Area to be the installation position (see FIG. 53 (c)), area between the first parallel position and the second parallel position, area to be the second parallel position (see FIG. 53 (d)), second It is arranged in a region between the parallel position and the separation position and a region serving as the separation position (see FIG. 53 (e)). In this case, if the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the area where the main display device 41 can face the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 may be hidden by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, if the area in which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 is to be finely switched according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the processing configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 becomes complicated. It ends up. Therefore, a plurality of display ranges 172 to 174 of the main display device 41 that do not always face the sub display devices 43 and 44 during the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 become the display range of the abnormality notification image 176. Specifically, the first display range 172 during operation set in the upper left corner portion of the main display device 41 and the second display range during operation set in the upper right corner portion of the main display device 41. The 173 and the third display range 174 at the time of operation set in the lower right corner portion of the main display device 41 are set.

Each of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation is set to a size capable of displaying only one abnormality notification image 176 displayed in a predetermined size. That is, during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed at the same time is three. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which the abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even in this case, the event to be displayed on the abnormality notification image 176 is selected according to the priority already described, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed for the selected event. For example, when four or more events to be executed for abnormality notification have occurred, three events having a high priority among those events are selected, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the selected three events is performed. Image 176 is displayed. Then, when any event that is the display target of the abnormality notification image 176 is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 for that event is completed, the abnormality notification image 176 is not the display target. The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event on the lower priority side is started.

Here, as described above, the number of events included in the first event group is three. This number is equal to or less than the number of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation, that is, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed. There is. As a result, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the first event group having the highest priority can be immediately displayed regardless of the timing at which the event occurs.

If the predetermined event has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed and the predetermined event occurs again, the abnormality notification that has already been performed has been performed. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. In addition, an image for effect is displayed in a region other than the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation of the main display device 41.

54 (a) to 54 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed. When the first abnormality, which is one of the above events, occurs in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first parallel position as shown in FIG. 54 (a), FIG. 54 (b) ) Is displayed, an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the first abnormality has occurred in the first display range 172 during operation of the main display device 41 is displayed. Further, also in the first sub-display device 43, a character image of "abnormality occurrence" is displayed as a common notification image 175 indicating that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common broadcast image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By confirming 172, it is possible to grasp the type of the event for which the abnormality notification is executed. The common notification image 175 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the effect image on the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

Further, the types and positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 on which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ depending on the displacement state of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, the area where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are between the initial position and the first parallel position (see FIG. 53 (b)) and the area where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are in the first parallel position (see FIG. 53 (c)). Or, when arranged in the area between the first parallel position and the second parallel position, the end of the first sub-display device 43 opposite to the boundary side with the second sub-display device 44. The common broadcast image 175 is displayed at a position closer to the part. Further, the area where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are in the second parallel position (see FIG. 53 (d)), the area between the second parallel position and the separated position, or the area in which the separated position is set (FIG. FIG. When arranged in 53 (e)), the common broadcast image 175 is displayed at a position near the upper end on the second sub-display device 44.

After that, when the second abnormality, which is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality, occurs in the situation where the first abnormality has not been resolved, the main display is shown as shown in FIG. 54 (c). An abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a second abnormality has occurred is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation of the device 41. Further, even in this situation, the common notification image 175 of "abnormality occurrence" continues to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common broadcast image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By confirming 172 and the second display range 173 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of the event for which the abnormality notification is executed.

After that, when a third abnormality occurs, which is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality and the second abnormality, in a situation where both the first abnormality and the second abnormality have not been resolved, FIG. As shown in 54 (d), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a third abnormality has occurred in the third display range 174 during operation of the main display device 41 is displayed. Further, even in this situation, the common notification image 175 of "abnormality occurrence" continues to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common broadcast image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to grasp that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By checking 172, the second display range 173 during operation, and the third display range 174 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which the abnormality notification is executed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 54 (d), for example, when the event of the first abnormality is resolved, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the first abnormality in the first display range 172 during operation is terminated. Even in this case, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the second abnormality in the second display range 173 during operation and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the third abnormality in the third display range 174 during operation. The display continues. In this way, even if the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is terminated in the first display range 172 during the operation in which the display start order of the abnormality notification image 176 is the first side, the abnormality is in the first display range 172 side during the operation. Instead of shifting the display target area of the notification image 176, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is continued as it is in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, which are already display targets. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event is continuing.

Further, in this way, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. When a new event occurs in the situation where the event has not occurred, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly generated event is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176, which is continuously displayed, is continuously displayed in the display range 172 to 174 which has been displayed so far. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event is continuing.

Further, when an event different from the first abnormal event, the second abnormal event, and the third abnormal event occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 54 (d), the priority of the newly generated event is 1st to 1st. If it is higher than the priority of any of the events of the third abnormality, the display range 172 to which the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event having the lowest priority among the events of the first to third abnormalities is displayed is displayed. At 174, the already displayed abnormality notification image 176 is deleted, and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly generated event is started. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176, which is continuously displayed, is continuously displayed in the display range 172 to 174 which has been displayed so far. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event is continuing.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the abnormality notification image 176 as described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing of the notification command executed by the effect CPU 82. The command correspondence process of the notification command is executed in the command correspondence process of step S503 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the corresponding processing of the notification command, when the notification start command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1901: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification start command is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1902). ). The main MPU 62 executes the management process of whether or not an event to be executed for the abnormality notification has occurred. When an event for which the abnormality notification is executed occurs, the main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality occurrence command including information on the type of the event to the distribution side MPU 73. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality occurrence command, it transmits a notification start command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality occurrence command to the effect CPU 82. Upon receiving this notification start command, the effect CPU 82 stores the notification type data in the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. When a plurality of events occur at the same time in the same period, the notification type data corresponding to each of the plurality of events is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82. Further, when a notification start command corresponding to an event of the same type as the event corresponding to the notification type data already stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is received, a new notification type data corresponding to the event is received. I don't remember.

When even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification process is executed in the light emission control task process (step S504) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, when even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the display light emitting unit 53 continues the light emission for abnormality notification. If even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification process is executed in the sound output control task process (step S505) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14). To. As a result, when even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker unit 54 is continued. Further, when the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the processing for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, 44 is executed. The details of this processing will be described later.

In the corresponding processing of the notification command, when the notification release command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1903: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification release command is deleted from the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1904). ). The main MPU 62 executes the management process of whether or not the state in which the event that is the execution target of the abnormality notification has occurred has been resolved. When the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred is resolved, the main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality resolution command including information on the type of the event to the distribution side MPU 73. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality resolution command, it transmits a notification release command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality resolution command to the effect CPU 82. Upon receiving this notification release command, the effect CPU 82 deletes the notification type data corresponding to the notification release command from the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. As a result, all the abnormality notifications corresponding to the deleted notification type data are terminated.

As for the method of specifying whether or not the state in which the event that is the target of execution of the abnormality notification has occurred in the main MPU 62 has been resolved, the presence or absence of the occurrence is specified by using the detection result by the detection sensor. If the event is detected by the detection sensor and the detection result corresponds to the fact that the event has not occurred, the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred is resolved. It is also possible to specify that the event has occurred, and when the release operation set corresponding to the event for which the abnormality notification is executed is performed, the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred. It may be a method of specifying that the state has been resolved, and when the latter condition is satisfied after the former condition is satisfied among these two conditions, the event that is the target of execution of the abnormality notification has occurred. It may be a method of identifying that has been resolved.

Next, the setting process for notification executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. The notification setting process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S604 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: NO), on condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2002: YES), step S2003. Proceed to. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is 8 or more.

When the number of notification type data is less than 8 (step S2003: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data is to be set as the setting target of the drawing list this time. The setting process is executed (step S2004). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the production CPU 82 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the production LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to obtain the current situation. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of all the events to be notified that has occurred is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation according to the order in which the events occur, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

When the number of notification type data is 8 or more (step S2003: YES), 7 notification type data are extracted as notification targets in order from the side having the highest priority already described (step S2005). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data drawn by lottery is the setting target of the drawing list this time (step S2006). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data extracted in step S2005 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to perform the step. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the seven notification target events extracted in S2005 is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 at the time of non-operation according to the order in which the events occur, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

When it is the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: YES), on condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2007: YES), step S2008. Proceed to. In step S2008, a setting for setting the common broadcast image data for displaying the common broadcast image 175 on either the first sub display device 43 or the second sub display device 44 to be the setting target of the drawing list this time. Execute the process. In this case, as described above, the drawing list information is set so that the types and positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 to be displayed on the common broadcast image 175 differ depending on the positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

After that, when the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is less than 4 (step S2009: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all the notification type data is obtained this time. The setting process for setting the drawing list is executed (step S2010). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the production CPU 82 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the production LSI 85 this time.

Upon receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the common broadcast image data and the individual broadcast image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86. Then, using the pre-transferred common broadcast image data, the common broadcast image 175 is displayed at a position corresponding to the current displacement state in the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. To do. In addition, using the pre-transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of all the notification target events currently occurring is in the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 when operating. To be displayed in. In this case, even if the types of the abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed decrease or increase, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176, which is to be continuously displayed from the timing before that, is changed. Not done.

When the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is 4 or more (step S2009: YES), 3 notification type data are to be notified in order from the side having the highest priority as described above. (Step S2011). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three lottery notification type data is the setting target of the drawing list this time (step S2012). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data extracted in step S2011 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effect LSI 85 this time.

Upon receiving the drawing list, the effect LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the common broadcast image data and the individual broadcast image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86. Then, using the pre-transferred common broadcast image data, the common broadcast image 175 is displayed at a position corresponding to the current displacement state in the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. To do. Further, using the pre-transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the three notification target events extracted in step S2011 is in the first to third display ranges during operation. It is set to be displayed in 172 to 174. In this case, even if the types of the abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed decrease or increase, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176, which is to be continuously displayed from the timing before that, is changed. Not done.

<Effect of configuration for displaying abnormality notification image 176>
Even in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at predetermined facing positions (positions other than the initial position) where the range facing the display surface of the main display device 41 is widened, when the event to be notified occurs. The abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41. As a result, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not arranged at the predetermined opposite positions due to some failure, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41, and the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed by the player or the player. It is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize it.

On the display surface of the main display device 41, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in an area that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 over the entire execution period of the displacement effect. As a result, the visibility of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 is ensured without controlling the display position of the abnormality notification image 176 according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the area for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 is limited on the display surface of the main display device 41 during the execution period of the displacement effect, the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed during the execution period of the displacement effect is a predetermined number. Limited to. As a result, the size of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 can be secured to some extent.

A priority for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 is set for a plurality of types of notification target events, and when a number of notification target events exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined number occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, the priority is high. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event on the side is preferentially displayed. As a result, even if the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed on the main display device 41 is limited to a predetermined number during the execution period of the displacement effect, it corresponds to the notification target event on the higher priority side. It is possible to display the abnormality notification image 176.

When an event to be notified occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, the common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to emphasize that the event to be notified has occurred.

The common notification image 175 is a common image that does not correspond to the type of the notification target event. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the common broadcast image 175 on the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

Even if the event to be notified occurs a plurality of times, only one common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide area in which images other than the common broadcast image 175 are displayed in the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

<Configuration for displaying images using special moving image data 185>
Next, a configuration for displaying an image using the special moving image data 185 will be described.

As already explained as image data, moving image data exists. As the moving image data, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57, the memory module 83 includes a normal moving image data group 181 including a plurality of types of normal moving image data 184 and a special moving image data 185 containing a plurality of types of special moving image data 185. The moving image data group 182 and the attached image data group 183 including a plurality of types of attached image data are stored in advance.

FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the normal moving image data 184. In the normal moving image data 184, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and the I picture data or P picture data after one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 184, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The m-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1 frame, ..., The n-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184, the decoded image data 184a to 184d (hereinafter, referred to as the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d) for a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 184 are registered in the register 93. It will be created in the development area 119 (see FIG. 16) for moving images in. The normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are different from each other.

FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 185. In the special moving image data 185, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, a plurality of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data are set, but compressed data other than these I-picture data is not set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, the decoded image data 185a to 185d (hereinafter, referred to as special decoded image data 185a to 185d) for a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 185 are registered in the register 93. It will be created in the development area 119 (see FIG. 16) for moving images in. The specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are image data in which the contents of at least a part of the images displayed by the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are different from each other.

The amount of the special moving image data 185 is set so that the decoded image data for the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, for the decoded image data for the minimum number of units, 48 I-picture data are set in the special moving image data 185, and 48 special decoded image data 185a to 185d are set by the special moving image data 185. Can be played. Some of the normal moving image data 184 have the data amount set so that the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced, and some of them are moving images. In some cases, the amount of data is set so that a larger number of normal decoded image data 184a to 184d than the minimum number of units that can be set as image data can be created.

The specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are used as texture data. Predetermined object data for applying the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d as texture data is stored in the memory module 83 in advance. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d are all applicable to the same predetermined object data, and the special decoded image data to be applied to the predetermined object data according to the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. The types of 185a to 185d are sequentially changed. That is, the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d continuously change the display contents of the individual images corresponding to the predetermined object data over the plurality of update timings by sequentially changing the texture data applied to the predetermined object data. It is used as serial number texture data to change. For example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a character image representing an object other than a person, a cat, a fish, a dog, or an animal, the types of special decoded image data 185a to 185d applied to the predetermined object data are selected. By sequentially changing the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d in the order of serial numbers, the pattern and color of the character image are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings. Further, for example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is the background image, the types of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d applied to the predetermined object data are in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. By sequentially changing according to, the pattern of the background image, the color of the background image, the type of the individual image included in the background image, the display position of the individual image included in the background image, etc. are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings. Will change to.

Since the special moving image data 185 is set as described above, the serial number texture data can be stored in the memory module 83 as one moving image data. The moving image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 as described above, but the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process by the moving image decoder 95 is stored in the developing area 119 for moving images in the register 93. Written. The decoded image data will be stored and held in the development area 119 for moving images until all the usage is completed. By preparing the serial number texture data as the special moving image data 185 in such a configuration, the special moving image data 185 is temporarily stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when the serial number texture data is used. However, the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d that function as serial number texture data are stored and held in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93 instead of the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it becomes possible to use the development area 119 for moving images as a reading area for the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d that uses the development area 119 as a serial number texture.

Further, the compressed data included in the special moving image data 185 are all I picture data, and do not include P picture data and B picture data. That is, the same number of I-picture data as the number of specially-decoded image data 185a to 185d after decoding is set, and one specially-decoded image data 185a to 185d is created from one I-picture data. .. As a result, even if the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 is used as the texture data, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is displayed. It is possible to prevent the image quality of the image from being deteriorated as compared with the case of using normal texture data.

The attached image data stored in the attached image data group 183 is a plurality of normal moving image data 184 included in the normal moving image data group 181 and a plurality of special moving image data 185 included in the special moving image data group 182, respectively. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the two. The attached image data displays the images corresponding to the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d by the moving image data 184 and 185 during the period when the decoding process is executed for the corresponding moving image data 184 and 185. Still image data used for this purpose. Specifically, the attached image data is set so that the content of the image has continuity with respect to the decoded image data in the first use order in the corresponding plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. .. For example, the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data 185 is texture data applied to the predetermined object data corresponding to the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created from the special moving image data 185.

A state in which the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed by using the period during which the image using the attached image data is displayed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) shows the period during which the image is displayed using the attached image data, FIG. 59 (b) shows the decoding period of the moving image data 184 and 185, and FIG. 59 (c) shows the decoded image data 184a. The period during which the image is displayed using ~ 184d and 185a to 185d is shown.

At the timing of t1, the decoding process of one moving image data 184 and 185 is started as shown in FIG. 59 (b), so that one moving image is started as shown in FIG. 59 (a). The image display period using the attached image data corresponding to the data 184 and 185 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the decoding process of the one moving image data 184, 185 is completed at the timing of t2, which is an intermediate timing in the image display period using the attached image data. As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the one moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the development area 119 for the moving image in the register 93. After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the image using the attached image data is completed as shown in FIG. 59 (a), and the decoded image data 184a to created by the above decoding process as shown in FIG. 59 (c). The image display period using 184d, 185a to 185d is started. This display period ends at the timing of t4 when the display of the images using the decoded image data in the last order in the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by the decoding process ends.

As described above, the attached image data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184 and 185, and the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is performed by using the display period of the image using the attached image data. Is executed. As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in the situation where the corresponding image is displayed with respect to the image displayed by using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for displaying the image while ensuring the continuity of the image display.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for displaying an image using the moving image data 184 and 185 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a usage setting process of moving image data executed by the effect CPU 82. The use setting process of the moving image data is executed in the background calculation process in step S603 or the effect calculation process in step S604 in the task process (FIG. 15).

When it is not the usage period of the moving image data 184 and 185 (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the decoding process of one moving image data 184 and 185 (step S2102). When it is the timing to start the decoding process (step S2102: YES), one moving image data 184 and 185 to be the target of the decoding process this time is grasped (step S2103), and the moving image data 184 and 185 are displayed. Grasp the corresponding attached image data (step S2104). Then, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding process should be executed is set in the drawing list this time (step S2105).

By executing the processes of steps S2103 to S2105, one moving image data 184 and 185 and corresponding attached image data are set in the drawing list this time as the image data to be used. When the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list, the moving image data 184 and 185 are pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 and the pre-transferred moving image data 184 is as described above. , 185 is decoded by the moving image decoder 95. However, in the drawing process corresponding to the drawing list this time, the moving image data 184 and 185 and the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are not the targets of the drawing process. Instead, the attached image data is the target of the drawing process.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, or when the process of step S2105 is executed, various image data other than the moving image data 184 and 185 and the attached image data are grasped as setting targets in the drawing list this time (step S2106). ). Then, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the drawing list this time is updated and grasped as a setting target in the drawing list (step S2107).

Here, when the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85 makes an affirmative determination in step S1013 in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29). Decoding instructions for the moving image data 184 and 185 are given to the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 (step S1014). In order to make this decoding instruction possible, the moving image decoder 95 can specify the area in which the moving image data 184 and 185, which is the target of the decoding instruction this time, is stored in the data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. And the area for storing the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by the decoding process for the moving image data 184 and 185 in the expansion area 119 for the moving image in the register 93 can be specified by the moving image decoder 95. The information for this is provided to the moving image decoder 95.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a decoding process executed by the moving image decoder 95. In the decoding process, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the address of the area in which the moving image data 184 and 185, which is the target of the decoding instruction this time, is stored in the data storage area 123 is grasped ( Step S2201). Further, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by the decoding process for the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the development area 119 for moving images in the register 93. The address of the area to be to be made is grasped (step S2202). After that, the moving image data 184 and 185 are read from the data storage area 123 corresponding to the address grasped in step S2201, and the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded. Then, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d of the decoding result are written in each area of the address grasped in step S2202 (step S2203). As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are expanded in the expansion region 119 for moving images in the register 93. In this case, in the created decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the first ordered decoded image data is stored in the area of the start address in the development area 119 for moving images. Then, the decoded image data that follows is sequentially stored in an area that is continuous with respect to the area of the start address.

Returning to the description of the moving image data usage setting process (FIG. 60), when the moving image data is in the usage period of 184 and 185 (step S2101: YES), the decoding corresponding to the value of the frame counter provided in the work memory 84 The image data is grasped as a setting target for the drawing list this time (step S2108). The frame counter uses the decoded image data of the plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on one moving image data 184 and 185 as the target of this use. It is a counter for the effect CPU 82 to specify whether or not to perform, and "0" is cleared at the timing of starting the display of the image using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, and then one decoded image. Every time the data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are set in the drawing list as the target of use, 1 is added. When the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d corresponding to the value of the frame counter are set as the objects to be used in the drawing list, the area corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 of the effect LSI85. Address is set as address information. As a result, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the effect LSI 85 can specify the area in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d to be used are stored, and the specified area can be specified. The decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are read from and drawn.

After that, various image data other than the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are grasped as setting targets in the drawing list this time (step S2109). In addition, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the drawing list this time is updated and grasped as a setting target in the drawing list (step S2110). Then, the usage instruction information of the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d indicating that the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d should be used is set in the drawing list this time (step S2111).

As described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data set in the drawing list received from the effect CPU 82 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but the decoded image data 184a to 184d are used for the drawing list. , 185a to 185d are set, and the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are already stored in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93 at that time, and thus go to the advance transfer area 86a. Do not pre-forward. Specifically, in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), in step S1003, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, and the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data. If it is determined that the data is 184a to 184d or 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the process for performing the advance transfer shown in steps S1004 to S1012 is not executed.

Further, as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 rewrites the address information set in the drawing list received from the effect CPU 82 for the image data that has been pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a (FIG. 30). However, as described above, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are not subject to the pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a. Therefore, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are subjected to the address information rewriting process. (Fig. 30) is not executed. Specifically, in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), in step S1003, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, and the data to be transferred this time is the decoded image data. If it is determined that the values are 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the address information rewriting process shown in step S1015 is not executed. As described above, for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, in the drawing list transmitted from the production CPU 82, the address of the area stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 is used as the address information. It is set.

<Effect of configuration for displaying images using special moving image data 185>
Since the special moving image data 185 including the I picture data is provided without including the B picture data and the P picture data which are the difference data, the special moving image data 185 is created by executing the decoding process. The specially decoded image data 185a to 185d can have higher image quality than the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d created by executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using the area for reading the normal still image data.

The special moving image data 185 includes a plurality of I picture data. As a result, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data.

The plurality of specially decoded image data 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 are used according to the order of use defined in the special moving image data 185. As a result, when a plurality of specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are used, it is not necessary to set the order of use separately from the special moving image data 185. Therefore, the processing load for setting the usage order of the image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are stored in the memory module 83 as normal still image data in advance.

During the period when the drawing process is being executed by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the special moving image data 185 is decoded by the moving image decoder 95 provided separately from the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. Will be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming the image display waiting period while not increasing the processing load of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

Attached image data is provided with a one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184 and 185, and the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed by using the display period of the image using the attached image data. To. As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in the situation where the corresponding image is displayed with respect to the image displayed by using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for displaying the image while ensuring the continuity of the image display.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the sub display devices 43 and 44 do not display the 3D image and only the 2D image is displayed. However, in the present embodiment, the sub display device is the same as the main display device 41. Both 2D images and 3D images can be displayed at 43 and 44. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing area 191 for sub-display in the present embodiment. Similar to the sub-display drawing area 116 in the first embodiment, the sub-display drawing area 191 is provided with a sub-use first frame area 117 and a sub-use second frame area 118. Further, in the drawing area 191 for sub-display, in addition to these frame areas 117 and 118, drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the first sub-display device 43 is created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. And the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub where the drawing data for displaying the 3D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and the drawing data for displaying the 2D image on the second sub display device 44. A 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to be created and a 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub for creating drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the second sub display device 44 are provided. ..

In each of the sub 1st frame area 117 and the sub 2nd frame area 118, the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the 1st sub and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the 1st sub are used. By synthesizing the data, drawing data for one frame to be displayed on the first sub display device 43 is created, and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub and the drawing data for the second sub are created. By synthesizing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 of the above, drawing data for one frame to be displayed on the second sub-display device 44 is created. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 is distributed and set in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118, and the frame areas 117 and 118 are set. The drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is distributed and set on the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for creating drawing data in the frame areas 117 and 118 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a drawing data synthesis process for sub-display executed by the 3D control unit 97. The drawing data composition process for sub-display is executed as a part of the drawing data composition process in step S814 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

When creating drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 (step S2301: YES), first, the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area (step S2302). After that, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2303). When the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2303, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing count counter is extracted (step S2304). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are specified. The data of the vertical line extracted in step S2304 is drawn with respect to the vertical line (step S2305).

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2306). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2307). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2304 and S2305 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S2304 and S2305, drawing of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub into the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area (step S2308). Then, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2309). When the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2309, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing count counter is extracted (step S2310). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are specified. The data of the vertical line extracted in step S2310 is drawn with respect to the vertical line (step S2311).

Here, a part of the drawing data already created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2311, either the color information overwriting process, the color information blending process, or the color information non-setting is performed according to the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2310. To execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to opacity, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is overwritten as it is on the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. When the α data corresponds to translucency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 and the data set in the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the α data values. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. It will be possible.

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2313). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2310 and S2311 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S2310 and S2311, drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub into the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

On the other hand, when creating drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 (step S2301: NO), first, the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area (step S2314). After that, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2315). When the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2315, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing count counter is extracted (step S2316). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The data of the vertical line extracted in step S2316 is drawn with respect to the vertical line (step S2317).

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2318). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2319). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2316 and S2317 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S2316 and S2317, drawing of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub into the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area (step S2320). Then, the setting process for the drawing count counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2321). When the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction. In step S2321, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set in the drawing count counter.

After that, in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub, the vertical line data corresponding to the value of the current drawing count counter is extracted (step S2322). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 The data of the vertical line extracted in step S2322 is drawn with respect to the vertical line (step S2323).

Here, a part of the drawing data already created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2323, either the color information overwriting process, the color information blending process, or the color information non-setting is performed according to the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2322. To execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to opacity, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is overwritten as it is on the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. When the α data corresponds to translucency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 and the data set in the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the α data values. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. It will be possible.

After that, the value of the drawing count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2324). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2325). If the value of the drawing count counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2322 and S2323 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing count counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S2322 and S2323, drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub into the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, drawing for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can display the 2D image and the 3D image at the same time. Both the data and the drawing data for displaying the image on the second sub-display device 44 can be simultaneously created in one frame area 117 and 118.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the address information rewriting process (FIG. 30 in the first embodiment) in the advance transfer control unit 94 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the address information rewriting process in the present embodiment. First, the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set as a new index area (step S2401). In this embodiment, the pre-transfer area 86a having the data storage area 123 is not set in the VRAM 86. Therefore, the image data to be transferred is not transferred to the data storage area 123, but is the image data set in the drawing list this time or earlier and is not yet the execution target of the drawing process. The data is transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored.

After that, the rewriting process of the index table provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2402). The index table is a table in which the correspondence between the index information for specifying the index area and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set. In the index table, the correspondence between the index information and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 is set for the number of image data pre-transferred to the VRAM 86. In the index table rewriting process, the index information for specifying the index area newly set in step S2401 and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred are associated with each other. Write to the index table in the state of.

After that, the index information for specifying the newly set index area is overwritten with the address information corresponding to the image data to be transferred this time in the drawing list (step S2403). When drawing the image data, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the index information corresponding to the image data from the address information of the drawing list, and provide the read index information to the transfer controller 92. The transfer controller 92 grasps the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the provided index information from the index table, and provides the image data read from the area of the VRAM 86 to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the relationship between the type of the index area and the area of the VRAM 86 is changed as necessary, so that the aggregation designation of the area of the VRAM 86 using the index area can be flexibly used. Is possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing relists are provided as a drawing list for displaying an image at one update timing from the effect CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit of the effect LSI 85. At 94, the drawing lists are integrated. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a drawing list output process in the present embodiment executed by the effect CPU 82.

First, the image data aggregation process for 2D is executed (step S2501). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in this process is specified. After that, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is equal to or greater than the reference number (for example, 10) (step S2502). When the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is less than the reference number (step S2502: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S2503). All of the 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is set in the one 2D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the drawing list for 2D (step S2504). The 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), and specifies in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data that have been created.

On the other hand, when the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S2502: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S2505). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is distributed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 first sets the integrated instruction information in the 2D drawing list to be executed by the drawing process (step S2506). Specifically, the integrated instruction information is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the drawing list for 2D. The integration instruction information instructs the advance transfer control unit 94 to integrate two consecutive drawing lists targeted for the advance transfer process into one drawing list in the advance transfer control unit 94 of the effect LSI 85. Information for. After that, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the creation completion data in the 2D drawing list to be executed later in the drawing process (step S2507). Specifically, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the drawing list for 2D.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2504 or step S2507 is executed, the image data aggregation process for 3D is executed (step S2508). In the aggregation process, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in this process is specified. After that, it is determined whether or not the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than the reference number (for example, 10) (step S2509). When the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is less than the reference number (step S2509: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S2510). All of the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is set in the one 3D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list (step S2511). The 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), and specifies in one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process is completed for all the image data that have been created.

On the other hand, when the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S2509: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S2512). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is distributed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 first sets the integrated instruction information in the 3D drawing list to be executed by the drawing process (step S2513). Specifically, the integrated instruction information is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. After that, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data in the 3D drawing list to be executed later in the drawing process (step S2514). Specifically, the creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2511 or step S2514 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2515). In other processes, the processes of steps S919 to S921 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed. In addition, the process of steps S901 to S906 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment may be executed before step S2501.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a pre-transfer process in the present embodiment executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94.

First, other processing is executed (step S2601). In other processes, the processes of steps S1001 to S1015 of the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed. After that, on the condition that the pre-transfer for one drawing list is completed in the current processing time (step S2602: YES), it is determined whether or not the integration instruction information is set in the current drawing list. (Step S2603). When the integration instruction information is set (step S2603: YES), the drawing list set in the following order with respect to the drawing list for which the pre-transfer has been completed this time in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in the register 93 is preliminarily used. It is read out as an execution target of the transfer process (step S2604). After that, "1" is set in the integration flag provided in the register 93 (step S2605).

On the other hand, when the integration instruction information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S2603: NO), the integration process is performed on condition that "1" is set in the integration flag of the register 93 (step S2606: YES). Is executed (step S2607). In the integration process, the drawing list in which the integration instruction information is set and the drawing list for which the pre-transfer has been completed this time are integrated as one drawing list. In this case, the image data set in each drawing list is aggregated into one drawing list while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. After that, the integration flag of the register 93 is cleared to "0" (step S2608).

When a negative determination is made in step S2606, or when the process of step S2608 is executed, the pre-transfer completion process is executed (step S2609). In the pre-transfer completion process, if the drawing list for which the pre-transfer has been completed this time is not the target of the integration process (step S2607), the drawing list is stored in the storage area 122 for post-transfer in the register 93 this time. It is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the drawing list for which the pre-transfer has been completed this time is the target of the integration process (step S2607), one drawing list after the integration process is stored this time in the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. It is stored in the target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, the effect is produced. In the advance transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are integrated into one drawing list. As a result, when the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 executes the drawing process according to the drawing list, it is not necessary to refer to a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists.

Further, the above-mentioned integration of drawing lists is executed when the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the pre-transfer processing of image data for a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, the opportunity for pre-transferring the image data can also be used as an opportunity for integrating a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists.

The number of drawing lists to be executed by the integration process is not limited to two, and three or more 2D drawing lists or three or more 3D drawing lists are used to display an image for one frame. If the list is supplied from the effect CPU 82, the number may be three. Further, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 in order to display the image for one frame may be configured to be the execution target of the integrated processing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the display effect executed by the main display device 41 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of this difference will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Display effect corresponding to the display mode>
First, the contents of the display effect corresponding to the display mode will be described. The display mode is a mode for determining the display content of the main display device 41 in the normal display situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is not executed and the effect for the game round is waiting to be executed and the effect for the game round is being executed. In this embodiment, two types, a first display mode and a second display mode, are set. In the normal display situation, the background images 201 and 205 are displayed on the main display device 41, the character images 202 and 206 are displayed in front of the background images 201 and 205, and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed in front of the background images 201 and 205. The types of the background images 201 and 205, the character images 202 and 206, and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned various images, for example, the type of reach effect may be different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the display effect in the open / close execution mode may be used. The type may be different between the first display mode and the second display mode.

Hereinafter, the display contents in the first display mode will be described. 67 (a) and 67 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the display contents of the main display device 41 in the first display mode, which is a kind of display mode in which a plurality of present modes exist.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), in the first display mode, in the main display device 41, the first background image 201 in which a plurality of buildings are displayed so as to be arranged in the depth direction of the main display device 41 is The first character image 202 is displayed in front of the display, and three first decorative symbols 203 are displayed side by side in front of the first character image 202. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first background image 201, the first character image 202, and the three first decorative symbols are waiting for the execution of the effect for the game round in the situation where the open / close execution mode is not executed. All of 203 are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), during the execution of the effect for the game round, the moving image display as if the first character image 202 is moving toward the front side of the main display device 41 is displayed. It is performed in each of 1 background image 201 and 1st character image 202. Further, the three first decorative symbols 203 are rotated and displayed in the vertical direction so that the types of display symbols to be displayed are sequentially changed in each of the three first decorative symbols 203. In this case, at the start of the effect for the game round, the rotation display of the three first decorative symbols 203 is started at the same time, and the first decorative symbol 203 on the left → the first decorative symbol 203 on the right → the first decorative symbol in the center. The rotation display of these first decorative symbols 203 is stopped in the order of 203. In the game in which the reach effect occurs, when the rotation display of the left first decorative symbol 203 and the right first decorative symbol 203 is completed, the left first decorative symbol 203 and the right first decorative symbol 203 In each case, the same type of display symbol is displayed. Further, in the game round that results in a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, when the rotation display of the three first decorative symbols 203 is completed, the first decorative symbol 203 on the left, the first decorative symbol 203 in the center, and The same type of display symbol is displayed in each of the first decorative symbols 203 on the right. Further, in the game round that results in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot, the rotation display of the three first decorative symbols 203 is terminated so that the display symbols of a predetermined combination different from the display symbols of the same type are stopped and displayed. The display area of each first decorative symbol 203 can be regarded as a decorative symbol display area, and in this case, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

The content of the display symbol displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 will be described. 68 (a) to 68 (l) are explanatory views for explaining the display symbol of the first decorative symbol 203. The display symbols displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 are "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", " There are 12 types of "9", "A" and "source". That is, the display symbol displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 includes a number symbol which is a serial number, an alphabet character symbol, and a kanji character symbol. When the rotation display of the first decorative symbol 203 is performed, "0"-> "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> " The display symbols are changed in order according to the predetermined order of "6"-> "7"-> "8"-> "9"-> "A"-> "source", and "0" is displayed again after "source". The sequential change of the display symbols in the above order is repeated. By the way, in the game times that usually result in a jackpot, the same display symbol with any even number is stopped and displayed in each of the three first decorative symbols 203, and in the game times that result in a 15R probability variation jackpot, any one of them. The same display symbol by the odd number, "A" or "source" of is stopped and displayed in each of the three first decorative symbols 203, and in the game times that results in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot, the above predetermined combination is displayed. As the symbols, the display symbols of "3", "4", and "1" from the left are stopped and displayed in each of the first decorative symbols 203.

Next, the display contents in the second display mode will be described. 69 (a) and 69 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the display contents of the main display device 41 in the second display mode, which is a kind of display mode in which a plurality of present modes exist.

As shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), in the second display mode, the second background image 205 on which the seaside scenery is displayed is displayed on the main display device 41, and the second character image 206 is displayed in front of the second background image 205. Is displayed, and three second decorative symbols 207 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction in front of the display. The display content of the second background image 205 is different from that of the first background image 201, the display content of the second character image 206 is different from that of the first character image 202, and the second decorative symbol 207 is the first decorative symbol. The display content is different from that of 203. As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the second background image 205, the second character image 206, and the three second decorative symbols are waiting for the execution of the effect for the game round in the situation where the open / close execution mode is not executed. All of 207 are displayed as stopped.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), during the execution of the effect for the game round, the moving image display as if the second character image 206 is moving toward the front side of the main display device 41 is displayed. This is performed in each of the two background images 205 and the second character image 206. Further, the three second decorative symbols 207 are rotated and displayed in the horizontal direction so that the types of display symbols to be displayed are sequentially changed in each of the three second decorative symbols 207. In this case, at the start of the effect for the game round, the rotation display of the three second decorative symbols 207 is started at the same time, and the second decorative symbol 207 on the left → the second decorative symbol 207 on the right → the second decorative symbol in the center. The rotation display of these second decorative symbols 207 is stopped in the order of 207. In the game in which the reach effect occurs, when the rotation display of the second decorative symbol 207 on the left and the second decorative symbol 207 on the right is completed, the second decorative symbol 207 on the left and the second decorative symbol 207 on the right In each case, the same type of display symbol is displayed. Further, in the game round that results in a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, when the rotation display of the three second decorative symbols 207 is completed, the second decorative symbol 207 on the left, the second decorative symbol 207 in the center, and The same type of display symbol is displayed in each of the second decorative symbols 207 on the right. Further, in the game round that results in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot, the rotation display of the three second decorative symbols 207 is terminated so that the display symbols of a predetermined combination different from the display symbols of the same type are stopped and displayed. The display area of each second decorative symbol 207 can be regarded as a decorative symbol display area, and in this case, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

The content of the display symbol displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 will be described. 70 (a) to 70 (i) are explanatory views for explaining the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207. The display symbols displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 are 9 of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8" and "9". Kind. That is, only the numerical symbols that are serial numbers are set in the display symbols displayed as the second decorative symbol 207. When the second decorative symbol 207 is rotated and displayed, whether it is left, center, or right, "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6"-> " The display symbols are sequentially changed according to a predetermined order of "7"-> "8"-> "9", and after "9", "1" is displayed again and the sequential change of the display symbols in the above order is repeated. By the way, in the game times that usually result in a jackpot, the same display symbol with any even number is stopped and displayed in each of the three second decorative symbols 207, and in the game times that result in a 15R probability variation jackpot, any one of them. In the game times in which the same display symbol with an odd number of the above is stopped and displayed in each of the three second decorative symbols 207, and the result of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained, the display symbol of the above-mentioned predetermined combination is "3" from the left. , "4", "1" are stopped and displayed in each second decorative symbol 207.

The display mode is switched by operating the effect button 57 provided on the lower bulging portion 56 of the front door frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Specifically, when the effect button 57 is operated in a situation where both the effect for game rounds and the open / close execution mode are not executed, if the display mode at that time is the first display mode, the second display mode If the display mode at that time is the second display mode, the display mode is changed to the first display mode. Then, each time the effect button 57 is operated in the situation, the display mode is changed to the display mode to be set in the next order. Even if the effect button 57 is operated in the situation where the effect for game rounds is being executed or the open / close execution mode is being executed, the display mode is not changed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed when the effect button 57 is operated even in a situation where the effect for game rounds is being executed. In this case, for example, the display mode may be switched for the operation of the effect button 57 on the condition that the rotation display is executed in all of the three decorative symbols 203 and 207 in each display mode. Further, the display mode may be changed when the effect button 57 is operated even when the open / close execution mode is being executed. In this case, a situation may occur in which the display mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started and the display mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished are different.

Here, as described above, there are 12 types of display symbols displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 in the first display mode, whereas the display is displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 in the second display mode. There are nine types of symbols. As described above, the types of display symbols displayed as the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in each display mode are different, so that the display mode of each display mode can be significantly different.

Further, as described above, the display symbols displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 are "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", While "8", "9", "A" and "source", the display symbols displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 are "1", "2", "3", "4", They are "5", "6", "7", "8" and "9". Then, the display modes of the display symbols of the types "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8" and "9" are different. Although the identification information recognized by the player is common to each display mode, the display symbols of the types of "0", "A", and "source" exist only in the first display mode. In the two display modes, the display symbol is a type of identification information for which the corresponding display symbol does not exist. As a result, it is possible to display a display target of a type of identification information that is not displayed in the second display mode in the first display mode, while reducing the types of display symbols in the second display mode. From this point as well, it is possible to significantly change the display mode of each display mode.

However, in the case of the configuration in which the display symbol of the type of identification information not included in the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207 is included in the first decorative symbol 203 as described above, the mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. There is a problem with the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207 to be displayed when the switching of the above occurs. That is, if the types of identification information of the display symbols of the first decorative symbol 203 and the second decorative symbol 207 completely correspond to each other, the display mode before the switching is performed when the display mode is switched. By displaying the display symbol having the same type of identification information as the display symbol displayed in the above in the display mode after the switching, the type of the identification information of the display symbol before and after the switching does not deviate. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the display symbol of the identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as the non-common symbol) that does not exist in the second display mode exists in the first display mode as described above, the non-common symbol is displayed. If the switching from the first display mode to the second display mode occurs in the above situation, the symbol corresponding to the non-common symbol does not exist after the switching to the second display mode. In this case, if the display symbol after switching to the second display mode is randomly selected or is selected by a rule that is difficult for the player to understand, not only is it visually unfavorable, but the player is confused. There is a risk of doing so.

Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the display mode is switched, the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed regardless of the type of the display symbol displayed before the display mode is switched. The Rukoto. The combination of display symbols corresponding to the switching is different from the combination of display symbols that are stopped and displayed when any of the jackpot results is obtained, and is also different from the combination of reach symbols. Further, each display symbol constituting the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching time is a display symbol of identification information that exists in common in the first display mode and the second display mode.

FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the combination of display symbols corresponding to the switching when the first display mode is switched to the second display mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the situation where the display symbols of "5", "A", and "source" are stopped and displayed from the left in the first display mode, the effect button 57 is manually operated to the second. When the display mode is switched, the combination of the display symbols is changed to the combination of the display symbols of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as shown in FIG. 71 (b). This combination of display symbols is a combination of display symbols corresponding to switching. In this case, even if the display symbol of the identification information of "5" exists as the display symbol displayed in the first display mode before switching, the identification of "5" is performed after switching to the second display mode. The information display symbol is not displayed, and the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching as described above is displayed. The combination of display symbols corresponding to this switching is always constant. That is, for example, even if all the display symbols displayed in the first display mode before switching are symbols that also exist in the second display mode, after switching to the second display mode, the above switching correspondence is supported. The combination of the display symbols of is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the combination of display symbols corresponding to the switching is the combination displayed when the display mode is switched.

72 (a) and 72 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching when the second display mode is switched to the first display mode. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the second display mode, when the display symbols of "9", "1", and "6" are stopped and displayed from the left, the effect button 57 is manually operated to perform the first display. When the display mode is switched, the combination of the display symbols is changed to the combination of the display symbols of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as shown in FIG. 72 (b). That is, the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching when switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is the same as the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching when switching from the first display mode to the second display mode. Is. From this point as well, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is the combination displayed when the display mode is switched.

Next, the display content that allows the player or the manager of the game hall to recognize the type of the display symbol in the effect for the game round that occurred last immediately after the switch of the display mode and before the switch of the display mode will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 69, a common display unit 211 is set at the central portion of the right end of the display surface of the main display device 41. The position where the common display unit 211 is displayed is the same in both the first display mode and the second display mode. The common display unit 211 has the same number of unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c as the number of decorative symbols 203, 207 that are simultaneously displayed in each display mode. The unit display units 211a, 211b, and 211c are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper unit display unit 211a corresponds to the left decorative symbols 203 and 207, the middle unit display unit 211b corresponds to the central decorative symbol 203 and 207, and the lower unit display unit 211c corresponds to the right. Corresponds to the decorative patterns 203 and 207 of. By arranging the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c and the decorative symbols 203, 207 so as to have a certain correspondence relationship as described above, the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c and the decorative symbols 203, 207 correspond to each other. It is possible to clarify the relationship.

On the other hand, the arrangement direction of the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c and the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols 203, 207 are different. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the player from becoming too conscious that each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211 corresponds to the decorative symbols 203, 207, and the decorative symbols become too high. It is possible to draw the player's attention to 203 and 207. Further, the display area of the common display unit 211 is set narrower than the display area of the three decorative symbols 203, 207, and more specifically, the display area of the common display unit 211 is set to be narrower than the display area of the three decorative symbols 203, 207. It is set narrower than the display area. From this point as well, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too conscious of the common display unit 211, and as a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols 203 and 207. Furthermore, while the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are basically displayed over the entire horizontal direction of the main display device 41, the common display unit 211 is displayed on the edge portion of the main display device 41. From this point as well, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too conscious of the common display unit 211, and as a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

Next, the contents of the common display symbol that is variablely displayed in each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211 will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the common display symbol.

The common display symbols displayed on the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c are "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", There are 12 types of "8", "9", "A" and "source". As shown in FIG. 73, these common display symbols have a one-to-one correspondence with the display symbols in the first decorative symbol 203 in the first display mode. On the other hand, since there are nine types of display symbols in the second decorative symbol 207 in the second display mode, "1" to "9", the common display is such that there is a one-to-one correspondence with the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207. Although the symbol exists, the common display symbol also includes a symbol that does not correspond to the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207.

In each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211, when the rotation display of the display symbol is started in the decorative symbols 203, 207, the variable display of the common display symbol is started at the same time, and the display is displayed in the decorative symbols 203, 207. When the rotation display of the symbol is stopped, the variable display of the common display symbol is stopped at the same time. That is, while the rotation display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is stopped in the order of left → right → center, the three variable displays of the common display symbols in the unit display units 211a, 211b and 211c are stopped at the same time. .. The timing at which the three variable displays of the common display symbol are stopped at the same time is the timing after the timing at which the rotation display of the display symbols in the central decorative symbols 203 and 207 is stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the stop result from being displayed on the common display unit 211 before the stop result is displayed on the decorative symbols 203 and 207, and the player's attention to the decorative symbols 203 and 207. Can be increased.

The variable display of the common display symbol in each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211 is performed in a common mode in either the first display mode or the second display mode. Specifically, regarding the common mode, "0"-> "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6"-> "7"-> "8"-> "9"-> The common display symbols are sequentially changed according to a predetermined order of "□" → "Δ", and "0" is displayed again after "Δ", and the sequential change of the common display symbols in the above order is repeated.

As described above, the display symbol of the first decorative symbol 203 and the common display symbol have a one-to-one correspondence. Then, when the effect for the game round is completed in the first display mode, the unit display unit 211a in the upper row of the common display unit 211 is one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 203 on the left. The corresponding common display symbol is stopped and displayed, and the unit display unit 211b in the middle row of the common display unit 211 stops the common display symbol that corresponds one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 203 in the center. On the lower unit display unit 211c of the common display unit 211, the common display symbol that corresponds one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 203 on the right is stopped and displayed. For example, in FIG. 67 (a), "1", "2", and "3" are stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 from the left, whereas the upper unit display unit 211a in the common display unit 211 is displayed. "1" is stopped and displayed, "2" is stopped and displayed on the unit display unit 211b in the middle row, and "3" is stopped and displayed on the unit display unit 211c in the lower row. In this case, in the first display mode, all types of common display symbols are subject to stop display on the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c.

On the other hand, as described above, although the common display symbol exists so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207, some symbols do not correspond to the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207 in the common display symbol. included. Then, when the effect for the game round is completed in the second display mode, the unit display unit 211a in the upper row of the common display unit 211 is one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol 207 on the left. The corresponding common display symbol is stopped and displayed, and the unit display unit 211b in the middle row of the common display unit 211 stops the common display symbol that corresponds one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol 207 in the center. On the lower unit display unit 211c of the common display unit 211, the common display symbol that corresponds one-to-one with the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol 207 on the right is stopped and displayed. For example, in FIG. 69A, “1”, “2”, and “3” are stopped and displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 from the left, whereas the upper unit display unit 211a in the common display unit 211 is displayed. "1" is stopped and displayed, "2" is stopped and displayed on the unit display unit 211b in the middle row, and "3" is stopped and displayed on the unit display unit 211c in the lower row. In this case, in the second display mode, among the common display symbols, the symbols that do not correspond to the display symbols of the second decorative symbol 207 are not subject to stop display on the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c. That is, in the second display mode, all types of common display symbols are subject to variable display in each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c, but do not correspond to the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207 among the common display symbols. The symbol is not a stop display target on the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table referred to by the effect CPU 82 for display control of the upper unit display unit 211a and the left second decorative symbol 207 in the second display mode.

In the data table, pointer information is set as serial number information, data that determines the content of the common display symbol corresponding to each pointer information, and display displayed as the second decorative symbol 207. A combination with data that determines the content of the symbol is set. Then, each time the image is updated in the main display device 41, each data corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to at that time is referred to, and the display control of the common display symbol and the second decorative symbol 207 is executed. To. In this case, in the second decorative symbol 207, high-speed display is performed so that the player cannot easily or cannot recognize the type of the display symbol to be displayed at first, and then the display to be displayed. The constant speed display is performed at a speed at which the player can easily recognize the type of the symbol, and finally the display symbol of "5" is stopped and displayed, and the state is continued for a predetermined period. It should be noted that such a display mode is the same for the other second decorative symbol 207, and is also the same for the first decorative symbol 203.

On the other hand, in the common display symbol, constant speed display is performed at a speed at which the player can easily recognize the type of the symbol to be displayed from the beginning. In this case, the common display symbol to be displayed includes a common display symbol that does not correspond to the display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207. After that, the common display symbol of "5" which has a one-to-one correspondence with the display symbol of "5" which is finally stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol 207 and has the same identification information is stopped and displayed, and the state is described above. It will be continued for a predetermined period. The timing at which the stop display of the symbol "5" is started in the common display symbol is the timing when the pointer information is "p", and this timing is the timing at which the stop display of the display symbol "5" is started in the second decorative symbol 207. It is the same as the timing. Further, in the common display symbol, the period during which the stop display of the symbol “5” is reliably held is the period from the timing when the pointer information is “p” to the timing when the pointer information is “q”, and this period is the second decorative symbol 207. Is the same as the period during which the stop display of the display symbol of "5" is reliably held. By performing variable display of the common display symbol in the second display mode as described above, the number of display symbols in the situation where the common display symbol is variablely displayed is made common with that in the first display mode, and the first is It is possible to make the stop result of the common display symbol in the two display modes correspond to the stop result of the second decorative symbol 207.

The display of the common display unit 211 is maintained regardless of whether the first display mode is changed to the second display mode or the second display mode is changed to the first display mode. A state in which the display of the common display unit 211 is maintained when the display mode is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 again.

First, a case where the first display mode can be switched to the second display mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b). As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the first display mode, "5", "A", and "source" are stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol 203 from the left, and "5" from the top is displayed on the common display unit 211. , "□", "Δ" are stopped and displayed, and the effect button 57 is operated to enter the second display mode as shown in FIG. 71 (b). In this case, as described above, the second decorative symbol 207 is a combination of display symbols corresponding to switching of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. On the other hand, in the common display unit 211, the state in which "5", "□", and "Δ" are stopped and displayed from the top is maintained. As a result, even when the first display mode is switched to the second display mode, the stop result of the first decorative symbol 203 in the last game rotation effect executed in the first display mode before the switching is obtained. It is possible to grasp which stop result was obtained only by visually observing the common display unit 211. The display content of the common display unit 211 is maintained even when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode again.

Further, when switching from the first display mode to the second display mode, the common display unit 211 is displayed from the state in which the first background image 201, the first character image 202, the first decorative symbol 203, and the common display unit 211 are displayed. After the entire display area excluding the display area of is once displayed in black, the second background image 205, the second character image 206, the second decorative symbol 207, and the common display unit 211 are displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the common display unit 211 from being hidden when switching the display mode, and the common display unit 211 is an image that continues to be displayed regardless of the type of display mode. Can be clearly grasped by the player or the manager of the game hall.

Next, a case where the second display mode can be switched to the first display mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b). As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the second display mode, "9", "1", and "6" are stopped and displayed as the second decorative symbol 207 from the left, and "9" is displayed on the common display unit 211 from the top. , "1", and "6" are stopped and displayed, and the effect button 57 is operated to enter the first display mode as shown in FIG. 72 (b). In this case, as described above, the first decorative symbol 203 is a combination of display symbols corresponding to switching of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. On the other hand, in the common display unit 211, the state in which "9", "1", and "6" are stopped and displayed from the top is maintained. As a result, even when the second display mode is switched to the first display mode, the stop result of the second decorative symbol 207 in the last game rotation effect executed in the second display mode before the switching is obtained. It is possible to grasp which stop result was obtained only by visually observing the common display unit 211. The display content of the common display unit 211 is maintained even when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode again.

Further, when switching from the second display mode to the first display mode, the common display unit 211 is displayed from the state in which the second background image 205, the second character image 206, the second decorative symbol 207, and the common display unit 211 are displayed. After the entire display area excluding the display area of is once displayed in black, the first background image 201, the first character image 202, the first decorative symbol 203, and the common display unit 211 are displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the common display unit 211 from being hidden when switching the display mode, and the common display unit 211 is an image that continues to be displayed regardless of the type of display mode. Can be clearly grasped by the player or the manager of the game hall.

As described above, the display of the common display unit 211 is maintained when the display mode is switched, but the display of the common display unit 211 is maintained even when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are moved, and each sub-display device 43, It is configured so that it will not be hidden when the 44 is displaced. This configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b). FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in front of the main display device 41, and FIG. 75 (b) is a movement of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the range and the display position of the common display part 211.

Similar to the first embodiment, the present embodiment also includes a first sub-display device 43 and a second sub-display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41. These sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to enable slide movement and rotational movement, respectively, as in the first embodiment, and the movement range 212 is the main as shown in FIG. 75 (a). The position where each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged is included in front of the display device 41. In this case, the moving range 212 in front of the main display device 41 of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is a shaded range in FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the moving range 212 does not include the common display unit 211. As a result, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are moved, the phenomenon that the common display unit 211 is hidden by the sub-display devices 43 and 44 does not occur. Therefore, even in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 move in front of the main display device 41, the common display unit 211 can be visually confirmed.

The common display unit 211 maintains the display even when the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are reduced and displayed during the reach effect. The state in which this display is maintained will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76 (a). As shown in FIG. 76A, when a predetermined reach effect occurs, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are reduced and displayed at the corners of the main display device 41, and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed until then. The reach effect image 213 is displayed using the area that has been set. In this case, the common display unit 211 maintains its display. Further, the position where the common display unit 211 is displayed is not changed, and the display size of the common display unit 211 is not changed. As a result, the common display unit 211 can be visually confirmed even when the above-mentioned reach effect is executed. Further, since the display position and the display size of the common display unit 211 are not changed, the visibility of the common display unit 211 can be ensured.

On the other hand, the common display unit 211 is hidden in the open / close execution mode. The state in which the common display unit 211 is in the non-display state in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 77. 77 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 77 (b) shows the period set in the first display mode, and FIG. 77 (c) shows the period set in the second display mode. 77 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode, FIG. 77 (e) shows the display period of the common display unit 211, and FIG. 77 (f) shows the display period of the first decorative symbol 203. FIG. 77 (g) shows the display period of the second decorative symbol 207.

In the situation where the first display mode is set as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the effect for game rotation is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 77 (a). In this case, the first decorative symbol 203 is rotated and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the display of the common display unit 211 is continued, and the common display unit 211 executes variable display of the common display symbol from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2.

After that, by operating the effect button 57 at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5, which are the timings after the effect for the game round is completed, FIGS. 77 (b) and 77 ( As shown in c), the first display mode is switched to the second display mode at the timing of t3, the second display mode is switched to the first display mode at the timing of t4, and the first display mode is switched to the first display mode at the timing of t5. 2 Switch to display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 77 (f) and 77 (g), the display target is switched from the first decorative symbol 203 to the second decorative symbol 207 at the timing of t3 according to the switching of these display modes, and the timing of t4. Then, the display target is switched from the second decorative symbol 207 to the first decorative symbol 203, and the display target is switched from the first decorative symbol 203 to the second decorative symbol 207 at the timing of t5. Further, even when the display modes are switched, the display of the common display unit 211 is continued as shown in FIG. 77 (e).

After that, in the situation where the second display mode is set as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the effect for game rotation is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (a) from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7. To. In this case, the second decorative symbol 207 is rotated and displayed as shown in FIG. 77 (g). Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the display of the common display unit 211 is continued, and the common display unit 211 executes variable display of the common display symbol from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7.

The production for the game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the open / close execution mode is started at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the effect for the game round is finished. FIG. 77 (e) shows the timing before the timing when the first opening of the special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode, more specifically, the timing at t7 which is the timing when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display of the common display unit 211 is temporarily terminated. Further, at the timing of t7, the display of the second decorative symbol 207 is temporarily terminated as shown in FIG. 77 (g).

The explanatory view of FIG. 76B shows how the display of the common display unit 211 and the second decorative symbol 207 is once terminated. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the main display device 41, the common display unit 211 and the second decorative symbol 207 are in a non-display state, and instead, the entire main display device 41 is used to open / close execution mode. Image 214 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image 214 for the open / close execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t8, the open / close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 77 (d). At the timing of t8, the display of the common display unit 211 is restarted as shown in FIG. 77 (e). Further, at the timing of t8, the display of the second decorative symbol 207 is resumed as shown in FIG. 77 (g). In this case, the common display unit 211 resumes the display of the common display symbol that was displayed before the opening / closing execution mode was started. That is, the display of the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result this time is restarted. Similarly, in the second decorative symbol 207, the display of the display symbol that was displayed before the opening / closing execution mode is started is resumed. That is, the display of the stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result this time is restarted.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling the display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211 as described above will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a symbol arithmetic process executed by the effect CPU 82. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S605 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

When the effect for the game round is being executed (step S2701: YES), the common display unit 211 is used by using the data table read from the memory module 83 to the work memory 84 at the start of the effect for the game round. It is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the common display symbol in (step S2702). The same number of data tables as the number of unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211 are read out. Further, in the case of the first display mode, the data table corresponding to the first display mode is read, and in the case of the second display mode, the data table corresponding to the second display mode is read. There is. In addition, these data tables correspond to the variable display time of the game times this time.

When it is the update timing in any of the data tables, an affirmative determination is made in step S2702. When it is the update timing of the common display symbol (step S2702: YES), the data corresponding to the type of the common display symbol of the update destination is set by referring to the data table corresponding to the update timing (step S2703). In addition, data corresponding to various parameters for displaying the common display symbol is set by referring to the above data table (step S2704). These set data are set in the drawing list corresponding to the update of the image this time. As a result, with the various parameters set in step S2704 applied, the common display symbol of the type set in step S2703 is displayed on the common display unit 211.

When a negative determination is made in step S2702, or when the process of step S2704 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the display symbols in the decorative symbols 203 and 207 using the above data table (step S2705). .. When it is the update timing of the display symbol in the decorative symbols 203 and 207 (step S2705: YES), the data corresponding to the type of the display symbol of the update destination is set by referring to the data table corresponding to the update timing (step S2706). ). In addition, data corresponding to various parameters for displaying the display symbol is set by referring to the above data table (step S2707). These set data are set in the drawing list corresponding to the update of the image this time. As a result, with the various parameters set in step S2707 applied, the display symbols of the types set in step S2706 are displayed as decorative symbols 203 and 207.

When a negative determination is made in step S2701, the display mode flag switching process is executed on condition that the effect button 57 is manually operated in a situation other than the open / close execution mode (step S2708: YES) (step S2709). .. In the switching process, the content of the display mode flag provided in the work memory 84 is changed to the content corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The situation where the value of the display mode flag is "0" corresponds to the first display mode, and the situation where the value of the display mode flag is "1" corresponds to the second display mode. When the switching process is executed in the situation where the value is "0", the value of the display mode flag is switched to "1", and the switching process is executed in the situation where the value of the display mode flag is "1". In that case, the value of the display mode flag is switched to "0". The effect CPU 82 grasps the current display mode by referring to the display mode flag, and outputs a drawing list to the effect LSI 85 so that the image corresponding to the grasped display mode is displayed on the main display device 41. ..

After executing the display mode flag switching process, the decorative symbol setting process at the time of change is executed (step S2710). In the setting process, data is set so that the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed as the decorative symbols 203 and 207 after the display mode is switched. This data is set in the drawing list corresponding to this image update. As a result, the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed as the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in the display mode after the switching.

When a negative determination is made in step S2708, or when the process of step S2710 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the open / close execution mode (step S2711). When it is the start timing of the open / close execution mode (step S2711: YES), the common display symbol flag provided in the work memory 84 is cleared to “0” (step S2712). The common display symbol flag is a flag for the effect CPU 82 to specify whether the common display unit 211 is in the display state or the non-display state. When the common display symbol flag is "0", a drawing list for hiding the common display unit 211 is provided to the effect LSI 85, and when the common display symbol flag is "1", the common display is displayed. A drawing list for displaying the unit 211 is provided to the effect LSI 85.

After that, the storage process of the common display symbol is executed (step S2713). In the storage process, data corresponding to the type of the common display symbol displayed on each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c of the common display unit 211 is written to the work memory 84. When resuming the display of the common display unit 211, by referring to the data, the common display displayed on the unit display units 211a, 211b, 211c in the situation immediately before the display of the common display unit 211 is temporarily terminated. The type of the symbol can be grasped by the effect CPU 82.

After that, the decorative symbol flag provided in the work memory 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2714). The decorative symbol flag is a flag for the effect CPU 82 to specify whether to display or hide the decorative symbols 203 and 207. When the decorative symbol flag is "0", a drawing list for hiding the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is provided to the effect LSI85, and when the decorative symbol flag is "1", the decorative symbol 203 is provided. , 207 is provided to the effect LSI 85 for displaying the drawing list.

After that, the memory processing of the decorative symbol is executed (step S2715). In the storage process, data corresponding to the type of display symbol displayed as decorative symbols 203 and 207 is written in the work memory 84. When resuming the display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207, by referring to the data, the type of the display symbol displayed as the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in the situation immediately before the display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is temporarily terminated. Can be grasped by the effect CPU 82.

When a negative determination is made in step S2711, or when the process of step S2715 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the open / close execution mode (step S2716). When it is the end timing of the open / close execution mode (step S2716: YES), "1" is set in the common display symbol flag of the work memory 84 (step S2717). In addition, the common display symbol reading process is executed (step S2718). In the read process, the data corresponding to the type of the common display symbol of each unit display unit 211a, 211b, 211c in the common display unit 211 stored in the work memory 84 in step S2713 is read. Further, "1" is set in the decorative symbol flag of the work memory 84 (step S2719). In addition, the decorative symbol reading process is executed (step S2720). In the read process, the data corresponding to the current display mode flag value and the display symbol types of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 stored in the work memory 84 in step S2715 are read. By executing these processes, the effect LSI 85 is provided with a drawing list for resuming the display of the common display symbol and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 that were displayed immediately before the opening / closing execution mode is started. As a result, the display on the common display unit 211 of the common display symbol of the type displayed before the opening / closing execution mode is started is restarted, and the display mode set before the opening / closing execution mode is started is resumed. The display of the display symbols of the types of decorative symbols 203 and 207 that were displayed before the opening / closing execution mode was started is resumed.

According to the above configuration, since at least the first display mode and the second display mode exist as the display modes in the main display device 41, the display modes can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes. Further, since the display mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is changed between the first display mode and the second display mode, the player paying attention to the decorative symbols 203 and 207 can change the display mode. It will be possible to get interested. In this case, the common display unit 211 is set in the main display device 41, and the common display unit 211 corresponds to the display modes of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 immediately after the display mode is changed and immediately before the display mode is changed. The common display symbol is displayed. As a result, when the display mode is changed, it is possible to grasp the display mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 before the display mode is changed by visually observing the common display unit 211 immediately after the change. Therefore, the player, the manager of the game hall, etc. can easily grasp the display mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 before the change of the display mode by visually observing the common display unit 211 when the display mode is changed. It becomes possible.

The common display unit 211 is displayed on the main display device 41 on which the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed. As a result, the visibility of the common display unit 211 can be improved, and the correspondence between the common display symbol and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 can be easily grasped.

The display area of the common display unit 211 is set narrower than the display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207. As a result, the decorative symbols 203 and 207, which play a large role as an effect, can be made more conspicuous than the common display unit 211.

The display area of the common display unit 211 exists on the display surface of the main display device 41 on the peripheral side of the display area of the decorative symbols 203 and 207. As a result, the decorative symbols 203 and 207, which play a large role as an effect, can be made more conspicuous than the common display unit 211.

The position where the common display unit 211 is displayed on the main display device 41 is not changed before and after the display mode is changed. This makes it easier for the player and the manager of the game hall to grasp the common display unit 211.

From the start of the rotation display of the display symbols on the decorative symbols 203 and 207 to the end of the rotation display, the common display unit 211 performs variable display of the common display symbol. As a result, even if the effect of temporarily stopping the rotation display of the display symbols of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 occurs in the middle of the game, whether or not the common display symbol is variablely displayed on the common display unit 211 is determined. By checking, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the game is in the middle of the game. Further, when the rotation display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is completed, not only the stop mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 but also the stop mode of the common display symbol corresponds to the result of the jackpot lottery process. This makes it possible to grasp the result of the jackpot lottery process by checking the common display symbol.

In the configuration in which the first decorative symbol 203 and the second decorative symbol 207 have different display modes but have common identification information, the common display symbols corresponding to the common symbols are the first display mode and the first display mode. It is common in the second display mode. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of common display symbols. Further, since the common display symbols are standardized for the predetermined decorative symbols 203 and 207 having the same identification information, the common display symbols can be obtained even if the number of types of the common display symbols is suppressed as described above. It is possible to clarify which identification information corresponds to the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

The second decorative symbol 207 does not have a display symbol having the same identification information as the display symbols of "0", "A", and "source" in the first decorative symbol 203. As a result, the display modes of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 can be significantly different between the first display mode and the second display mode. In this case, not only the common display symbol corresponding to the display symbol having the same identification information in the first decorative symbol 203 and the second decorative symbol 207, but also the common display symbol corresponding to the display symbol having the same identification information exists. ing. As a result, even if the display mode is changed in the situation where any of the display symbols is displayed as the decorative symbols 203 and 207, the common display corresponding to the display symbols of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 to be displayed is displayed. It is possible to display a symbol.

A common display symbol in which the corresponding second decorative symbol 207 does not exist is also subject to variable display in the second display mode. As a result, it is possible to make the number of types of common display symbols to be varied and displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode common, and the variable display of the common display symbol in the first display mode and the second display mode. It is possible to standardize the aspects. On the other hand, in the second display mode, the common display symbol in which the corresponding display symbol of the second decorative symbol 207 does not exist is not a stop target after the variable display. This makes it possible to make the stop mode of the common display symbol after the variable display in the second display mode correspond to the stop mode of the second decorative symbol 207.

When the first decorative symbol 203 is stopped and displayed and the mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display symbols of "0", "A", and "source" are not included. The combination of display symbols is the display target. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp from the display mode of the second decorative symbol 207 that the change from the first display mode to the second display mode has occurred.

Further, not only when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, but also when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display modes of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 can be switched. It is changed to the combination of display symbols. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the display mode has been changed from the display modes of the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

In the configuration in which the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching time is displayed as described above, the display mode of the common display symbol in the common display unit 211 is maintained as it is when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode. As a result, even if the second display mode is changed and the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed in the second decorative symbol 207, the display mode of the first decorative symbol 203 immediately before the change of the display mode is displayed in the common display unit 211. It becomes possible to grasp from the contents of.

The combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is a combination formed by the display symbols having the same identification information in the first decorative symbol 203 and the second decorative symbol 207. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the combination of display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed due to the change of the display mode.

Regardless of the stop mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 immediately before the display mode is changed, the display mode of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 after the change is a combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching when the display mode is changed.

Even if the second decorative symbol 207 does not have a display symbol having the same identification information as the display symbols of "0", "A", and "source", the common display symbol corresponding to these display symbols is available. When the first display mode is changed to the second display mode in the stopped display situation, the state in which the common display symbol is stopped and displayed is maintained immediately after the change to the second display mode. As a result, in the situation where any of the display symbols "0", "A" and "source" is displayed as the first decorative symbol 203, the change to the second display mode occurs and the second decorative symbol 207 is used. Even if a combination of display symbols corresponding to switching is displayed, by checking the common display unit 211, any of the display symbols "0", "A", and "source" is displayed immediately before the display mode is changed. 1 It is possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that it was displayed as the decorative symbol 203.

In the common display unit 211, the same number of unit display units 211a to 211c as the number of variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed. As a result, by checking the common display unit 211 immediately after changing the display mode, it is possible to grasp the display symbols displayed on the decorative symbols 203 and 207, respectively.

In both the first display mode and the second display mode, the number of display symbols displayed in the variable display area of one decorative symbol 203, 207 is one. This makes it easier for the player or the manager of the game hall to know which of the variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 the unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211 correspond to.

In the configuration in which the reach effect using the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is executed, the reach effect using the common display unit 211 is not executed. This makes it easier for the player or the manager of the game hall to recognize the role of the common display unit 211.

<Another form of display effect corresponding to the display mode>
-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the display symbol is rotated and displayed in the variable display area of the decorative symbols 203 and 207, and the scroll display may be performed so that the display symbol moves in a predetermined direction. A switching display may be performed in which the displayed symbols are sequentially changed by repeating the disappearance. Further, the mode in which the common display symbol is variablely displayed on the common display unit 211 is arbitrary, and may be any of rotation display, scroll display, and switching display.

The number of the unit display units 211a to 211c displayed on the common display unit 211 is not limited to three, which is the number of variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207. For example, only one unit display unit is displayed. It may be configured to be. In this case, if it is a normal jackpot result, the common display symbol of "5" is stopped and displayed, if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the common display symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed, and if it is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, "1". If the common display symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed, and the result is that the reach effect is generated although it is the result of the deviation, the common display symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed, and if it is the result of the deviation and the reach effect is not generated. By making the common display symbols other than "1", "3", "5" and "7" stop and display, even if the display mode is changed, the common display symbol can be confirmed immediately before. It is possible to grasp the content of the game result in the game times of.

Further, the number of the unit display units 211a to 211c in the common display unit 211 may be larger than the number of the variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207, and more specifically, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 may be stopped and displayed at the same time. The unit display units 211a to 211c, which are larger than the maximum number of display symbols to be displayed, may be set in the common display unit 211. In this case, for example, the common display symbol corresponding to the game result of the game times as described above is stopped and displayed on one unit display unit, and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are variablely displayed on the remaining three unit display units. The common display symbol corresponding to the display symbol of the area on a one-to-one basis may be stopped and displayed. As a result, by checking the common display unit 211, it is possible to clearly grasp not only the stop result of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in the immediately preceding game round but also the game result of the immediately preceding game round.

-The pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be set in the variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 as in the first embodiment, and a plurality of display symbols may be stopped and displayed at the same time in each variable display area. In this configuration, the common display unit 211 may display only three unit display units 211a to 211c, which are the same number as the number of symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, if a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5 of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 when the game round is completed, the combination of common display symbols corresponding to the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed. It is displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211. If the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5 of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 when the game round is completed, the combination of the common display symbols corresponding to the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is common. It is displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the display unit 211. If there are two or more combinations of out-of-reach symbols, the combination of common display symbols corresponding to any one of the combinations of out-of-reach symbols is displayed. Further, if only the combination of completely off symbols that does not even cause reach display is displayed on the decorative symbols 203 and 207 when the game round is completed, it is common to the combination of the display symbols that are stopped and displayed on the right line L3. The combination of display symbols is displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211. As a result, even if the number of unit display units 211a to 211c displayed on the common display unit 211 is smaller than the number of display symbols that are simultaneously stopped and displayed as decorative symbols 203 and 207, the common display unit 211 It is possible to display a common display symbol corresponding to the stop result of the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

In addition, regardless of the game result of the game times, the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211 are combined with display symbols that are stopped and displayed on one predetermined line of the lines L1 to L5. The combination of the corresponding common display symbols may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for determining the type of combination of common display symbols to be stopped and displayed on the common display unit 211.

-The display mode may be switched even in the open / close execution mode. In this case, when the display of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is resumed after the end of the open / close execution mode, the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed, but the common display unit 211 triggers the execution of the open / close execution mode. The configuration is such that the combination of the common display symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the game times that have become, that is, the display of the combination of the common display symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is restarted. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the display mode has been changed through the decorative symbols 203 and 207, and the type of combination of jackpot symbols that triggered the open / close execution mode through the common display unit 211. Can be recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall.

The common display symbol may be displayed on a display device different from the main display device 41 on which the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed. For example, the common display symbol may be displayed on the first sub-display device 43 or the second sub-display device 44, or the common display symbol may be displayed on a display device of a type different from that of the main display device 41. Good. The type of display device different from the main display device 41 is, for example, if the main display device 41 is a liquid crystal display device as in the above embodiment, a common display symbol is displayed on the dot display device or the organic EL display device. May be.

-The decorative symbols 203 and 207 may be configured such that the display symbols may be temporarily stopped for a period exceeding the final display period even during the production for the game round. For example, in one game round, a pseudo game round effect is generated a plurality of times, and each time each time of the pseudo game round effect is completed, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are displayed. The temporary stop may be configured to occur for a period exceeding the fixed display period. Even in this case, if one game round is being executed, the variable display of the common display symbol is continued even at the end timing of the pseudo game round effect. As a result, even during the period when the display symbols are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbols 203 and 207, it is possible to grasp that one game round is being executed by checking the common display unit 211. Is possible.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the common display symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the display symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbols 203 and 207, and the common display symbol is displayed after the display symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbols 203 and 207. May be stopped and displayed, or the common display symbol may be stopped and displayed before the displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

-The display size of the common display unit 211 may change depending on whether or not the game is being executed. For example, the display size of the common display unit 211 may be relatively small during the execution of the game round, and the display size of the common display unit 211 may be relatively large when the game round is not being executed. .. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols 203 and 207 during the game round, and it is possible to make the common display unit 211 easier to see when the game round is not being executed. It becomes.

-The display of the common display unit 211 may be continued even in the open / close execution mode. In this case, even if the decorative symbols 203 and 207 are hidden in the open / close execution mode, it is possible to grasp the type of the jackpot result that triggered the open / close execution mode by checking the common display unit 211. It becomes.

The unit display units 211a to 211c in the common display unit 211 may be arranged side by side in the same direction as the variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207. In this case, the player or the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the correspondence between the unit display units 211a to 211c and the variable display areas of the decorative symbols 203 and 207.

The hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 may be stored separately. In this case, the special figure display unit 37a has a first display area for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery process for the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold information) acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 33. A second display area for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery process for the hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold information) acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 may be provided. In this configuration, the variable display of the pattern is started in the first display area and the variable display is started based on the fact that the first reserved information is subject to the jackpot lottery process or is subject to the jackpot lottery process. The stop result corresponding to the jackpot lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the game times is terminated. In addition, the variable display of the pattern is started in the second display area and the big hit lottery process is started prior to the second hold information being the target of the big hit lottery process or based on the fact that the second hold information is the target of the big hit lottery process. The stop result corresponding to is displayed, and the variation display of the game times is terminated.

In the above configuration, the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information may not be executed at the same time. In this case, the variable display of the display symbols on the decorative symbols 203 and 207 of the main display device 41 is performed on the side of the first hold information and the second hold information that is the target of the game round. Further, when the variation display of the side of the first hold information and the second hold information that is the execution target of the game round is performed by the decorative symbols 203 and 207, the common display unit 211 is also the first. Instead of displaying the reserved information and the second reserved information corresponding to each of them, the configuration may be such that they are displayed as common to both the first reserved information and the second reserved information. That is, when the first hold information is the execution target of the game times, the variable display of the display symbols in the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is performed for the game times triggered by the first hold information and is common. The variable display of the common display symbol on the display unit 211 is performed for the game times triggered by the first hold information. Further, when the second reserved information is the execution target of the game times, the variable display of the displayed symbols in the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is performed for the game times triggered by the second reserved information and is common. The variable display of the common display symbol on the display unit 211 is performed for the game times triggered by the second hold information.

Further, the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information may be executed at the same time. In this case, the main display device 41 displays the decorative symbols 203 and 207 corresponding to the first reserved information and the decorative symbols 203 and 207 corresponding to the second reserved information, and is a common display unit corresponding to the first reserved information. The configuration may be such that the 211 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the second hold information are displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display symbols corresponding to the first reserved information and the second reserved information, respectively. Here, when the support mode of the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is the low frequency support mode, the first operating port 33 is more likely to win a prize than the second operating port 34, and the support mode Is more likely to win a prize in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33 when is in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the decorative symbols 203, 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the first hold information are made larger than the decorative symbols 203, 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the second hold information. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the decorative symbols 203, 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the second hold information are made larger than the decorative symbols 203, 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the first hold information. .. As a result, in each of the support modes, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211 on the side that easily triggers the execution of the game round can be made conspicuous.

-The display mode may be changed even during the game round. In this case, when the display mode is changed in the middle of the game, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in the variable display are not only changed to the types of decorative symbols 203 and 207 corresponding to the changed display mode, for example. The decorative symbols 203 and 207 may be divided into a predetermined period to blink and display, or the variable display speed of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 may be set to a predetermined speed to notify that the display mode has been changed.

<Refraction display effect>
Next, the content of the refraction display effect will be described. In the refraction display effect, by arranging the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space, the image corresponding to the object data 222 to 224 arranged behind the refraction object 221 is distorted. is there. The refraction display effect is executed as a reach effect in the effect for game rounds, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit result is high after that, or as an effect indicating that the occurrence of the big hit result is confirmed. To.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the refraction object 221 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. Backmost data 222, first background data 223, and second background data 224 are arranged as object data 222 to 224 for displaying a background image in the virtual three-dimensional space. The rearmost data 222 is arranged behind the first background data 223 and the second background data 224, and the rearmost image is displayed using the rearmost data 222. Further, the first background data 223 and the second background data 224 are arranged side by side on the front side of the rearmost data 222, and the first background image and the first background image displayed in front of the rearmost image are displayed. Each of the two background images is displayed using the first background data 223 and the second background data 224.

The refraction object 221 is arranged in front of the first background data 223 and the second background data 224. The refraction object 221 is stored in advance in the memory module 83 together with the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224. The refraction object 221 is data set to represent a structure having a predetermined thickness in a virtual three-dimensional space. This expressed structure has a pair of front and back first plate surfaces 221a and a second plate surface 221b, and the thickness between the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b is not constant and is relative. There is a portion having a large thickness dimension and a portion having a relatively small thickness dimension.

A uniform α value is applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 to make the image created by the refraction object 221 translucent. As a result, even if the refraction object 221 is arranged in front of the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224, the backmost data 222 and the first background data 223 are arranged. And the image by the second background data 224 is not completely hidden by the refraction object 221. By transmitting the image by the refraction object 221, the backmost data 222, the first background data 223 and the second background data 221 are transmitted. 2 The image based on the background data 224 can be visually recognized. However, since the uniform α value is appropriately changed, the transmission state of the image by the refraction object 221 is appropriately changed.

The same refractive index is set for each pixel of the refraction object 221. Here, when creating two-dimensional data using various objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, hidden surface erasing is performed. The Z sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. In the Z sort method, for each pixel having the same X and Y coordinates, that is, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the two-dimensional data. This is a processing method for adjusting the depth. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the RGB value addition process and the RGB value blend process are executed as necessary. Further, in the Z sort method, the ray data is advanced from the position of the viewpoint PC 11 in the depth direction, and each pixel existing on the traveling line of the ray data is referred to from the front side in the traveling direction. In this case, when the ray data intersects the surface of a predetermined object, the incident angle of the ray data is different from 90 °, and a refractive index other than "0" is set for the pixel intersecting the ray data in that object. If so, the traveling direction of the ray data is changed according to the incident angle and the refractive index.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the refraction object 221 is parallel to each of the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b in a state of being arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The arrangement mode is changed so as to rotate around the rotation axis in the Y-axis direction. Then, the mode in which the traveling direction of the ray data is changed changes according to the rotation position of the refraction object 221. As a result, the rearmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 are obtained. The refraction effect of the refraction object 221 changes.

As described above, since the same refractive index is set for each pixel of the refraction object 221, when the ray data travels on the pixel of the refraction object 221, the traveling direction is according to the refractive index of each pixel. Will be changed. Further, as described above, since the structure represented by the refraction object 221 has a thickness, when the ray data travels on the pixels of the refraction object 221, a plurality of structures included in the refraction object 221 are included. The direction of travel will be changed under the influence of the pixels of. Further, since the thickness dimension of the structure represented by the refraction object 221 is not constant, the mode of changing the traveling direction of the ray data depends on the position where the ray data passes through the refraction object 221. ..

A state in which the traveling direction of the ray data is changed by the refraction object 221 will be described. 80 (a) and 80 (b) are explanatory views for explaining how the traveling direction of the ray data is changed by the refraction object 221. As shown in FIG. 80A, the first plate surface 221a of the refraction object 221 is present on the front side, and the first plate surface 221a is on the back side toward the right side with respect to the traveling direction of the ray data from the viewpoint PC11 side. When tilted to the side, the direction of travel of the ray data is bent to the right. In this case, the degree of bending in the traveling direction is the angle of incidence with respect to the first plate surface 221a, the number of pixels of the refraction object 221 existing after passing through the first plate surface 221a, and the refractive index set for those pixels. Determined according to the value. Further, as shown in FIG. 80B, the second plate surface 221b of the refraction object 221 is present on the front side, and the second plate surface 221b is directed to the left side with respect to the traveling direction of the ray data from the viewpoint PC11 side. When it is tilted to the back side, the traveling direction of the ray data is bent to the left. Even in this case, the degree of bending in the traveling direction is the angle of incidence with respect to the second plate surface 221b, the number of pixels of the refraction object 221 existing after passing through the second plate surface 221b, and the refraction set for those pixels. It is determined according to the value of the rate.

81 (a) and 81 (b) explain how the display mode of the image by the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 changes depending on the presence of the refraction object 221. It is explanatory drawing for this. In the situation where the refraction object 221 does not exist, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the rearmost image 225 by the rearmost data 222, the first background image 226 by the first background data 223, and the second background data. The second background image 227 by 224 is displayed without being subjected to the refraction treatment. On the other hand, in the situation where the refraction object 221 exists, in the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224, the area aligned on the Z axis with respect to the pixels of the refraction object 221. A part of each of the rearmost image 225 by the backmost data 222, the first background image 226 by the first background data 223, and the second background image 227 by the second background data 224 is subjected to refraction processing. The image is displayed in a distorted state as shown in FIG. 81 (b). Such a refraction display effect is executed as an effect indicating that the expectation of the jackpot result is high in the effect for the game round, or an effect indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the refraction display effect.

Here, when the refraction object 221 is arranged at a rotation position where the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b are parallel to the XY plane, the front side of the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b. The incident angle of the ray data with respect to the plane existing in is 90 °. In this case, the refraction object 221 does not change the traveling direction of the ray data. Further, when the incident angle is around 90 ° (for example, ± 5 °), the traveling direction of the ray data is changed, but the degree is small. Therefore, in such a situation, the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is set to a value larger than that of other situations, that is, the value on the opaque side, so that the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is played. Make people clearly recognizable. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image in a situation where the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is set to a specific uniform α value which is a value larger than other situations.

In the texture data applied to the refraction object 221, the characters "source" are attached to each of the region applied to the first plate surface 221a and the region applied to the second plate surface 221b. Therefore, when a specific uniform α value is applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221, the backmost image 225 by the backmost data 222, the first background image 226 by the first background data 223, and the second background The character image 228 with the characters "source" is clearly displayed in front of the second background image 227 according to the data 224. However, even in this situation, the specific uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is a value corresponding to translucency, and a uniform refractive index is set for each pixel. In the back image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227, the region existing behind the character image 228 is transparently displayed with a weak refraction effect applied. Further, since white is set as the display color in the texture data applied to the refraction object 221, the character image 228 is too conspicuous as compared with the rearmost image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227. It is possible to prevent it from happening. However, the display color of the texture data applied to the refraction object 221 is not limited to white and is arbitrary.

Next, a state in which the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is changed according to the rotation position of the refraction object 221 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 83. FIG. 83A shows how the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is changed, and FIG. 83B shows how the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is changed.

By starting the refraction display effect at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 83A, the arrangement of the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space is started, and the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is changed. It will be started. Here, at the timing when the arrangement of the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space is started, the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b are parallel to the XY plane, and the first plate surface 221a is in front of the surface. It is placed facing you. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the uniform α value applied to the refraction object 221 becomes a specific uniform α value as shown in FIG. 83 (b). As a result, the refraction object 221 is clearly displayed as the character image 228, so that the player can clearly recognize the existence of the refraction object 221.

After that, at the timing of t2, the rotation position of the refraction object 221 becomes the first trigger position as shown in FIG. 83 (a), so that it is uniformly applied to the refraction object 221 as shown in FIG. 83 (b). The α value is changed from the specific uniform α value to a predetermined uniform α value on the completely transparent side of the specific uniform α value. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the refraction object 221 is displayed as the character image 228, and instead, the refraction display in the rearmost image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227 is conspicuous. It will be. The first trigger position is a rotation position in which the refraction object 221 is rotated in a predetermined rotation direction by a predetermined angle (for example, 5 °) from the state where the first plate surface 221a faces the front.

After that, at the timing of t3, the rotation position of the refraction object 221 becomes the second trigger position as shown in FIG. 83 (a), so that it is uniformly applied to the refraction object 221 as shown in FIG. 83 (b). The α value is changed from a predetermined uniform α value to a specific uniform α value. As a result, the refraction object 221 is clearly displayed as a character image 228. The second trigger position is a rotation position in which the remaining rotation angle in the predetermined rotation direction required until the second plate surface 221b faces the front becomes the predetermined angle (for example, 5 °).

After that, at the timing of t4, the second plate surface 221b of the refraction object 221 faces the front, and at the timing of t5, the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is the third trigger position as shown in FIG. 83 (a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the uniform α value applied to the refraction object 221 is changed from the specific uniform α value to the predetermined uniform α value on the completely transparent side of the specific uniform α value. .. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the refraction object 221 is displayed as the character image 228, and instead, the refraction display in the rearmost image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227 is conspicuous. It will be. The third trigger position is a rotation position in which the refraction object 221 is rotated in a predetermined rotation direction by a predetermined angle (for example, 5 °) from the state where the first plate surface 221a faces the front.

According to the above configuration, the period T in which the specific uniform α value is applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is a situation in which the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is in a predetermined rotation position range. As a result, it is possible to secure a certain period during which the refraction object 221 is clearly displayed as the character image 228.

Next, a processing configuration for executing the above-mentioned refraction display effect will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a setting process for refraction display effect executed by the effect CPU 82. The setting process for the refraction display effect is executed in step S603 in the task process for display control (FIG. 15).

When it is the start timing of the refraction display effect (step S2801: YES), the initial rotation position is set as the rotation position of the refraction object 221 (step S2802). By arranging the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space with the initial rotation position applied, the first plate surface 221a is in a state of facing the front. Further, a specific uniform α value is set as an α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 (step S2803). As a result, the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is displayed in a state of lower transparency than in other situations.

If it is not the start timing of the refraction display effect (step S2801: NO), the rotation position update process is executed (step S2804). As a result, the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is updated so that the refraction object 221 rotates in a predetermined rotation direction in the virtual three-dimensional space. After that, it is determined whether or not the rotation position of the refraction object 221 after this update is included in the predetermined rotation position range (step S2805). When it is included in the predetermined rotation position range (step S2805: YES), a specific uniform α value is set as the α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 (step S2803). As a result, the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is displayed in a state of lower transparency than in other situations. On the other hand, when it is not included in the predetermined rotation position range (step S2805: NO), a predetermined uniform α value is set as the α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 (step S2806). As a result, the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is displayed in a state of higher transparency than in the case of the above-mentioned predetermined rotation position range.

When the process of step S2803 or step S2806 is executed, the refraction object 221 is grasped as the object to be used this time (step S2807), and the texture data applied to the refraction object 221 is grasped (step S2808). That is, the texture data is applied to the refraction object 221 regardless of whether the specific uniform α value or the predetermined uniform α value is used as the α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221. As a result, the texture data is applied to the refraction object 221 not only in a situation where the transparency is relatively low but also in a situation where the transparency is relatively high, and the rotation position of the refraction object 221 is a predetermined rotation position. Even if the situation is not included in the range, the character image 228 corresponding to the refraction object 221 is displayed lightly.

After that, other parameters applied to the refraction object 221 are grasped (step S2809). Further, the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 are grasped, and the texture data applied to the data 222 to 224 is grasped (step S2810). After that, the parameters applied to these data 222 to 224 are grasped (step S2811). By executing the setting process for the refraction display effect as described above, the refraction object 221, the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 are set in the drawing list this time. At the same time, the texture data applied to these data is set. Furthermore, various parameters applied to these data are also set. The parameter includes information on the rotation position of the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space, and also includes a specific uniform α value or a predetermined uniform α value as a uniform α value applied to the refraction object 221.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a drawing data creation process for refraction display effect executed by the 3D control unit 97. The drawing data creation process for the refraction display effect is executed in step S810 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

First, a value corresponding to the number of dots included in the drawing data is set in the target dot counter provided in the register 93 (step S2901). The drawing data has a number of dots corresponding to the dots set on the display surface of the main display device 41, and a value corresponding to the number of dots is set in the target dot counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the refraction object 221 exists in the traveling direction of the ray data of the target dot corresponding to the current value of the target dot counter (step S2902). When the refraction object 221 is present (step S2902: YES), the angle of incidence of the refraction object 221 with respect to the front surface is grasped (step S2903). When grasping the incident angle, the incident angle table stored in advance in the memory module 83 is referred to. The incident angle corresponding to the combination of the rotation position of the refraction object 221 and the coordinates of the ray data is preset in the incident angle table.

After that, the total number of pixels of the refraction object 221 that will exist in the traveling direction of the incident angle is grasped (step S2904). In this grasp, the number of pixels that will pass when the ray data passes through the refraction object 221 as it is at the incident angle calculated in step S2903 is grasped. Specifically, the number of pixels table stored in advance in the memory module 83 is referred to. In the pixel number table, the number of pixels corresponding to the combination of the position where the light ray data is incident on the surface of the refraction object 221 and the incident angle thereof is preset.

After that, the incident angle grasped in step S2903, the number of pixels grasped in step S2904, and the degree of change corresponding to the combination of the refractive index of each pixel are grasped (step S2905). In grasping the degree of fluctuation, the change degree table stored in advance in the memory module 83 is referred to. In the change degree table, the change degree corresponding to the combination of the incident angle, the number of pixels and the refractive index is set in advance. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the surface on which the ray data is incident is inclined so as to be the back side toward the right side, the traveling direction of the ray data is bent to the right side. Is selected, and the degree of bending to the right is changed according to the incident angle, the number of pixels, and the refractive index. Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the surface on which the ray data is incident is inclined so as to be the back side toward the left side, the traveling direction of the ray data is changed to the left side. At the same time as being selected, the degree of bending to the left is changed according to the incident angle, the number of pixels, and the refractive index. Further, when the incident angle is 90 °, “0” is selected as the degree of change regardless of the number of pixels and the refractive index, and in this case, the traveling direction of the ray data is not changed.

When the degree of change other than "0" is grasped by the grasping process of step S2905 (step S2906: YES), the grasping process of the display target corresponding to the grasped degree of change is executed (step S2907). The correspondence between the degree of change and the mode of changing the traveling direction of the ray data is stored in advance in the memory module 83. In step S2907, the correspondence data is read from the memory module 83, and the read correspondence data is used to grasp the change mode of the traveling direction of the ray data corresponding to the change degree grasped in step S2905. .. Then, using the grasped change mode, the target dots of this time among the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 existing behind the refraction object 221. Grasp the pixels to set to.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2906, the display target grasping process that does not correspond to the degree of change is executed (step S2908). In the grasping process, of the rearmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 existing behind the refraction object 221 according to the traveling direction from the source of the ray data, this time. Grasp the pixel to be set for the target dot of.

When the process of step S2907 or step S2908 is executed, the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is grasped (step S2909). After that, the first drawing process is executed (step S2910). In the first drawing process, the pixel information grasped in step S2907 or step S2908 and the foremost pixel information of each pixel of the refraction object 221 grasped in step S2903 are uniformly grasped in step S2909. Blend calculation using α value. For example, the first pixel information which is the former pixel information is (r1, g1, b1), the second pixel information which is the latter pixel information is (r2, g2, b2), and the uniform α value is α. In the case, the pixel information (r3, g3, b3) after blending, which is the result of the blending operation, is
r3 = r1 × (1-α) + r2 × α
g3 = g1 × (1-α) + g2 × α
b3 = b1 × (1-α) + b2 × α
Will be.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, the second drawing process is executed (step S2911). In the second drawing process, the pixels to be set for the target dot this time are grasped from the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data 224 according to the traveling direction from the source of the ray data.

When the process of step S2910 or step S2911 is executed, the value of the target dot counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2912), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target dot counter after the subtraction is "0" (step). S2913). If the value of the target dot counter is not "0" (step S2913: NO), the processing after step S2902 is executed again for the value of the target dot counter after the update. When the value of the target dot counter is "0" (step S2913: YES), the texture data setting process is executed (step S2914). In the texture data setting process, by setting the texture data for the drawing data created this time, the pixel information set as the drawing data is changed to the RGB value color information. In this case, the dots in which the pixel information after blending is set correspond to the RGB values set in the data corresponding to the first pixel information in the texture data and the second pixel information in the texture data. The RGB value after blending is calculated by using the RGB value set in the data. This makes it possible to display an image blended by a uniform α value.

According to the above configuration, due to the presence of the refraction object 221, the backmost data 222, the first background data 223, and the second background data existing behind the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space Of the data 224, the pixel to be drawn on the predetermined dot of the drawing data changes. As a result, the refraction object 221 can be used to express the refraction of the image, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. Further, such a refraction expression is performed using the refractive index set for each pixel of the refraction object 221. As a result, it is possible to specify the data to be referred to when performing the refraction expression in the process of creating the drawing data in the 3D control unit 97, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

The image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is displayed in a translucent state. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the refraction expression using the refraction object 221 from being deteriorated by the presence of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221.

As the rotation position of the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed, the display mode of the image by the refraction expression is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the display mode of the image by the refraction expression rich in variation, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image.

When the refraction object 221 is arranged at a rotation position where the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b are parallel to the XY plane, it exists on the front side of the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b. The incident angle of the ray data with respect to the surface is 90 °. In this case, the refraction object 221 does not change the traveling direction of the ray data. Further, when the incident angle is around 90 ° (for example, ± 5 °), the traveling direction of the ray data is changed, but the degree is small. In such a situation, the refraction effect of the refraction expression is weakened. On the other hand, in the situation where the refraction effect is weakened as described above, display control for producing another visual effect is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the degree of attention to the image from being reduced even when the refraction effect is weakened.

As another visual effect, display control is executed so that the display mode of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is a specific mode. As a result, when the refraction effect is weakened, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image corresponding to the refraction object 221.

More specifically, in the texture data applied to the refraction object 221, the characters "source" are added to each of the region applied to the first plate surface 221a and the region applied to the second plate surface 221b. By setting the uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 to a value larger than other situations, that is, the value on the opaque side, the player can clarify the image corresponding to the refraction object 221. To be recognizable. Therefore, when the refraction effect is weakened, the rearmost image 225 by the rearmost data 222, the first background image 226 by the first background data 223, and the second background image 227 by the second background data 224 are before. In, the character image 228 with the character "source" is clearly displayed. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the refraction object 221 exists.

However, even in this situation, the specific uniform α value applied to each pixel of the refraction object 221 is a value corresponding to translucency, and a uniform refractive index is set for each pixel. In the back image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227, the region existing behind the character image 228 is transparently displayed with a weak refraction effect applied. Further, since white is set as the display color in the texture data applied to the refraction object 221, the character image 228 is too conspicuous as compared with the rearmost image 225, the first background image 226, and the second background image 227. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

When determining the drawing target of the drawing data to a predetermined dot, not only the refractive index set for each pixel of the refraction object 221 but also the incident angle of the ray data is referred to. This makes it possible to diversify the mode of refraction expression and increase the degree of attention to the image.

<Another form of refraction display effect>
The refraction object 221 is arranged at a rotation position where the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b are parallel to the XY plane, and exists on the front side of the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b. When the incident angle of the ray data with respect to the surface is 90 °, the refraction effect may be weakened instead of the refraction effect not being generated. That is, in this situation, the traveling direction of the ray data is slightly changed by the refraction object 221. Even in this configuration, the degree of attention to the image in the above situation is caused by causing another visual effect such that the degree of translucency of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is changed to the opaque side in the above situation. It becomes possible to prevent it from being reduced.

The refraction object 221 is arranged at a rotation position where the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b are parallel to the XY plane, and exists on the front side of the first plate surface 221a and the second plate surface 221b. Another visual effect that occurs when the incident angle of the ray data with respect to the surface is 90 ° is limited to a configuration in which the degree of translucency of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is changed to the opaque side. However, for example, at least one of the display colors, patterns, and shapes of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 may be changed. Further, as another visual effect, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, another image such as an effect image or another character image may be additionally displayed.

The image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is not limited to the structure displayed in a semi-transparent state, and the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 is not displayed, but the refraction effect by the refraction object 221 is generated. May be. In this case, the image in the refraction expression is displayed in a situation where the outer edge of the image corresponding to the refraction object 221 cannot be recognized.

The rotation speed of the refraction object 221 in the virtual three-dimensional space is not limited to a constant configuration, and the rotation speed may change. Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the refraction object 221 rotates in the virtual three-dimensional space, the size of the refraction object 221 may be relatively increased or decreased, and the shape of the refraction object 221 may be formed. May be configured to change.

The direction of travel of the ray data according to the refractive index set for each pixel of the refraction object 221 and the number of pixels of the refraction object 221 through which the ray data passes without considering the incident angle of the ray data. May be changed. In this case, although the mode in which the traveling direction of the ray data is changed is simplified, the processing load can be reduced.

<Reverse display effect>
Next, the content of the reverse display effect will be described. The reverse display effect is a display effect in which the RGB values set for each dot of the created drawing data are inverted. It should be noted that the reverse display effect is executed as an effect indicating that there is a high degree of expectation that a reach effect will occur after the rotation display is performed on all the decorative symbols 203 and 207 in the effect for the game round. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be performed as a reach effect and then as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of a big hit result is high.

86 (a1) to 86 (c2) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the reverse display effect. Of these, FIGS. 86 (a1) to 86 (c1) show how various image data are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and FIGS. 86 (a2) to 86 (c2) are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The contents of the image displayed using various image data are shown.

In the normal drawing period, as shown in FIG. 86 (a1), the rearmost image data 231 is arranged at the innermost position in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the image data for the first background individual image is arranged in front of the rearmost image data 231. FIG. 86 (a2) shows that the drawing data is created in a state where the 232 and the image data 233 for the second background individual image are arranged, and the image data 234 for the effect character is further arranged on the front side. It is possible to display an image for one frame as shown in the above on the main display device 41. In this case, the 2D data created by projecting all of the image data 231 to 234 shown in FIG. 86 (a1) as projection targets is stored in the register 93 as the captured image data 241. The captured image data 241 is the rearmost image 235 based on the rearmost image data 231, the first background individual image 236 based on the image data 232 for the first background individual image, and the image data 233 based on the second background individual image. 2 This is data that enables the display of a still image of the effect character image 238 by the background individual image 237 and the image data 234 for the effect character.

By using the captured image data 241 created as described above, the effect image effect and the reverse display effect are executed. In the effect image production, as shown in FIG. 86 (b1), the captured image data 241 is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the effect is displayed in front of the captured image data 241. The effect image data 242 for displaying the image 243 is arranged. Then, by creating drawing data using these captured image data 241 and effect image data 242, it is possible to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 86 (b2) on the main display device 41. It becomes.

In the reverse display effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (c1), the captured image data 241 is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space. Then, drawing data is created using the captured image data 241 and a subtraction process is executed on the inversion layer data 244 using the created drawing data, whereby FIG. 86 (c2) is shown. As shown in the above, it is possible to display the inverted image 245 in a state where the RGB values of all the dots included in the drawing data are inverted on the main display device 41.

As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 87 (a), the inversion layer data 244 includes the rearmost image data 231, the image data 232 for the first background individual image, and the image data 233 for the second background individual image. It is stored in advance in the memory module 83 together with various object data groups 246 and various texture data groups 247. Here, a large number of dots 244a are set in the inversion layer data 244 as in the drawing data created by using the various object data groups 246 and the various texture data groups 247, and each dot 244a is shown in the figure. As shown in 87 (b), 1 byte is set for each of the RGB values. Therefore, it is possible to set an R value of 0 to 255, a G value of 0 to 255, and a B value of 0 to 255 in each dot 244a of the inversion layer data 244. Then, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 87 (c), the RGB values of each dot 244a of the inversion layer data 244 are the maximum values corresponding to white. That is, the R value, G value, and B value of each dot 244a of the inversion layer data 244 are all white data in which "1" is set in all the bits.

The number of dots set in the inversion layer data 244 is the same as the number of dots in the drawing data, and each dot in the inversion layer data 244 has a one-to-one correspondence with each dot in the drawing data. Then, from the R value, G value, and B value set for the predetermined dot in the inversion layer data 244, the R value, G value, and B value set for the dot corresponding to the predetermined dot in the drawing data. By subtracting, it is possible to invert the R value, G value, and B value of the dot in the drawing data. That is, while the RGB values set for the predetermined dots in the inversion layer data 244 are "255", "255", and "255", they are set to the dots corresponding to the predetermined dots in the drawing data. When the RGB values are "R1", "G1", and "B1", the RGB values "R2", "G2", and "B2" after the subtraction process is executed are
R2 = 255-R1
G2 = 255-G1
B2 = 255-B1
Will be. In this case, the smaller the value of R1, G1 and B1, the larger the value of R2, G2 and B2, and the larger the value of R1, G1 and B1, the smaller the value of R2, G2 and B2. The larger the RGB value, the brighter the color, and the smaller the RGB value, the darker the color. As a result, the RGB values of each dot of the drawing data can be inverted by executing the subtraction process using the inversion layer data 244.

Next, a state in which the reverse display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 88. FIG. 88 (a) shows the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 for executing the effect for the game round, FIG. 88 (b) shows the normal drawing period of the background image, and FIG. 88 (c) shows the capture. The storage timing of the image data 241 is shown, FIG. 88 (d) shows the usage period of the captured image data 241, FIG. 88 (e) shows the usage period of the effect image data 242, and FIG. 88 (f) shows the inversion layer. The usage period of the data 244 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the effect for the game round is started at the timing of t1, which is the situation where the corresponding background image is displayed while waiting for the execution of the effect for the game round. The normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 for executing the effect of is started. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a normal drawing period of the background image for displaying the background image corresponding to the effect for the game round is started. During these normal drawing periods, an image is displayed using drawing data created based on projecting various objects arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space.

After that, the capture image data 241 is saved at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the 2D data created by using various objects for displaying the background image at the timing of t2. Is stored in the register 93 as captured image data 241. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (d) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the background image is displayed using the captured image data 241 saved at the timing of t2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 88 (e), the effect image data 242 is also used, so that the effect image 243 is displayed in front of the background image by the captured image data 241 (FIG. 86 (b2)). reference).

From the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the normal drawing of the background image using various objects is stopped as shown in FIG. 88 (b), while the various objects are drawn as shown in FIG. 88 (a). Normal drawing of the used decorative symbols 203 and 207 is continued. As a result, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 displayed in the foreground of the main display device 41 can continue to be realistically displayed even during the period when the captured image data 241 is used as the background image.

After that, at the timing of t4, the display of the background image using the captured image data 241 is completed as shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the normal drawing period of the background image is restarted as shown in FIG. 88 (b). Will be done. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is continued. After that, when the effect for the game round ends at the timing of t5, the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 for executing the effect for the game round ends as shown in FIG. 88 (a). .. However, even at the timing of t5, the normal drawing period of the background image is continued as shown in FIG. 88 (b).

After that, by restarting the effect for the game round at the timing of t6, the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 for executing the effect for the game round is started as shown in FIG. 88 (a). To. Further, at the timing of t6, the normal drawing period of the background image for displaying the background image corresponding to the effect for the game round is started.

After that, the capture image data 241 is saved at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the 2D data created by using various objects for displaying the background image at the timing of t7. Is stored in the register 93 as captured image data 241. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (d) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, the background image is displayed using the captured image data 241 saved at the timing of t7. In this case, during the period from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the effect image data 242 is also used as shown in FIG. 88 (e), so that the effect image 243 is generated in front of the background image by the captured image data 241. It will be in the displayed state (see FIG. 86 (b2)). Further, in the period from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f), the inversion layer data 244 is used instead of the effect image data 242, so that the captured image is captured. An inverted image 245 in which each RGB value of the background image according to the data 241 is inverted is displayed (see FIG. 86 (c2)).

From the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, the normal drawing of the background image using various objects is stopped as shown in FIG. 88 (b), while the various objects are drawn as shown in FIG. 88 (a). Normal drawing of the used decorative symbols 203 and 207 is continued. As a result, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 displayed in the foreground of the main display device 41 can continue to be realistically displayed even during the period when the captured image data 241 is used as the background image.

After that, at the timing of t10, the display of the background image using the captured image data 241 is completed as shown in FIG. 88 (d), and the normal drawing period of the background image is restarted as shown in FIG. 88 (b). Will be done. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 is continued. After that, when the effect for the game round ends at the timing of t11, the normal drawing period of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 for executing the effect for the game round ends as shown in FIG. 88 (a). .. However, even at the timing of t11, the normal drawing period of the background image is continued as shown in FIG. 88 (b).

Next, a processing configuration for executing the reverse display effect as described above will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a setting process for reverse display effect executed by the effect CPU 82. The setting process for the reverse display effect is executed in step S603 in the task process for display control (FIG. 15).

When it is not the usage period of the captured image data 241 (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the storage timing of the captured image data 241 (step S3002). When the save timing of the captured image data 241 is reached (step S3002: YES), the save instruction information is stored (step S3003). As a result, the save instruction information is set in the drawing list this time, and the captured image data 241 is separately saved in the 3D control unit 97.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, or when the process of step S3003 is executed, various image data are grasped (step S3004). In this process, the rearmost image data 231, the image data 232 for the first background individual image, the image data 233 for the second background individual image, and the image data 234 for the effect character are grasped, and each of these image data is grasped. The texture data applied to 231 to 234 is grasped. Then, various parameters applied to these various image data are grasped (step S3005). By executing the processes of steps S3004 and S3005, the above image data 231 to 234 are set in the drawing list this time, and the texture data and various parameters applied to each of the image data 231 to 234 are set. Is set.

When it is the usage period of the captured image data 241 (step S3001: YES), the usage instruction information of the captured image data 241 is stored (step S3006). In addition, various parameters applied to the captured image data 241 are grasped (step S3007). As a result, the usage instruction information of the captured image data 241 and various applicable parameters are set in the drawing list this time, and the captured image data 241 is used by the 3D control unit 97.

When the effect image data 242 is in use (step S3008: YES), the effect image data 242 is grasped (step S3009), and various parameters applied to the effect image data 242 are grasped (step S3010). As a result, not only the captured image data 241 but also the effect image data 242 is set as the target of use in the drawing list this time, and the effect image 243 is placed in front of the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 in the 3D control unit 97. Controls are taken to make it visible.

When the period of use of the inversion layer data 244 is in effect (step S3011: YES), the inversion layer data 244 is grasped (step S3012), and various parameters applied to the inversion layer data 244 are grasped (step S3013). .. As a result, not only the captured image data 241 but also the inversion layer data 244 is set as the object to be used in the drawing list this time, and the inverted image 245 of the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 is displayed in the 3D control unit 97. Controls are taken to ensure that it is done.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a drawing data creation process for reverse display effect executed by the 3D control unit 97. The drawing data creation process for the reverse display effect is executed in step S810 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

First, the drawing data creation process for the design is executed (step S3101). As a result, drawing data for displaying the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211 is created. After that, it is determined whether or not the usage instruction information of the captured image data 241 is set in the drawing list this time (step S3102). If the usage instruction information is not set (step S3102: NO), the normal creation process of drawing data for the background is executed (step S3103). In the normal creation process, the projection process is executed on the rearmost image data 231 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the image data 232 for the first background individual image, and the image data 233 for the second background individual image. At the same time, drawing data for the background is created by applying the texture data to the data after the projection process.

After that, it is determined whether or not the save instruction information of the captured image data 241 is set in the drawing list this time (step S3104). When the save instruction information is set (step S3104: YES), another save process of the drawing data for the background is executed (step S3105). In the separate saving process, the drawing data for the background created in the immediately preceding step S3103 is separately saved in the register 93.

After that, the drawing data composition process is executed (step S3106). In the compositing process, the drawing data for the pattern created in step S3101 is overwritten on the drawing data for the background created in step S3103. As a result, the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the drawing data for the symbol created in step S3101 are present in front of the background image corresponding to the drawing data for the background created in step S3103. Drawing data for displaying the image to be displayed will be created.

When the usage instruction information of the captured image data 241 is set in the current drawing list (step S3102: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect image data 242 is set in the current drawing list (step S3107). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, the capture image data 241 is written to the predetermined area of the register 93 (step S3108), and the effect image data 242 is written (step S3109). In this case, the RGB values set for each dot of the effect image data 242 are added to the corresponding dots of the captured image data 241 with the α value set for each dot applied. As a result, drawing data corresponding to the image in which the effect image 243 is added in front of the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 is created.

When a negative determination is made in step S3107, or when the process of step S3109 is executed, it is determined whether or not the inversion layer data 244 is set in the drawing list this time (step S3110). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110, a subtraction process using the inversion layer data 244 is executed (step S3111).

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a subtraction process using the inversion layer data 244 in step S3111.

First, a value corresponding to the number of dots included in the drawing data is set in the target dot counter provided in the register 93 (step S3201). The drawing data has a number of dots corresponding to the dots set on the display surface of the main display device 41, and a value corresponding to the number of dots is set in the target dot counter.

After that, in the captured image data 241, the RGB value of the target dot corresponding to the current value of the target dot counter is grasped as the first RGB value (step S3202). Further, the inversion layer data 244 has the same number of dots as the drawing data such as the captured image data 241, and each dot of the inversion layer data 244 corresponds to each dot of the drawing data on a one-to-one basis. There is. In this case, in step S3203, the RGB value of the target dot corresponding to the current value of the target dot counter in the inversion layer data 244 is grasped as the second RGB value. Then, the second RGB value − the first RGB value is calculated and stored as the RGB value of the current target dot in the drawing data after composition. The content of this calculation has already been described.

After that, the value of the target dot counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3205), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target dot counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S3206). If the value of the target dot counter is not "0" (step S3206: NO), the processing after step S3202 is executed again for the value of the target dot counter after the update. When the value of the target dot counter is "0" (step S3206: YES), the subtraction process ends. In this case, the compositing process of the drawing data created by the subtraction process and the drawing data created in step S3101 is executed in step S3106. In the compositing process, the drawing data for the pattern created in step S3101 is overwritten with the drawing data for the background after the subtraction process created in step S3111. As a result, an image in which the decorative symbols 203, 207 and the common display unit 211 corresponding to the drawing data for the symbol created in step S3101 are present in front of the inverted image 245 corresponding to the drawing data created in step S3111. Drawing data will be created to display.

According to the above configuration, by executing the same arithmetic processing for each dot of the captured image data 241, an image having a different hue from the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of types of images using the same captured image data 241, and it is possible to diversify the display mode. Further, in the case of displaying a plurality of types of images in this way, since the same arithmetic processing is executed for each dot of the captured image data 241, the above display mode is used while reducing the processing load. It will be possible to diversify.

By applying the numerical information of each dot of the inversion layer data 244 stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data to each dot of the captured image data 241, an image having a different hue from the image corresponding to the captured image data 241. When displaying the different images, it is sufficient to simply apply the inversion layer data 244, so that the processing load can be reduced. Further, since the numerical information set for each dot of the layer data 244 for inversion is the same, the same arithmetic processing may be executed for each dot of the captured image data 241, and the processing load can be reduced from this point as well. It becomes possible to plan.

The maximum RGB value is set for each dot of the inversion layer data 244, and the RGB value set for each dot of the captured image data 241 is subtracted from the maximum RGB value. As a result, the numerical information of each dot of the captured image data 241 is inverted, and it is possible to display an image in which the hue of the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 is totally inverted.

The image corresponding to the captured image data 241 may be displayed without applying the inversion layer data 244. This makes it possible to display a plurality of types of images using the captured image data 241.

The inversion layer data 244 is applied to the captured image data 241 corresponding to the background image, and is not applied to the images for displaying the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211. As a result, it is possible to display the inverted image of the background image while preventing the display modes of the decorative symbols 203 and 207 and the common display unit 211 from being changed by the inversion layer data 244.

<Another form of reverse display effect>
The target to which the inversion layer data 244 is applied is not limited to the captured image data 241 and may be configured to be applied to image data different from the captured image data 241. For example, there are a plurality of types of timings at which the image data is separately saved, and the inversion layer data 244 may be applied to each of the captured image data at each timing. In this case, it is possible to display the inverted image for a plurality of types of image data by using one inversion layer data 244.

The target to which the inversion layer data 244 is applied may not be the captured image data 241 but may be image data stored in advance in the memory module 83. For example, the inversion layer data 244 may be applied to the image data for displaying the rearmost image in the background image. In this case, it is possible to display an inverted image for the rearmost image.

Further, such a display of the inverted image may be performed when a winning result is obtained in the display lottery process of the inverted image in the game times that result in a big hit. As a result, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that a big hit result is obtained by utilizing the fact that the rearmost image becomes an inverted image, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the rearmost image. At the same time, it becomes possible to give an unexpectedness to the execution of the final effect.

-In addition to or instead of the inversion layer data 244, an intermediate layer data in which an intermediate value is set as the RGB value of each dot may be provided. In this case, the numerical information set for each dot of the captured image data 241 may be divided by the numerical information of each dot of the intermediate layer data, and the numerical information set for each dot of the captured image data 241 may be used. The numerical information of each dot of the intermediate layer data may be added to, or the numerical information of each dot of the intermediate layer data may be subtracted from the numerical information set for each dot of the captured image data 241. Good. Even if such intermediate layer data is used, it is possible to display an image having a color tone different from that of the captured image data 241. Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which an intermediate value is set as the RGB value of each dot of the intermediate layer data, and a configuration in which a value of 1/4 of the maximum value is set may be used, and the maximum value may be set. A configuration in which a value of 3/4 of the above is set may be used.

When the inversion layer data 244 is applied to the captured image data 241, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the RGB value of each dot of the captured image data 241 is subtracted from the RGB value of each dot of the inversion layer data 244. The RGB value of each dot of the captured image data 241 may be divided by the RGB value of each dot of the inversion layer data 244.

The method of uniformly changing the RGB value of each dot of the captured image data 241 to display an image having a hue different from that of the image corresponding to the captured image data 241 is limited to the method of using the inversion layer data 244. Instead of using image data such as the inversion layer data 244, the RGB value of each dot of the captured image data 241 may be subtracted from the maximum RGB value by a program.

<Movement display effect>
Next, the contents of the moving display effect will be described. In the movement display effect, a moving image is displayed as if the movement target character 251 is running toward the front. It should be noted that the movement display effect is executed as a reach effect in the effect for the game round, and then as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation that a big hit result is high is high.

92 (a) to 92 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the movement display effect. There are a first operation mode and a second operation mode as modes of the movement display effect. In these first operation mode and the second operation mode, the operation mode is common to the lower body portion of the moving target character 251. Specifically, the movement display of the lower body portion is performed so that the movement target character 251 is running toward the front side. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (c), the left foot is in the front and the right foot is in the rear, and as shown in FIGS. 92 (b) and 92 (d), the right foot is in the front. And the state where the left foot is behind is repeated alternately.

On the other hand, in the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the operation modes of the upper body portion of the moving target character 251 are different. In the operation display according to the first operation mode, the right hand is in the front and the left hand is in the rear as shown in FIG. 92 (a), and the left hand is in the front and the right hand is in the rear as shown in FIG. 92 (b). Is repeated alternately. In the motion display according to the second motion mode, the protruding hands are held at a relatively high position as shown in FIG. 92 (c) and the protruding hands are relative to each other as shown in FIG. 92 (d). The state of holding it in a low position is repeated alternately. The facial expression of the moving target character 251 is also different between the motion display according to the first motion mode and the motion display according to the second motion mode, but it is optional that the facial expression is different.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 93, the movement target character 251 is displayed by using the bone object 252 as an object. The bone object 252 has skeleton data 253 having a plurality of bone data 253a and a plurality of joint data 253b, and skin data 254 set in association with the skeleton data 253 and representing a skin portion. The bone data 253a corresponds to the bone portion of the character to be moved 251, and the joint data 253b corresponds to the joint portion connecting the plurality of bone data 253a. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and orientation data of the bone data 253a with reference to the joint data 253b, the coordinate data of the skin data 254 set in association with the skeleton data 253 is changed, and the moving target character is changed accordingly. The form of 251 will be changed.

The bone object 252 is stored in the memory module 83 in advance, and the texture data corresponding to the bone object 252 is also stored in the memory module 83 in advance. By applying the texture data to the 2D data after projecting the bone object 252, drawing data for displaying the movement target character 251 is created. Further, in order to cause the memory module 83 to display the first animation data 255 for causing the movement target character 251 to display the operation according to the first operation mode and the movement target character 251 to display the operation according to the second operation mode. The second animation data 256 of the above is stored in advance.

FIG. 94A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first animation data 255, and FIG. 94B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second animation data 256. Both the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256 have pointer information that is a serial number. In addition, the first data of the upper body, the second data of the upper body, ..., the k data of the upper body, the first data of the lower body, the second data of the lower body, ... A combination of data to be applied to each of the kth data of the lower body is set. The first data of the upper body, the second data of the upper body, ..., The k data of the upper body is data for determining the coordinates and orientation of the bone data 253a in the upper body part of the bone object 252, and is the first data of the lower body. The data, the second data of the lower body, ..., The k-th data of the lower body are data for determining the coordinates and orientation of the bone data 253a in the lower body portion of the bone object 252. Regarding the skin data 254 of the bone object 252, weighting data is set in advance for one or more bone data 253a, and when the bone data 253a moves, the coordinate data of the skin data 254 is generated according to the weighting data. Be changed. As a result, the skin portion of the moving target character 251 is deformed in a manner corresponding to the operation of the bone data 253a.

The first animation data 255 is set as data for causing the moving target character 251 to perform a plurality of laps in the first motion mode in which both feet are alternately moved back and forth and both hands are alternately moved back and forth. In this case, there are cases where the execution period of the actual first operation mode does not exceed the execution period of the first operation target defined by the first animation data 255, and there are cases where it exceeds the execution period. After executing the display control by the last pointer information in the data 255, the process returns to the display control by the first pointer information of the first animation data 255. That is, the first animation data 255 is repeatedly used. In this case, the form of the movement target character 251 displayed by the display control by the last pointer information in the first animation data 255 and the form of the movement target character 251 displayed by the display control by the first pointer information are continuous. have.

The second animation data 256 is set as data for causing the moving target character 251 to execute a second motion mode in which both feet are alternately moved back and forth and both hands are raised and lowered at the same time. In this case, there are cases where the execution period of the actual second operation mode does not exceed the execution period of the second operation target defined by the second animation data 256, and there are cases where it exceeds the execution period. After executing the display control by the last pointer information in the data 256, the process returns to the display control by the first pointer information of the second animation data 256. That is, the second animation data 256 is repeatedly used. In this case, the form of the movement target character 251 displayed by the display control by the last pointer information in the second animation data 256 and the form of the movement target character 251 displayed by the display control by the first pointer information are continuous. have.

As described above, by using the first animation data 255, the movement display by the movement target character 251 is performed by the first movement mode, and by using the second animation data 256, the movement by the movement target character 251 by the second movement mode is performed. The display is done. In this case, as the movement display effect, only the first movement display effect in which the movement target character 251 performs the operation display according to the first operation mode, and the movement display effect in which the movement target character 251 performs only the operation display in the second operation mode are performed. In addition to the two movement display effects, a third movement display effect is included in which the operation display according to the first operation mode is executed for a predetermined period and then the operation display according to the second operation mode is executed.

FIG. 95 is a time chart for explaining the types of animation data 255 and 256 to be used when each of the first movement display effect, the second movement display effect, and the third movement display effect is executed. FIG. 95 (a) shows the execution period of the first movement display effect, FIG. 95 (b) shows the execution period of the second movement display effect, and FIG. 95 (c) shows the execution period of the third movement display effect. , FIG. 95 (d) shows the usage period of the first animation data 255, and FIG. 95 (e) shows the usage period of the second animation data 256.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the first movement display effect is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 95 (e), the second animation data 256 is not used as the animation data, and only the first animation data 255 is used.

As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the second movement display effect is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 95 (e), the first animation data 255 is not used as the animation data, and only the second animation data 256 is used.

As shown in FIG. 95 (c), the third movement display effect is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. In the third movement display effect, first, the movement display by the movement target character 251 is performed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 according to the first movement mode. Therefore, only the first animation data 255 is used from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 95 (d). After that, from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the movement display by the movement target character 251 is performed according to the second operation mode. In this case, not only the second animation data 256 is used to display the operation according to the second operation mode, but the first animation data 255 as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 95 (e). And the second animation data 256 are both used.

Specifically, for the lower body portion of the movement target character 251, the first animation data 255 used in the timings from t5 to t6 is continuously used as it is. In this continuous use, for example, when the data corresponding to the pointer information of "m" in the first animation data 255 is used at the timing of t6, the image is updated at the next timing with respect to the timing of t6. In the timing, the data corresponding to the pointer information of "m + 1" in the first animation data 255 is used. However, the data to be used are only the first data of the lower body, the second data of the lower body, ..., the k data of the lower body, the first data of the upper body, the second data of the upper body, ..., The kth data of the upper body is not subject to use. On the other hand, the second animation data 256 is used again for the upper body portion of the movement target character 251. However, the data to be used are only the first data of the upper body, the second data of the upper body, ..., the k data of the upper body, the first data of the lower body, the second data of the lower body, ..., The kth data of the lower body is not subject to use. Further, at the timing of starting the operation display according to the second operation mode, the pointer information of "0" in the second animation data 256 is used as the target of use.

In this way, when switching from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the third movement display effect, the first animation data 255 is continuously used for the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 while the movement target character 251 is used as it is. By using the second animation data 256 again for the upper body part, when the movement mode of the lower body part of the movement target character 251 is common between the first movement mode and the second movement mode, from the first movement mode. When switching to the second operation mode, it is possible to make the movement target character 251 perform the second operation mode while making the operation mode of the lower body portion continuous. For example, when switching the animation data applied to the entire moving target character 251 from the first animation data 255 to the second animation data 256 when switching from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, the first animation data is immediately before the switching timing. It is assumed that the data of the lower body portion used in 255 and the data of the lower body portion corresponding to the first pointer information of the second animation data 256 do not have the continuity of operation. In this case, when switching from the first operation mode to the second operation mode, the movement of the lower body portion of the moving target character 251 may become discontinuous. On the other hand, in order to ensure the continuity of the operation by both data, the pointer information to be used in the second animation data 256 may be adjusted according to the last pointer information in the first animation data 255. If the pachinko machine 10 tries to perform such adjustment in real time, the processing load increases, and if the pachinko machine 10 is attempted to perform such adjustment at the design stage, the adjustment work becomes complicated. Furthermore, it is conceivable to prepare dedicated animation data corresponding to the entire third moving display effect separately from the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256, but in this case, the data capacity will increase. .. On the other hand, as described above, the first animation data 255 is continuously used for the lower body part, and the second animation data 256 is used for the upper body part so as not to cause the above-mentioned various inconveniences. However, it is possible to smoothly switch from the first operation mode to the second operation mode.

Next, a processing configuration for executing the above-mentioned movement display effect will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a setting process for moving display effect executed by the effect CPU 82. The setting process for moving display effect is executed in step S603 in the task process for display control (FIG. 15).

When it is the start timing of the first movement display effect (step S3301: YES), the first animation data 255 is read from the memory module 83 (step S3302). Further, when it is the start timing of the second movement display effect (step S3303: YES), the second animation data 256 is read from the memory module 83 (step S3304). Further, when it is the start timing of the third movement display effect (step S3305: YES), both the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256 are read from the memory module 83 (step S3306).

After that, the bone object 252 required to display the movement target character 251 and the texture data corresponding thereto are grasped (step S3307). Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the period in which both the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256 are referred to in the third moving display effect (step S3308). When a negative determination is made in step S3308, various data corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target in the animation data currently used among the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256 are read out ( Step S3309).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, first, the data of the lower body portion of the various data corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target is read out in the first animation data 255 (step S3310). After that, in the second animation data 256, the data of the upper body portion among the various data corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target is read out (step S3311). The pointer information of the reference target in the first animation data 255 and the pointer information of the reference target in the second animation data 256 are set independently of each other.

When the process of step S3309 or step S3311 is executed, the pointer information update process is executed (step S3312). In the update process, when the first animation data 255 is the target of use, the pointer information to be referred to in the first animation data 255 is updated. Further, in the update process, when the second animation data 256 is the target of use, the pointer information to be referred to in the second animation data 256 is updated. Further, in the update process, when both the first animation data 255 and the second animation data 256 are to be used, the pointer information to be referred to in the first animation data 255 is updated and the second animation data is updated. In 256, the pointer information to be referred to is updated.

After that, among various parameters applied to the bone object 252, other parameters not defined in the animation data 255 and 256 are grasped (step S3313). In addition, an object and a texture for displaying an image different from the movement target character 251 are grasped (step S3314), and various parameters applied to the object and the texture are grasped (step S3315).

By executing the setting process for the movement display effect as described above, the 3D control unit 97 is provided with a drawing list in which various data necessary for displaying the movement target character 251 and other images are set. .. Then, the 3D control unit 97 executes the drawing process according to the drawing list, so that the movement target character 251 and other images are displayed on the main display device 41.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the arrangement process of the bone object 252 executed by the 3D control unit 97. The arrangement process of the bone object 252 is executed in step S803 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20). The arrangement process of the bone object 252 is executed when the bone object 252 is set as the target of use in the drawing list.

First, a value corresponding to the number of bone data 253a included in the bone object 252 is set in the application target counter provided in the register 93 (step S3401). After that, out of the coordinate data and orientation data of each bone data 253a set in the drawing list, the coordinate data and orientation data corresponding to the values of the current application target counter are read, and the read coordinate data and orientation data are used as the current status. It is applied to the bone data 253a of the type corresponding to the value of the application target counter (step S3402). Then, the value of the applicable counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3403). When the value of the application target counter after 1 subtraction is not "0" (step S3404: NO), the process of step S3402 is executed for the bone data 253a corresponding to the value of the application target counter after 1 subtraction.

When the value of the application target counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3404: YES), the adjustment process is executed (step S3405). In the adjustment process, the coordinates of the skin data 254 are changed according to the skeleton data 253 determined by setting the coordinate data and the orientation data of each bone data 253a. After that, the placement process is executed (step S3406). In the arrangement process, the bone object 252 whose form is set as described above is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in a state where parameters such as coordinate data and angles in the virtual three-dimensional space of the bone object 252 are applied. As a result, the bone object 252 is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in a form according to various parameters determined by the effect CPU 82.

According to the above configuration, when the third movement display effect is executed, the operation content of the lower body part of the movement target character 251 is determined by using the first animation data 255, and the upper body part of the movement target character 251 is determined. There is a situation in which the operation content of is determined by using the second animation data 256. As a result, when displaying an image in which a predetermined operation is performed in each of the lower body portion and the upper body portion of the moving target character 251, the animation data 255 suitable for appropriately displaying the lower body portion and the upper body portion, respectively. It becomes possible to use 256.

In the first half period of the third movement display effect, the display contents of both the lower body part and the upper body part of the movement target character 251 are determined by using the first animation data 255, and in the second half period of the third movement display effect. The display content of the lower body part of the moving target character 251 is determined by using the first animation data 255 as it is, while the upper body part of the moving target character 251 is newly displayed by using the second animation data 256. The content is decided. As a result, when switching from the first half period to the second half period of the third movement display effect, the lower body part of the movement target character 251 is smoothly performed while different operations are performed for the upper body part of the movement target character 251. It is possible to continue the operation.

In the first movement display effect, the display contents of both the lower body part and the upper body part of the movement target character 251 are determined by using the first animation data 255, and in the second movement display effect, the second animation data 256 is used. The display contents of both the lower body portion and the upper body portion of the movement target character 251 are determined. In this case, as described above, in the latter half period of the third movement display effect, the operation content of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 is determined by using the first animation data 255, and the upper body portion of the movement target character 251 is determined. The operation content is determined using the second animation data 256. As a result, it is possible to display the movement target character 251 by using the animation data 255 and 256 suitable for each situation.

The display content of the lower body part of the moving target character 251 when determined using the first animation data 255, and the display content of the lower body portion of the moving target character 251 when determined using the second animation data 256. Is the same. As a result, the display contents of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 can be made the same in the first movement display effect and the second movement display effect. In this case, in the latter half of the third movement display effect, the first animation data 255 is intentionally used to determine the display content of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 and the second animation data 256 is used to determine the movement target. By determining the display content of the upper body portion of the character 251, it is possible to smoothly change each display content of the lower body portion and the upper body portion.

<Another form of moving display effect>
-The second animation data 256 may be configured such that only the data of the upper body portion of the movement target character 251 is set, and the data of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 is not set. Even in this case, the display contents of both the lower body portion and the upper body portion of the movement target character 251 are determined by the first animation data 255 in the first half period of the third movement display effect, and the movement target is determined in the second half period. The display content of the lower body part of the character 251 is determined by using the first animation data 255, and the display content of the upper body part is determined by using the second animation data 256. It is possible to change the operation content of the upper body part while making the operation of.

The display content of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 by the first animation data 255 and the display content of the lower body portion of the movement target character 251 by the second animation data 256 are not limited to the same configuration, and these The display contents may be different.

The display content of the first image range, which is a part of the predetermined individual image, is determined by using the first animation data 255, and the second image, which is a part of the predetermined individual image. The display content of the range is determined by using the second animation data 256. The application target of the configuration is not limited to the bone data 253 for displaying the 3D image, and the sprite data for displaying the 2D image. It may be.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment. Further, the configuration of each of the above embodiments and the configuration of the following other embodiments may be applied in any combination. This makes it possible to obtain a synergistic effect by applying each configuration.

(1) When the image data already read in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is newly set as a read target in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the image data is the data in the pre-transfer area 86a. Instead of the configuration limited to the configuration that is copied between the storage areas 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 in which the image data is already stored is the address information of the drawing list without the copying being performed. It may be configured to be set to. In this case, the image data to be read cannot be stored in the data storage area 123 on which the image data is written, but it is not necessary to copy the image data between the data storage areas 123.

(2) A history area may be provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a may be stored in the history area in the order of the pre-transfer. In this case, for example, a storage area capable of storing a plurality of image data such as 256 or 512 as a history area is secured. Then, the plurality of storage areas are the storage targets of the image data according to a predetermined order, and when the image data is stored in the storage area of the last order, the storage area of the first order is the image data. The configuration is to be stored. In this configuration, each time the image data is newly pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the storage area to be stored in the history area. Then, when the image data specified in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 is to be read into the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is first stored in one of the history areas. Identify whether or not it is stored in the area. When stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data stored in the storage area is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the image data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the history area, the image data is read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the read image data is currently stored in the history area. Store in the storage area. Even with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of reading image data from the memory module 83. Further, in this configuration, since a history area is provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a, only the image data designated as the target of use in the drawing list provided to the effect LSI 85 is provided in the pre-transfer area 86a. It becomes possible to read it. The history area may be provided in a RAM different from the VRAM 86.

(3) Of the address ID group set in the address information of the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, only the address ID corresponding to the start address is set as the final address instead of the configuration set in the search table 125. Only the corresponding address ID may be set in the search table 125, or only the address ID corresponding to the intermediate address may be set in the search table 125. Further, the address ID corresponding to the start address and the address ID corresponding to the final address may be set in the search table 125, or the entire address ID group may be set in the search table 125. .. This makes it possible to more accurately identify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the address ID is set in the search table 125 as the information for specifying the type of the image data stored in the data storage area 123, for example, the identification information is set in each of the image data. If so, the identification information may be set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of the image data. In this case, if the amount of the identification information is smaller than that of one address ID, the amount of information for specifying the type of the image data can be reduced.

(5) A resident area is provided in the VRAM 86 separately from the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data for fluctuating start and the image data for abnormality notification required for starting the effect for the game round are the operating power to the effect CPU 82. Is read into the resident area when the supply of the power is started, and the read state may be maintained while the operating power is being supplied. In this case, even if the start condition for starting the effect for the game round or the start condition for starting the abnormality notification is satisfied at an arbitrary timing, the image can be displayed using the image data read from the resident area. As compared with the case of reading the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to shorten the period required from the establishment of the above start condition to the start of the image display.

(6) A configuration in which the data to be read is not read from the ROM when the data to be read has already been read into the RAM, and the data to be read has already been read into the RAM. A configuration in which data is copied between RAM areas may be applied to data other than image data.

(7) When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination is overwritten with the address information of the drawing list. The configuration is not limited to the configuration, and the identification information may be set as information different from the address information in the drawing list. Even in this case, since the information corresponding to the transfer destination area is not set in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the amount of information in the drawing list can be reduced.

(8) The pre-transfer control unit 94 identifies whether or not the image data specified in the drawing list is stored in the transfer destination data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, and determines whether or not the image data is stored in the stored state. When it is specified that the data has been stored, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the drawing list. As a result, the fact that the identification information is set in the drawing list means that the reading of the image data is completed.

(9) Data storage in the pre-transfer area 86a is performed instead of the configuration in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the register 93. The configuration may be stored in the area 123. In this configuration, when one decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in one data storage area 123, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in the data storage area. When stored in 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the address information of the drawing list. Further, in the configuration in which the identification information is set even for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list is in the immediately preceding display order. The image data corresponding to the priority data is read in an area where the address is continuous with respect to the area in which the image data is read. Therefore, it is possible to set only the offset value for the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of address information after the pre-transfer of image data is completed.

(10) When the pre-transfer of image data is completed, the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list is not limited to the configuration in which the offset value is set as the address information, and any image. Even if it is data, the address information may be configured such that identification information which is information for specifying the address of the area where the image data is read is set.

(11) When the pre-transfer of the data specified in the instruction information such as the drawing list is completed, the drawing for displaying the image is configured to set the information corresponding to the transfer destination area of the data in the instruction information. It may be applied to a configuration that uses instruction information different from the list.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which a maximum of two 2D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image with one update timing, three or four or more 2D drawing lists are drawn. The list may be provided. Further, instead of the configuration in which a maximum of two 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image with one update timing, three or four or more 3D drawing lists are displayed. May be provided.

(13) In order to display an image of one update timing, instead of a configuration in which a plurality of drawing lists are always provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, one image is displayed in order to display an image of one update timing. Only the drawing list may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. For example, in a configuration that does not have a function of displaying a 3D image, only one drawing list for 2D is provided. In this case, if the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is less than the reference number, only one drawing list is provided, and the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is the reference. If the number is equal to or more than the number, a plurality of drawing lists may be provided.

(14) The configuration in which the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are set in different drawing lists is not limited, and the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are the same drawing list. It may be configured to be set to. In this case, the number of drawing lists provided by the effect CPU 82 can be reduced. However, in this configuration, it is necessary to clearly distinguish between the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D in the drawing list. Specifically, as a configuration for the distinction, the display order priority data of the predetermined numerical range is set for the image data for 2D, and the image data for 3D is a specific numerical range that does not overlap with the predetermined numerical range. It is conceivable that the display order priority data of is set. As a result, even if the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are aggregated and set in the same drawing list, the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are drawn in the drawing list. It is possible to make a clear distinction in.

Further, in the configuration in which the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are aggregated and set in the same drawing list as described above, the drawing list is set in one of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. By causing the drawing process using the drawing list to be executed on the other side after the drawing process using the above is completed, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of the same drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85.

(15) The image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is not limited to a configuration in which the image data is aggregated and set in one drawing list, and a part of the image data is set. The image data corresponding to the display device may be set in a drawing list different from the image data corresponding to the other display devices. For example, a drawing list in which only the image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set and a drawing list in which the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are set are generated from the effect CPU 82. The configuration may be provided, or a drawing list corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 may be provided by the effect CPU 82. In this case, since the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set are distinguished for each drawing list, the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set are specified by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. It becomes easier to do.

(16) The drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 may be divided into a plurality of drawing lists in the effect LSI 85, and each of the divided drawing lists may be used in the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Good. For example, one drawing list in which image data for 2D and image data for 3D are aggregated for use is provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, and the image data is pre-transferred in the effect LSI 85. The one drawing list may be divided into a drawing list in which image data for 2D is set and a drawing list in which image data for 3D is set at timing or the like. As a result, while reducing the number of drawing lists provided by the effect CPU 82, drawing lists corresponding to each of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are individually provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. It becomes possible to do.

(17) A plurality of the same drawing lists may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. In this case, for example, the drawing list is configured such that not only the address ID corresponding to the storage source area in the image data memory module 83 but also the information corresponding to the storage destination area in the VRAM 86 of the image data is set. One drawing list among the plurality of the same drawing lists may be provided to the advance transfer control unit 94, and one drawing list may be provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. According to this configuration, it is possible for the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 to execute the drawing process for the drawing list for which the pre-transfer of all the image data has not been completed in the pre-transfer control unit 94.

(18) When a read completion flag is set corresponding to each data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a and the transfer of image data to the transfer destination data storage area 123 is completed by the pre-transfer control unit 94. The read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set to "1". In this case, when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the image data from the data storage area 123 on the condition that the read completion flag is set to "1", and read the image data. The read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the reading process of the image data from the data storage area 123 for which the reading of the image data has not been completed from being executed.

(19) The number of areas of the VRAM 86 specified collectively by the identification information of one of the index areas 127a to 127c may be different for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. As a result, it is possible to specify an area of a size suitable for the type of data to be stored in each of the index areas 127a to 127c with one identification information.

(20) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one identification information in the index areas 127a to 127c, and a configuration in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one identification information is also possible. Good. Further, there may be a configuration in which an index area in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one identification information and an index area in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one identification information exist.

(21) One index area 127a to 127c may include an area of VRAM86 whose addresses are not continuous, and an area where addresses are not continuous is included as an area of VRAM86 designated by one identification information. It may be configured.

(22) The special moving image data 185 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of types of I picture data are set, and the special moving image data 185 may be configured in which only one type of I picture data is set. .. In this case, only one type of special decoded image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185. Even with this configuration, it is possible to read still image data such as texture data to an area different from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86.

Further, in the configuration, a plurality of I-picture data of the same type may be set in the special moving image data 185. In this case, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, a plurality of the same special decoded image data will be created. In this configuration, when the same specially decoded image data is used over a plurality of update timings, the same specially decoded image data can be obtained only by using the specially decoded image data according to the order of use corresponding to the special moving image data 185. It can be used over multiple update timings. Further, when a plurality of the same specially decoded image data are created in this way, only one of the specially decoded image data is used, and the remaining specially decoded image data is stored after the decoding process. It may be configured to be erased from the existing area.

(23) The specially decoded image data 185a to 185d created by providing a separate storage area in the VRAM 86 or the register 93 and executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 are separately stored in the separate storage area. May be. In this case, even if the usage period of the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d has expired, the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d are read out from the separate storage area for the next use, so that the special moving image data 185 is used. There is no need to perform the decoding process again for.

(24) The special moving image data 185 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. In this case, a plurality of the same specially decoded image data will be created.

(25) All of the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 83 as still image data is read from the memory module 83 when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started, and is used for the texture of the VRAM 86. It may be configured to be written in the area. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out in the texture area is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of the effect LSI85 increases. On the other hand, by storing some texture data as special moving image data 185, it is not necessary to replace the texture area, and some texture data is expanded for moving images in the register 93 as needed. It becomes possible to read into the area 119. Further, when the development area 119 for moving images is also used as the area for using the texture data, the texture data itself is not read out in the developing area 119 for the moving image, but the special moving image data 185 is decoded. Since the specially decoded image data 185a to 185d created by the execution are read out, the handling of the developed area 119 for moving images in the effect LSI 85 is changed according to the type of data read out in the developed area 119 for moving images. There is no need.

Further, in the above configuration, not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 83 to the object area of the VRAM 86 when the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. In this case, it is not necessary to read the object data into the VRAM 86 at an appropriate timing.

(26) Drawing data for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 (hereinafter, also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter, second). In the configuration in which the drawing data) is set in one frame area 117, 118, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed in the odd-numbered vertical lines and the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal arrangement order. It is not limited to the configuration in which the drawing data is distributed and set.

For example, the first drawing data may be set in the left half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the right half. Further, for example, the first drawing data may be set in the upper half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the lower half. Further, for example, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set to be dispersed in the odd-numbered horizontal lines and the even-numbered horizontal lines in the vertical arrangement order in one frame area 117 and 118. It may be configured. Further, the first drawing portion data forming a part of the first drawing data and the second drawing portion data forming a part of the second drawing data are not arranged alternately in the unit of one line, but the first drawing data. The dot of the minimum unit of the 1 drawing data and the dot of the minimum unit of the second drawing data may be arranged alternately in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(27) The number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the number of dots of the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the same configuration, and the number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device are not limited to the same. The configuration may be different from the number of dots of 44. In this case, the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the first drawing data and the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the second drawing data in one frame area 117, 118. However, the configuration may be different or the same depending on the difference in the number of dots.

(28) In a situation where one of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is hidden behind the center frame 42 and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the other display device The configuration may be such that a visible situation may occur. In this case, no image may be displayed on the above-mentioned one display device hidden behind the center frame 42. Even with this configuration, the drawing data for displaying the image on the other display device is set in a part of the drawing data in one frame area 117 and 118. In the configuration, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may not be set, and the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set although the image is not displayed on the one display device. It may be configured as such. When the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set, the frame areas 117 and 118 may be displayed regardless of whether or not the image is displayed on the one display device. On the other hand, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

Further, the same color display may be performed on the above-mentioned one display device hidden behind the center frame 42. In this case, since the drawing data for causing the same color display to be performed as the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set, the one display device is hidden behind the center frame 42. Regardless of whether or not the situation is met, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set for one frame area 117 and 118.

(29) When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, they may be hidden behind the center frame 42 so that they cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, no image is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, but the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have the first frame area 117 and 118. The configuration may be such that both the 1 drawing data and the 2nd drawing data are set. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the same color display is performed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and the same color is displayed on one frame area 117 and 118. The configuration may be such that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data for performing the above are set. In this case, the same color information (numerical information) is set for all the dots in the one frame area 117 and 118.

(30) At a predetermined drawing timing, only the first drawing data is set in one frame area 117, 118, and at other drawing timings, only the second drawing data is set in the one frame area 117, 118. May be good. In this case, a part of the one frame areas 117 and 118 may be an area for setting the first drawing data, and the other area may be an area for setting the second drawing data. 1 If the drawing timing is to set the drawing data, the first drawing data is set over the entire frame areas 117 and 118, and if the drawing timing is to set the second drawing data, the second drawing data is one. The configuration may be set over the entire frame areas 117 and 118 of.

(31) By inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is output. The configuration is not limited to the configuration output to the second sub display device 44, and an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal. In addition, an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the second drawing data may be output to the second sub-display device 44. Further, the number of dots to be output of the image signal may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data due to the input of one pulse of the clock signal.

Further, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal, and one dot in the second drawing data is input by the input of the next one pulse. The image signal corresponding to the above may be output to the second sub-display device 44. In this case, although it takes a long time to complete the output of the image signals for all the dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data, the output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub It is possible to alternately output the image signal to the display device 44.

(32) The number of dots may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data. In this case, in the situation where there are dots in both the first drawing data and the second drawing data for which the output of the image signal has not been completed, the output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display The output of the image signal to the device 44 is alternately performed, and after the output of the image signal on the side having a small number of dots among the first drawing data and the second drawing data is completed, the image signal on the side having a large number of dots is completed. The configuration may be such that only the output is repeated.

(33) The target display devices in which the image data to be used are aggregated and set in one drawing list are all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. The configuration is not limited, and the objects to be collectively set may be the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43, or may be the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. , The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be configured. In a configuration in which four or more display devices are provided, image data corresponding to the four or more display devices may be aggregated and set in one drawing list.

(34) The display device 41, 43 to be set is not limited to the configuration in which the display order priority data is also used as the information for designating the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the drawing list. Information for specifying the types of, 44 may be set in the drawing list. In this case, for example, the same display order priority data is used between the image data group corresponding to the main display device 41, the image data group corresponding to the first sub display device 43, and the image data group corresponding to the second sub display device 44. The image data in which is set may exist. In this configuration, the order of use of image data is set in advance according to the types of display devices 41, 43, 44, such as main display device 41 → first sub display device 43 → second sub display device 44. Even if the same display order priority data exists between the different display devices 41, 43, and 44, each image data can be sequentially used.

(35) Display target data and display order data are set in the execution target table for display control, and the configuration is limited to a configuration in which display order priority data is derived from the display target data and display order data. Instead, the display order priority data may be set in the execution target table for display control. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load in that it is not necessary to derive the display order priority data from the display target data and the display order data.

(36) The display content of the rotation period image 153 is not limited to that in the above embodiment and is arbitrary. For example, as the rotation period image 153, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub The same color display may be performed over the entire display device 44, and the geometric pattern is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. May be.

(37) During the period during which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 display images having vertical and horizontal directions, and the images are displayed. The display may be configured without following the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player can recognize that the display is displayed on the non-rotating surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is a rotation operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44. May be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directions regardless of. This makes it difficult for the player paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

(38) When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 slide in the front of the main display device 41 in the horizontal or vertical direction, the entire main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 The image may be displayed over a period of time, and may be displayed without following the slide movement of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player can recognize that the image is displayed on the fixed surface. For example, at least one of the character image and the background image is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is the sliding operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44. May be configured to continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directions regardless of. This makes it difficult for the player paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are sliding.

(39) The display period of the image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are performing the displacement operation is not limited to the rotation period during which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate. For example, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to continue from the start of the slide movement from the initial position until the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the separated positions. As a result, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can be displaced from the initial position to the position at the time of separation without the player noticing, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

(40) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of displaceable sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided, and the configuration may be such that only one is provided or three or more are provided. ..

(41) The sub-display devices 43 and 44 may be configured so that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can make one or more turns in a predetermined direction with the direction in which the display surface of the main display device 41 faces as a rotation axis.

(42) In the configuration in which the second operating port 34 is provided in the right side region of the game area PA and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode Also, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side may be displayed.

(43) The rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the rotation mode of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, but the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is not changed. May be.

(44) The abnormality notification image 176 may be displayed on the main display device 41 even in an area where it can face the sub display devices 43 and 44 during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44. .. In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

(45) When a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, an abnormality notification corresponding to the notification target event corresponds to the notification target event in the order in which the notification target event occurs regardless of the priority of the notification target event. The image 176 may be displayed in sequence. Further, instead of the configuration, when a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the notification target event is assigned according to the priority of the notification target event regardless of the order of occurrence of the notification target event. The corresponding abnormality notification image 176 may be sequentially displayed.

(46) When a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the main display device 41 and is sub. The display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to return to the initial positions. This makes it possible to pay attention to the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41.

(47) When a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is not the main display device 41 but the sub display device 43. , 44 may be displayed. This makes it possible to make the abnormality notification image 176 stand out.

(48) Another embodiment relating to the display of the common display symbol in the common display unit 211 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b). FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining another form relating to the display of the common display symbol. As shown in FIG. 98A, in each display mode, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the main display device 41. There is. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a main symbol and a sub symbol are arranged in a predetermined order as display symbols of the decorative symbol 261. In this case, in the first display mode, the same main symbols and sub-symbols as those in the first embodiment are arranged, and the arrangement mode of the main symbols and sub-symbols is also the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, although the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are set in the second display mode as well, the types of the main symbol and the sub symbol set in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are different, and the main symbol to be displayed is displayed. And the number of sub-symbols is larger than that of the first display mode. In both the first display mode and the second display mode, the decorative symbols 261 of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity on the display surface. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), on the display surface, three decorative symbols 261 are stopped and displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine decorative symbols 261 of 3 × 3 are displayed. It is designed to be stopped and displayed. Further, on the display surface, there are five effective lines, that is, a left line L1 which is a vertical line on the left side, a middle line L2 which is a vertical line on the center side, a right line L3 which is a vertical line on the right side, and a diagonal line falling to the right. A certain downward-sloping line L4 and an upward-sloping diagonal line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbols are formed in a state where the combination of the decorative symbols 261 with the same number is attached to one of the effective lines. When the variation display of columns Z1 to Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

In the configuration in which the decorative symbols 261 are displayed as described above, the common display unit 211 is set with the same number of unit display units 262a to 262i as the number of decorative symbols 261 that are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Specifically, the unit display units 262a to 262i are also set in the upper, middle, and lower stages in correspondence with the design rows Z1 to Z3 being set in the upper, middle, and lower stages, and are further decorated. Corresponding to the fact that three symbols 261 are stopped and displayed in the horizontal direction in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, three unit display units 262a to 262i in the upper, middle, and lower rows are also present in the horizontal direction. Then, the common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 that is stopped and displayed on the left side of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed on the first unit display unit 262a on the upper left, and the upper unit display unit 262b at the center of the upper row is displayed on the upper side. The common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 that is stopped and displayed on the center side of the symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the right side of the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the third unit display unit 262c on the upper right. The common display symbol corresponding to 261 is stopped and displayed. Further, the 4th unit display unit 262d on the left side of the middle row displays the common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 stopped and displayed on the left side of the symbol row Z2 in the middle row, and the 5th unit display unit 262e in the center of the middle row displays the stop. The common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 that is stopped and displayed on the center side of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the sixth unit display unit 262f on the right side of the middle row is stopped and displayed on the right side of the middle symbol row Z2. The common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 is stopped and displayed. Further, the common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 that is stopped and displayed on the left side in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed on the 7th unit display unit 262g at the lower left, and the 8th unit display unit 262h at the center of the lower row is displayed at the lower stage. The common display symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol 261 that is stopped and displayed on the center side of the symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the 9th unit display unit 262i at the lower right is the decoration that is stopped and displayed on the right side of the lower symbol column Z3. The common display symbol corresponding to the symbol 261 is stopped and displayed. As a result, the common display symbol corresponding to each of the decorative symbols 261 stopped and displayed at each position of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be displayed on the common display unit 211.

In the situation where the effect for the game round is executed in the above configuration and the decorative symbol 261 corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery process of the game round is not stopped and displayed, the common display unit 211 displays the variation of the common display symbol. It will be done. During this variation display, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the common display unit 211 has a third unit corresponding to the right line L3, which is the right vertical line of the first to ninth unit display units 262a to 262i. Only the display unit 262c, the sixth unit display unit 262f, and the ninth unit display unit 262i are displayed.

FIG. 99 is a time chart showing how the number of unit display units 262a to 262i displayed on the common display unit 211 fluctuates as described above. FIG. 99 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the period of the entire display in which all of the first to ninth unit display units 262a to 262i are displayed on the common display unit 211. 99 (c) indicates a partial display period in which only the third unit display unit 262c, the sixth unit display unit 262f, and the ninth unit display unit 262i are displayed on the common display unit 211.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the start condition of the game round is satisfied at the timing of t1, which is the situation where the entire display is performed on the common display unit 211 as shown in FIG. 99 (b). The game round is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 261 is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 99 (c), the situation where the common display unit 211 is performing the entire display is switched to the situation where the partial display is performed. Then, in the situation where this partial display is performed, the final display (that is, the display of the period during which the stop display of the decorative symbol 261 corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery process and the distribution determination process is forcibly performed) is displayed in the decorative symbol 261. It continues until the timing of t2, which is the timing to start. That is, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 99 (c), the situation where the common display unit 211 partially displays is switched to the situation where the entire display is performed. Further, at the timing when the situation is switched to the situation where the whole display is performed, the variable display of the common display symbol is stopped in all the unit display units 262a to 262i. After that, when the confirmed display time elapses at the timing of t3, the execution period of the game round elapses as shown in FIG. 99 (a). After that, the start condition of the game round is satisfied at the timing of t4. As shown in 99 (a), the game round is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 261 is started. In this case, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 99 (c), the situation where the common display unit 211 is performing the entire display is switched to the situation where the partial display is performed. After that, the same operation as the timing of t1 to the timing of t3 is performed at the timing of t4 to the timing of t6.

During the period in which the decorative symbol 261 is variablely displayed as described above, a part of the decorative symbol 261 is partially displayed on the common display unit 211. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide display area in which the display effect corresponding to the variable display status of the decorative symbol 261 is performed during the period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol 261 is performed. Further, in this situation, the common display unit 211 is not hidden but partially displayed. As a result, for example, even if the decorative symbol 261 is temporarily stopped in the middle of the game as a display effect using the decorative symbol 261, the common display symbol is variablely displayed on the common display unit 211 at that timing. By visually observing, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the game is in the middle of the game.

The area where the partial display is executed is fixed to the third unit display unit 262c, the sixth unit display unit 262f, and the ninth unit display unit 262i corresponding to the right line L3. As a result, it becomes easy to recognize which decorative symbol 261 the partial display corresponds to in the situation where the partial display is executed by the common display unit 211.

Partial display is started at the timing when the game round is started, and the partial display is restored to the full display at the timing when the final display of the decorative symbol 261 is started in the game round. As a result, at the timing when the stop result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery process of the game times is displayed as the decorative symbol 261, the common display symbol corresponding to all the decorative symbols 261 displayed as the stop result is displayed in the common display unit. It is possible to display it on 211, and it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like clearly recognize that the stop result of the decorative symbol 261 and the stop result of the common display symbol correspond to each other.

(49) Another embodiment relating to the display of the common display symbol in the common display unit 211 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the present alternative mode, the decorative symbol 261 is displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the alternative mode of the above (48), and the first to ninth unit display units 262a are displayed as the common display unit 211. ~ 262i is a mode in which one second decorative symbol 207 is displayed in each symbol display area and a common display unit is displayed in the second display mode as in the second display mode in the fifth embodiment. 211 is a mode in which three unit display units 211a to 211c, which are the same number as the number of the symbol display areas, are displayed. In this case, if the display mode is changed in a situation where the game times and the open / close execution mode are not executed, the number of decorative symbols 207 and 261 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 will change. Specifically, when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, a combination of display symbols corresponding to switching is displayed as a combination of the second decorative symbols 207 as in the fifth embodiment. When the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display contents of the decorative symbols 261 on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed so that the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the switching is displayed on the right line L3. It will be adjusted.

On the other hand, in the common display unit 211, the first to ninth unit display units 262a to 262i are displayed in the first display mode, whereas the three unit display units 211a to 211c are displayed in the second display mode. To. FIG. 100 is a time chart showing how the number of unit display units of the common display unit 211 is switched as the display mode is switched. 100 (a) shows the execution period of the first display mode, FIG. 100 (b) shows the execution period of the second display mode, and FIG. 100 (c) shows the first to ninth units displayed on the common display unit 211. The period in which the units 262a to 262i are displayed is shown, and FIG. 100 (d) shows the period in which the unit display units 211a to 211c are displayed in the common display unit 211.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a), it is the first display mode, and as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the first to ninth unit display units 262a to 262i are displayed on the common display unit 211 t1. At the timing of, the mode is switched to the second display mode as shown in FIG. 100 (b). As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), nine unit display units 262a to 262i are displayed on the common display unit 211 at the timing of t1, and three unit display units are displayed on the common display unit 211. The situation is switched to the situation in which the units 211a to 211c are displayed.

In this case, the combination of the common display symbols corresponding to the combination of the jackpot symbols displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5 in the decorative symbol 261 is displayed on any combination of the nine unit display units 262a to 262i. If so, the combination of common display symbols corresponding to the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211 after the change to the second display mode. Further, the combination of the common display symbols corresponding to the combination of the out-of-reach symbols displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5 in the decorative symbol 261 is displayed on any combination of the nine unit display units 262a to 262i. If so, the combination of common display symbols corresponding to the combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211 after the change to the second display mode. If there are two or more combinations of out-of-reach symbols, the combination of common display symbols corresponding to any one of the combinations of out-of-reach symbols is displayed. Further, if the common display symbols displayed on the nine unit display units 211 correspond to a combination of completely off-corresponding symbols that do not even cause reach display, the third unit display corresponding to the right line L3 is displayed. The combination of the common display symbols displayed on the unit 262c, the sixth unit display unit 262f, and the ninth unit display unit 262i is the three unit display units 211a to 211c of the common display unit 211 after the change to the second display mode. Is displayed in.

After that, at the timing of t2, the mode is switched to the first display mode as shown in FIG. 100 (a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), from the situation where the common display unit 211 displays the three unit display units 211a to 211c at the timing of t2, the common display unit 211 displays nine units. The situation is switched to the situation in which units 262a to 262i are displayed. In this case, the combination of the common display symbols displayed on the three unit display units 211a to 211c is the third unit display unit 262c, the sixth unit display unit 262f, and the ninth unit display unit 262a to 262i among the nine unit display units 262a to 262i. The display contents of the nine unit display units 262a to 262i are adjusted so that they are displayed on the nine unit display units 262i.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of decorative symbols displayed at the same time differs depending on the display mode, the common display unit 211 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the number of decorative symbols displayed in each display mode. Is possible. As a result, the player or the manager of the game hall can easily associate the display result of the decorative symbol with the display result of the common display unit 211.

(50) A configuration may be configured in which only a 3D image using 3D image data is displayed. In this case, all the image data corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in a common world coordinate system, and drawing for the main display device 41 is performed from that state. The data, the drawing data for the first sub-display device 43, and the drawing data for the second sub-display device 44 may be created individually. As a result, it is not necessary to individually prepare the world coordinate system corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(51) The camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, a single camera (viewpoint) is used for all the image data arranged in the world coordinate system. The camera may be set in common. Further, the color information such as texture mapping may be set before projection.

(52) Instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 80 is controlled by the distribution control board 71 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the effect control is based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 80 may be configured to control the distribution control board 71. Further, instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 are separately provided, a configuration in which these are provided as one control device may be used, and one of the functions is the main control device 60. Both of these functions may be integrated in the main control device 60.

(53) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A first storage means (memory module 83) that stores information in advance and
A second storage means (VRAM86) that stores information read from the first storage means, and
A storage specifying means for specifying whether or not predetermined information subject to a transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1007 and S1008 in the advance transfer control unit 94) and
When it is specified by the storage specifying means that the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. When it is specified by the storage specifying means that the information is specified, the transfer executing means (step S1009 and step S1010 in the advance transfer control unit 94) that does not transfer the predetermined information from the first storage means is executed. Function) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the information stored in advance in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, and when the information is used, the information is not read directly from the first storage means but is read from the second storage means. It can be read from. In this case, when the predetermined information is the target of the transfer instruction, if the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is read from the first storage means to the second storage means. If the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is not transferred from the first storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined information from being further transferred from the first storage means even though the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means. It is possible to improve the efficiency of reading information from.

Feature A2. When the storage specifying means specifies that the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means, the storage area of the second storage means in which the predetermined information is stored is the transfer instruction. When the storage area is different from the storage area of the storage destination specified in the above, the predetermined information stored in the separate storage area is used to store the predetermined information in the storage area of the storage destination. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it includes an executing means (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the advance transfer control unit 94).

According to the feature A2, when a transfer instruction is issued for the predetermined information that has already been read by the second storage means, the predetermined information is copied between the storage areas of the second storage means. This makes it possible to store the predetermined information in the storage area designated as the transfer instruction while eliminating the need for further reading of the predetermined information from the first storage means.

Feature A3. The storage specifying means uses a search information group (search table 125) in which a correspondence relationship between the type of the storage area of the second storage means and the type of information stored in the storage area is set. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that it specifies whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means.

According to the feature A3, since the search information group is provided, it is possible to efficiently identify whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read by the second storage means. It will be possible.

Feature A4. When the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the storage destination designated by the transfer instruction in the second storage means, the correspondence between the type of the storage area of the storage destination and the type of the predetermined information is new. The game according to feature A3, which comprises a content updating means (a function of executing the process of step S1012 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for updating the content of the search information group so as to be set in. Machine.

According to the feature A4, when the information is transferred to the storage area of the second storage means, the content of the search information group is updated so that the correspondence between the storage area and the information is reflected. To. This makes it possible to make the contents of the search information group correspond to the latest storage state of the second storage means.

Feature A5. In the transfer instruction, the identification information (address ID) for specifying the area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means is provided as the information for causing the transfer execution means to specify the type of the predetermined information. Provided,
The game according to feature A3 or A4, wherein the search information group is set with the specific information or information included in the specific information as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information. Machine.

According to the feature A5, the information provided by the transfer instruction is set in the search information group. As a result, when the search information group is used to specify whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means, the information provided in the transfer instruction is used. It can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when the identification is performed.

Feature A6. The specific information includes information corresponding to the start address of the area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein information corresponding to the start address is set in the search information group as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information.

According to the feature A6, since the information for specifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group is the information corresponding to the start address, all the addresses of the area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means. It is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of predetermined information in the search information group as compared with the configuration including the information corresponding to, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search information group in order to specify whether or not the information is displayed.

Feature A7. The predetermined information is information stored over a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means.
The type information set for specifying the type of the storage area in the search information group is the identification information for identifying the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of A6.

According to the feature A7, since a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the type information in the search information group. It becomes.

Feature A8. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas and has a plurality of storage areas.
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order, and the storage process of the information in the storage area of the last order is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein information is stored in an area.

According to the feature A8, since the storage area of the second storage means loops as the execution target of the storage process, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be made appropriate. Further, since the plurality of storage areas of the second storage means are sequentially executed targets of the storage process in a predetermined order, the processing configuration for specifying the storage areas to be executed of the storage process is simplified. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (image data for starting fluctuation) used by the control means when a predetermined event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs at least in a predetermined situation.
The optional information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the second storage means so that the optional information is stored in the second storage means in the predetermined situation. The second storage means is provided with a storage maintenance means (a function of executing the processes of steps S903 to S906 in the effecting CPU 82) so as to be stored in the storage area to which the storage process is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature A8.

According to the feature A9, even if the storage area of the second storage means loops as the execution target of the storage process, arbitrary information will continue to be stored in the second storage means under a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to ensure that arbitrary information has already been read out to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs, and from the first storage means to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs. Does not require the transfer of arbitrary information. In particular, according to this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated storage area for storing arbitrary information in the second storage means, so that the degree of freedom when using the storage area of the second storage means is increased. Be done.

Feature A10. The storage maintenance means is characterized in that the arbitrary information is stored in the storage area to which the storage process is executed in the second storage means by utilizing the arbitrary information stored in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to the feature A9.

According to the feature A10, in order to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation, it is not necessary to periodically read the arbitrary information from the first storage means. Therefore, it is possible to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation while increasing the information reading efficiency.

Feature A11. The speed required for reading information from the second storage means is faster than that required for reading from the first storage means.
A1 to A10, wherein the game machine includes control means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the information transferred to the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A11, the speed required for reading the information is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage means. The information is read by the second storage means, and the read information is used for control by the control means. By executing this, the time required for reading information in the control means can be shortened. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the above feature A1 or the like, it is possible to suitably transfer the information to the second storage means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A first storage means (memory module 83) that stores control information in advance, and
A second storage means (VRAM86) that stores the control information read from the first storage means, and
An instruction control means (CPU 82 for production) that provides instruction information (drawing list), and
A transfer executing means (pre-transfer control unit 94) for making the control information specified in the instruction information read into the second storage means, and
A control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the control information according to the instruction information, and
With
The instruction information provided by the instruction control means is set with storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the control information is stored in the first storage means.
When the transfer executing means executes a transfer process using the storage source information so that the control information specified in the instruction information is read by the second storage means, the transfer executing means is said to be the first. 2 The storage destination information (identification information) for specifying the area from which the control information has been read by the storage means is set in the instruction information, and the instruction information is set.
The second control executing means uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution means to read the control information specified in the instruction information. A gaming machine characterized by reading the control information from the storage area of the storage means.

According to the feature B1, when the control information is transferred to the second storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the area for specifying the area in which the control information is stored in the second storage means is specified. The storage destination information is set as the instruction information. As a result, it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, so that the amount of information of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means can be suppressed. Further, when the control information is actually transferred to the second storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is set as the storage destination information in the instruction information, so that the information is stored. It is possible to improve the reliability of the contents of the prior information.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the transfer executing means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to the feature B2, when the transfer of the control information is executed according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is the storage source. It is set in the instruction information so as to overwrite the information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of instruction information provided to the control execution means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the transfer execution means overwrites the storage destination information with respect to the storage source information.

Feature B4. A storage area (storage area 121 for pre-transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means, and a storage area (storage area 121) for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the transfer execution means is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that a storage area 122) for post-transfer is distinguished from the storage area 122).

According to the feature B4, the storage area in which the instruction information provided by the instruction control means and the instruction information in which the transfer of the control information is completed and the storage destination information is set is stored is clearly distinguished. , It is possible to clearly distinguish these instructional information.

Feature B5. As the control information, there is predetermined control information (decoded image data) that cannot be read out to the second storage means.
When the predetermined control information is set in the instruction information, the transfer executing means is described as processing for reading the predetermined control information to the second storage means and information corresponding to the predetermined control information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that both processes of setting the storage destination information in the instruction information are not executed.

According to the feature B5, for the predetermined control information that is not to be read out to the second storage means, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the transfer execution means, so that the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution means. It is possible to prevent it from being executed unnecessarily.

Feature B6. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas and has a plurality of storage areas.
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order.
The transfer executing means is
When the transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order is executed in the instruction information, the control information that is the execution target of the transfer process in the second storage means. Means for setting the information corresponding to the read area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94), and
When the transfer process using the storage source information is executed in the instruction information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order with respect to the predetermined order, the second storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting information corresponding to the difference in the address of the area from which the control information has been read as the storage destination information in the instruction information corresponding to the next order with respect to the area from which the control information has been read. (Function of executing the process of step S1103 in the advance transfer control unit 94) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5.

According to the feature B6, in the instruction information, the information corresponding to the difference in the addresses is set as the storage destination information for the control information in which the execution order of the transfer processing is the next order with respect to the predetermined order. , It is possible to suppress the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature B7. The predetermined control information is stored over a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means.
When the transfer executing means executes a transfer process using the storage source information so that the predetermined control information is read into the plurality of storage areas, the transfer execution means sets the plurality of storage areas into a group. Features B1 to B1 to include a means for setting identification information for identifying as a storage area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94). The gaming machine according to any one of B6.

According to the feature B7, since a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, the amount of information of the storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. Is possible.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and a series of games are based on the fact that the control element executes processing according to a program read from the read-only storage element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only storage element, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element for performing sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the processing being executed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably read information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44), and
An image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) that provides instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means, and
A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the content instructed in the instruction information.
With
The instruction control means includes a plurality of provision means (a function of executing the processes of steps S907 to S921 in the effect CPU 82) that provide a plurality of the instruction information in order to display an image of one update timing on the display means. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature C1, a plurality of instruction information may be provided in order to display an image of one update timing. As a result, the amount of information of one instruction information provided by the instruction control means becomes extremely large, or various information is mixed in one instruction information, and the processing load of the display control means increases. It is possible to suitably provide instruction information while suppressing the occurrence of events such as storage.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the plurality of providing means sets the image data included in the first type and the image data included in the second type as objects to be used in the different instruction information. ..

According to the feature C2, the usage instruction information of the image data is set in different instruction information according to the type of the image data. As a result, the display control means only needs to execute the process corresponding to the type of the instruction information, and the distinction of which type the image data to be used in the instruction information corresponds to is the target of use. It is not necessary to individually perform the display control means for each image data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means.

Feature C3. The display control means
A first display control means (3D control unit 97) that causes the display means to display an image by using the data created based on arranging the three-dimensional data as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space.
A second display control means (2D control unit 96) that causes the display means to display an image by using two-dimensional data other than the three-dimensional data.
With
The image data included in the first type is data used by the first display control means, and the image data included in the second type is data used by the second display control means. The gaming machine according to feature C2.

The display control means executes different processes depending on whether the image is displayed by using the image data of the three-dimensional data or the image is displayed by using the image data of the two-dimensional data. In this case, according to the feature C3, since the image data of the three-dimensional data and the image data of the two-dimensional data are not mixedly set in one instruction information, the display control means is the three-dimensional data and the display control means. It is possible to identify which of the two-dimensional data corresponds to in the instruction information unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control means.

Feature C4. In the case where the instruction control means uses a predetermined number or more of the image data in order to display the image of one update timing in the display means, the display means displays the image of one update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number of the instruction information to be provided is increased as compared with the case where the image data less than a predetermined number is used.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to prevent the number of image data set as the target of use in one instruction information from becoming extremely large. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of one instruction information provided from the instruction control means to some extent, and it is possible to prevent the transmission period of one instruction information from becoming extremely long. ..

Feature C5. When a plurality of the instruction information is provided in order to display an image of one update timing in the display means, the plurality of instruction information are collectively used to display an image of one update timing. Aggregate information setting means for setting information indicating that the information is to be performed (a function of executing the processes of steps S912 and S918 in the effect CPU 82 in the first embodiment, and a step in the effect CPU 82 in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which comprises (functions of executing the processes of steps S2506 to S2507 and steps S2513 to S2514).

According to the feature C5, even when a plurality of instruction information is provided to display an image of one update timing, the display control means indicates that the plurality of instruction information are aggregated and used. Information for making it identifiable is set by the instruction control means. This makes it possible for the display control means to grasp that the plurality of instruction information is for displaying an image at one update timing.

Feature C6. When the display control means provides the first instruction information and the second instruction information as the instruction information for displaying the image of one update timing in the display means, the first instruction information and the second instruction are provided. The game according to any one of features C1 to C5, which comprises an aggregating means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for aggregating information into one instruction information. Machine.

According to the feature C6, even if a plurality of instruction information is provided to the display control means in order to display an image of one update timing, the display control means aggregates the plurality of instruction information into one instruction information. Will be done. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of instruction information when executing display control according to the instruction information in the display control means.

Feature C7. The display control means includes a transfer execution means (pre-transfer control unit 94) that makes the image data specified in the instruction information read into a read / storage means (VRAM86).
When the first instruction information and the second instruction information are the targets of the transfer process by the transfer execution means, the aggregation means combines the first instruction information and the second instruction information into one instruction information. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which is characterized in that it is aggregated.

According to the feature C7, since the image data specified in the instruction information is read in advance by the reading storage means, it is possible to increase the processing speed when the image data is used in the display control means. In this case, since the plurality of instruction information for displaying the image of one update timing is aggregated according to the case where the transfer processing is performed by the transfer execution means, the triggers of the advance transfer are a plurality of instructions. It can also be used as an opportunity to aggregate information.

Feature C8. The display control means includes a plurality of instruction information storage areas (first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means.
When a plurality of the instruction information is provided in order to display an image of one update timing in the display means, the plurality of the instruction information are sequentially stored in a plurality of the instruction information storage areas having consecutive addresses. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to the feature C8, since a plurality of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing is stored in an instruction information storage area having consecutive addresses, the processing configuration for reading the plurality of instruction information is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first storage means (memory module 83) that stores information in advance and
A second storage means (VRAM86) that stores information read from the first storage means, and
A control means (production LSI85) that executes control using the information read by the second storage means, and
With
A plurality of storage areas are provided in the second storage means, and address information is set in each of the plurality of storage areas.
The control means utilizes aggregated designation information (index No. or identification information) for collectively designating a plurality of the storage areas, which is a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that information can be read out from the plurality of storage areas.

According to the feature D1, it is possible to collectively read information from a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregated designated information by using the aggregated designated information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the storage area to be read out of the information, as compared with the case where the address information is specified for each of the plurality of storage areas and the information is read from the plurality of storage areas. It becomes.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the storage area of the target to be aggregated and designated by the aggregation designation information has continuous corresponding address information.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to prevent the correspondence between the aggregated designated information and the storage area designated by the aggregated designated information from becoming complicated.

Feature D3. The control means uses identification information different from the address information set corresponding to a part of the storage areas of the plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregated designated information, and stores the part of the storage areas. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein information can be read from the area.

According to the feature D3, even when a plurality of storage areas are collectively designated by using the aggregated designated information, the information can be read from a part of the storage areas among the plurality of storage areas. It will be possible.

Feature D4. The control means
A reading means (transfer controller 92) for reading information from the storage area corresponding to the aggregated designated information in the second storage means, and
A control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that instructs the reading means to read information and executes control using the information read by the reading means.
With
The reading means identifies the storage area corresponding to the reading instruction by the control executing means by using the correspondence information group (index table 128) in which the correspondence between the aggregated designated information and the address information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the feature D4, since the configuration uses the correspondence information group, it is possible to efficiently specify the type of the storage area corresponding to the aggregated designated information in the reading means.

Feature D5. The control means includes changing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2403 in the advance transfer control unit 94) capable of changing the relationship between the aggregated designated information and the plurality of the storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to the feature D5, since the relationship between the aggregated designated information and the plurality of storage areas can be changed as needed, it is possible to flexibly use the aggregated designation of the storage area using the aggregated designated information. It becomes.

Feature D6. The control means uses the first aggregate designation information (index No. 1) which is a part of the storage area provided in the second storage means and for collectively designating a plurality of the storage areas. Therefore, it is possible to read information from the plurality of storage areas, and to collectively specify the plurality of the storage areas which are a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that information can be read from the plurality of storage areas by using the second aggregated designated information (index No. 2).

According to the feature D6, the storage area of the second storage means can be distinguished into a plurality of aggregation areas. This makes it possible to set a plurality of aggregation areas according to the purpose.

Feature D7. The description according to feature D6, wherein the number of the storage areas designated by the first aggregation designation information and the number of the storage areas designated by the second aggregation designation information can be different from each other. Game machine.

According to the feature D7, in a configuration in which a plurality of aggregation areas can be set according to the purpose, the degree of freedom in setting each aggregation area can be increased.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines include a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and a series of games are based on the fact that the control element executes processing according to a program read from the read-only storage element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element, a read-only storage element, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element for performing sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the processing being executed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to suitably read information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44), and
An image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) that provides instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means, and
A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the content instructed in the instruction information.
With
The display control means
A first control means (pre-transfer control unit 94) that executes a first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means.
A second control means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes a second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the control means for executing the first control according to the predetermined instruction information and the control means for executing the second control according to the predetermined instruction information are separately provided for the first control means and the second control means. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to distribute the processing load as compared with the configuration in which both the first control and the second control are collectively executed by one control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second control means executes the second control according to the predetermined instruction information after the first control means becomes the execution target of the first control. ..

According to the feature E2, predetermined instruction information is sequentially used in the first control means and the second control means. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect without providing the same instruction information more than once from the instruction control means.

Feature E3. A read storage means (VRAM86) for storing the image data read from the image information storage means is provided.
The first control means is intended to bring the image data set as a target of use in the predetermined instruction information into a state of being read by the read / store means.
The second control means causes the display means to display an image based on the use of the image data read by the read / storage means according to the contents instructed in the predetermined instruction information. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

According to the feature E3, the control of reading the image data to the reading storage means according to the predetermined instruction information is performed by the first control means, and the control of displaying the image by using the image data according to the predetermined instruction information is the second control. It is done by means. In this case, in a configuration in which the processing load is distributed between the first control means and the second control means, the control contents executed by the first control means and the second control means can be clearly different from each other. ..

Feature E4. The first control means is the predetermined in a situation where the second control means is executing a process of displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing. The feature E3 is characterized in that the image data is read by the read / storage means according to the predetermined instruction information for displaying the image at the update timing after the update timing of the above. Game machine.

According to the feature E4, the image data used thereafter is read and stored by the control by the first control means independent of the period during which the process of displaying the image is executed by the second control means. It is possible to transfer to the means in advance.

Feature E5. The instruction information provided by the instruction control means is set with storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the image data is stored in the image information storage means.
When the image data specified in the instruction information is read by the read storage means by executing the transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means stores the read data. The storage destination information (identification information) for identifying the area from which the image data is read by the means is set in the instruction information, and the instruction information is set.
The second control means uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control means to read the image data specified in the instruction information. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or E4, characterized in that the image data is read out from the storage area of the storage means.

According to the feature E5, when the image data is transferred to the read storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the storage destination information for specifying the area where the image data is stored in the read / storage means is provided. It is set in the instruction information. As a result, it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, so that the amount of information of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means can be suppressed. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the read / storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the read / store to which the image data is transferred is set as the storage destination information in the instruction information, so that the content of the storage destination information. It is possible to increase the reliability of.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first control means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to the feature E6, when the image data is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the read / storage means to which the image data is transferred overwrites the storage source information. And set in the instruction information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of instruction information provided to the second control means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the first control means overwrites the storage destination information with respect to the storage source information.

Feature E8. A storage area (storage area 121 for pre-transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means, and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that (storage area 122 for post-transfer) and is distinguished.

According to the feature E8, the storage area in which the instruction information provided by the instruction control means and the instruction information in which the transfer of the image data is completed and the storage destination information is set is stored is clearly distinguished. It is possible to clearly distinguish these instructional information.

Feature E9. As the image data, there is predetermined image data (decoded image data) that cannot be read out to the read-out storage means.
When the predetermined image data is set as a target for use in the instruction information, the first control means is described as a process for reading the predetermined image data to the read storage means and information corresponding to the predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein both processes of setting the storage destination information in the instruction information are not executed.

According to the feature E9, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the first control means for the predetermined image data that is not to be read into the read storage means, so that the storage destination information is set in the first control means. It is possible to prevent it from being executed unnecessarily.

Feature E10. The read-out storage means has a plurality of storage areas and has a plurality of storage areas.
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order.
The first control means
When the transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order is executed in the instruction information, the image data to which the transfer process is executed is read by the read storage means. A means for setting the information corresponding to the output area as the storage destination information in the instruction information (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94) and
When the transfer process using the storage source information is executed in the instruction information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order with respect to the predetermined order, the read / storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting information corresponding to the difference in the addresses of the areas from which the image data has been read as the storage destination information in the instruction information corresponding to the following order with respect to the area from which the image data has been read (pre-forwarding). The function of executing the process of step S1103 in the control unit 94) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E9.

According to the feature E10, in the instruction information, the information corresponding to the difference in the addresses is set as the storage destination information for the image data in which the execution order of the transfer processing is the next order with respect to the predetermined order. It is possible to reduce the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature E11. The specific image data has a configuration in which the specific image data is stored over a plurality of storage areas in the read-out storage means.
When the specific image data is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means stores the plurality of storage areas as a group. Features E5 to E10 provided with means for setting identification information for identifying as an area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature E11, since a plurality of storage areas in the read storage means are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the storage destination information set in the instruction information. It will be possible.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44), and
An image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display means using the image data, and
With
In the image information storage means, as moving image data in which a plurality of decoded image data are created by executing the decoding process, reference data (I) which is a reference when the decoded image data is created in the decoding process. Special moving image data (special moving image data 185) that includes (picture data) and does not include difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can provide a difference with respect to the reference data when the decoding process is executed. ) Is memorized.

According to the feature F1, since the special moving image data including the reference data is provided without including the difference data, the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is usually obtained. It is possible to obtain higher image quality than the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data of. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to handle image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using the area for reading the normal still image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the special moving image data includes a plurality of the reference data.

According to the feature F2, by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data.

Feature F3. The game according to feature F2, wherein a plurality of decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data are used according to a usage order defined in the special moving image data. Machine.

According to the feature F3, when a plurality of decoded image data created from the special moving image data are used, it is not necessary to set the order of use separately from the special moving image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order in which the image data is used, as compared with the configuration in which the decoded image data is stored in advance in the image information storage means as normal still image data.

Feature F4. The special moving image data is provided with a decoding means (video decoder 95) for executing the decoding process.
The decoding means said the special moving image in a situation where the display control means is executing a process for displaying an image whose update timing is earlier than the update timing at which the image using the decoded image data is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the decoding process is executed on the data.

According to the feature F4, during the period in which the process for displaying an image using other image data is being executed by the display control means, a special moving image is provided by the decoding means provided separately from the display control means. Image data decoding processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming the image display waiting period while not increasing the processing load of the display control means.

Feature F5. Attached image data is stored in the image information storage means in correspondence with the special moving image data.
The gaming machine includes a decoding means (video decoder 95) that executes the decoding process on the special image data.
The decoding means is characterized in that the decoding process is executed on the special moving image data in a situation where the process for displaying an image using the attached image data is executed by the display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, since the decoding process of the special moving image data is executed in the situation where the processing for displaying the image using the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data is executed, the special moving image data It is possible to execute the decoding process of the special moving image data by using the period during which the process for displaying the image corresponding to is being executed.

Feature F6. The attached image data displays an image corresponding to the immediately preceding update timing with respect to the image displayed using the first decoded image data to be used among the decoded image data created from the special moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which is characterized by being image data for making the data.

According to the feature F6, it is displayed using the attached image data in the configuration in which the decoding process of the special moving image data is executed by using the period during which the process for displaying the image using the attached image data is executed. It is possible to ensure the continuity between the image and the image displayed by using the decoded image data.

Feature F7. The display control means performs a predetermined process on the predetermined image data stored in the image information storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step S810 in the 3D control unit 97). It has a function to execute the processing of
When displaying an image corresponding to the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined processing is executed on the decoded image data by the predetermined processing executing means. It is a composition,
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the image information storage means to the read storage means (VRAM 86, register 93).
The read storage means includes a first read area (VRAM86) in which the predetermined image data is stored and a second read area (register 93) in which the decoded image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F6.

According to the feature F7, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the image information storage means, but is used after being read once by the reading storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area for reading predetermined image data and a second reading area for reading decoded image data of special moving image data, so that the storage means can be used according to each application. The area for reading is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, the area can be specified according to the type of the image data.

In this case, special image data having the configuration of the above feature F1 and not including the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read into the second read area instead of the first read area, it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the image information storage means.
The gaming machine
A first read execution means for reading all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when a predetermined read timing is reached.
In a situation where the decoded image data corresponding to the moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second read area, the decoded image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second read area. In this case, a second read execution means for overwriting the decoded image data with respect to the decoded image data already stored in the second read area, and
The gaming machine according to the feature F7, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature F8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first read area, it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, the decoded image data is read into the second read area as needed, and when new decoded image data is created, the second read area is overwritten. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, special image data having the configuration of the above feature F1 and not including the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read into the second read area instead of the first read area, it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the first read execution means reads all of a plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to generate a state in which all of a plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out in the first read area at an early stage.

Feature F10. Described in any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a 3D image. Game machine.

According to the feature F10, when the texture data is used, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) and
An image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 117 for sub, second frame area 118 for sub), and the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is used as the display means. A display control means (production LSI85) that causes the display means to display an image based on the output, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the display means, a first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided.
The display control means creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means in a part area of the setting storage means, and causes the second display means to display the image. 2 Aggregation setting means for setting drawing data in another area of the setting storage means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing drawing processing in a drawing area for sub-display in the 2D control unit 96, a second embodiment. In the form, the gaming machine is characterized by having a function of executing drawing data synthesis processing for sub-display in the 3D control unit 97).

According to the feature G1, the first drawing data for displaying the image on the first display means and the second drawing data for displaying the image on the second display means are created in the same setting storage means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of setting storage means even when there are a plurality of display means, and it is possible to display images on a plurality of display means while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the setting storage means. It will be possible to realize.

Feature G2. A part of the setting storage means in which the first drawing data is created is defined in the first setting area (odd line area), and the setting storage means in which the second drawing data is created. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the other area is defined as a second setting area (an even-numbered line area).

According to the feature G2, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the area in which the first drawing data is set in the setting storage means is fixed. At the same time, the area in which the second drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to allocate an area in the setting storage means each time the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature G3. The first drawing portion data constituting a part of the first drawing data exists between a plurality of second drawing portion data forming a part of the second drawing data, and the second drawing portion data is a plurality of said. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the arrangement order of the data in the setting storage means is set so as to exist between the first drawing portion data.

According to the feature G3, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, each of the first drawing data and the second drawing data is set as a whole of the setting storage means. It is possible to set it in a distributed manner.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are alternately arranged in a data arrangement order in at least a predetermined direction in the setting storage means.

According to the feature G4, the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are arranged alternately, so that each drawing portion data can be output as an image signal in the order in which they are arranged in a predetermined direction. , It is possible to alternately output the image signal to the first display means and the second display means.

Feature G5. The aggregation setting means has one of the features G1 to G4, which is characterized in that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are in a state set in the setting storage means. The game machine described.

According to the feature G5, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data are set. It is possible to duplicate.

Feature G6. The aggregate setting means is characterized in that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in the setting storage means. Feature The gaming machine described in G5.

In the feature G6, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, both the images of the first display means and the second display means are updated at one update timing. It becomes possible to do.

Feature G7. The display control means has the image signal corresponding to the first drawing unit data constituting a part of the first drawing data and a part of the second drawing data based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once. The features G1 to G6 are characterized by having a signal output means (a function of executing signal output processing in the second display circuit 99) for outputting the image signal corresponding to the second drawing unit data constituting the second display unit. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature G7, both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once. As a result, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the update of the image in the first display means and the update of the image in the second display means are started at the same time. It becomes possible to proceed at the same time as it becomes possible.

Feature G8. The game according to feature G7, wherein the first drawing unit data is the smallest unit data in the first drawing data, and the second drawing unit data is the smallest unit data in the second drawing data. Machine.

According to the feature G8, in a configuration in which both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once, those images Since the data to be output of the signal is the smallest unit of data, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the image signal output process for one signal output trigger from becoming extremely long.

Feature G9.1 The first drawing unit data and the second drawing unit data to be output of the image signal by the signal output trigger once are set in an adjacent order in the data arrangement order in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature G7 or G8, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature G9, in the setting storage means, only the adjacent drawing unit data is set as the output target of the image signal for one signal output trigger, and the first display means is used for the occurrence of one signal output trigger. It is possible to output both the image signal of the above and the image signal to the second display means.

Feature G10. The first drawing data is created by using the image data read from the image information storage means in order to create the first drawing data.
The second drawing data is described in any one of features G1 to G9, which is created by using the image data read from the image information storage means in order to create the second drawing data. Game machine.

According to the feature G10, the first drawing data is individually created using the image data, and the second drawing data is individually created using the image data. As a result, it is not necessary to store the image data for simultaneously creating both the first drawing data and the second drawing data in the image information storage means in advance.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44), and
An image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) that provides instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of an image to be displayed on the display means, and
The image data is stored in the setting storage means (main first frame area 114, main second frame area 115, sub first frame area 117, sub second frame area 118) according to the contents instructed in the instruction information. ), A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the display means, a first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided.
As the instruction information, the instruction control means includes information for designating the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means and an object for displaying the image on the second display means. A gaming machine characterized in that both of the information for designating the image data can provide aggregated instruction information (drawing list shown in FIG. 35) that is aggregated and set.

According to the feature H1, the information for displaying the image in the plurality of display means is provided to the display control means in a state of being aggregated in the aggregate instruction information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of instruction information provided from the instruction control means to the display control means as compared with the configuration in which the instruction information is individually provided for each of the plurality of display means.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the aggregated instruction information is set with information for displaying an image in each of the first display means and the second display means at the same update timing. ..

According to the feature H2, since the information for displaying the image by each display means is aggregated and set in the aggregate instruction information at the same update timing, the display control means is all set in the aggregate instruction information. Information may be treated as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and it is not necessary to execute a process for determining which update timing of a plurality of different update timings corresponds to. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing executed by using the aggregated instruction information in the display control means.

Feature H3. A plurality of the image data are specified as the objects to be used in the instruction information.
The display control means stores a plurality of the image data designated as objects to be used in the instruction information in the order according to the setting order information (display order priority data) set in the instruction information. It is a configuration that is set sequentially for the means,
In the aggregated instruction information, the setting order is which of the first display means and the second display means for displaying the image, the image data designated as the object to be used is the data for displaying the image. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is specified by using information.

According to the feature H3, which display means corresponds to the image data designated as the object of use by using the setting order information for specifying the setting order of the image data by the display control means. Be identified. As a result, it is not necessary to set the dedicated information for specifying the type of the display means to be set in the aggregate instruction information, so that the number of types of information set in the aggregate instruction information can be suppressed. ..

Feature H4. In the aggregated instruction information, the set order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying the image on the first display means is the information group of the first order range (the first display target reference value or more). The setting order information corresponding to the image data included in the second display target reference value) and used to display the image on the second display means in the aggregated instruction information is the second order range. The gaming machine according to feature H3, which is included in the information group (value equal to or higher than the second display target reference value).

According to the feature H4, in a configuration in which the type of display means to be set is specified by using the setting order information, which display means the image data designated as the use target corresponds to is set in the setting order. Clearly distinguished in information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the type of display means to be set in the display control means.

Feature H5. The instruction control means includes an instruction information creating means (a function of executing a drawing list creation process in the effect CPU 82) for creating the instruction information by referring to a reference information group (execution target table for display control).
The reference information group includes type information (display target data) corresponding to the type of display means to be displayed as information for specifying the type of the image data to be used in the instruction information creating means. Individual order information (display order data) corresponding to the setting order to the setting storage means is set in the plurality of types of image data to be used by the display means to be displayed.
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, wherein the instruction information creating means derives the setting order information based on the type information and the individual order information.

According to the feature H5, the setting order information is not set as it is in the reference information group, but the type information and the individual order information are set, and the setting order information is set by using the type information and the individual order information. Is derived. As a result, when setting the reference information group at the game machine design stage, it is only necessary to set the type of the display means to be set and the setting order among the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display means. , There is no need to set the final setting order information. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

Feature H6. The instruction information creating means executes predetermined arithmetic processing (processing of step S1305 and step S1306 in the effect CPU 82) with respect to the numerical information corresponding to the individual order information by using the numerical information corresponding to the type information. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the numerical information derived by the predetermined arithmetic processing is used as the setting order information.

According to the feature H6, when the set order information is derived by using the type information and the individual order information set in the reference information group, a predetermined arithmetic process is executed by using the type information and the individual order information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the setting order information.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying an image, and
Displacement drive control means (a function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) that displaces the predetermined display means, and
A display control means (effect CPU 82, effect LSI 85) that executes display control of the predetermined display means, and
With
The display control means is a displacement-corresponding image (image 153 for rotation period) in which it is difficult for a player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation. ) Is displayed on the predetermined display means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) having a function of executing the processing of steps S181 to S1812 in the effect CPU 82). Machine.

According to the feature I1, in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, the displacement corresponding image in which it is difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation is displayed by the predetermined display means. Displacement. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined display means is displaced without the player noticing it, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I2. The predetermined displacement operation is a predetermined rotational operation in the predetermined display means.
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the displacement-corresponding image is an image having no directionality in a direction along a display surface of the predetermined display means.

According to the feature I2, since the displacement-corresponding image is an image having no directionality in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means, the predetermined display means can be used in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined rotation operation. By displaying the displacement-corresponding image, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is rotating.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the displacement-corresponding image is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on a non-displacement display surface.

According to the feature I3, since the displacement-corresponding image is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on the non-displacement display surface, the player is informed that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. It becomes possible to make it difficult to identify.

More specifically, regarding the configuration of the feature I3, "The displacement-corresponding image is a member that does not follow the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. It is displayed so that the orientation of the display is not changed in relation to the above. "

Feature I4. Equipped with a specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image
The predetermined display means has a display surface of the specific display means and a display surface of the predetermined display means from the front of the game machine at a position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces. It is a configuration in which the predetermined displacement operation is performed in a predetermined posture so that both of the above can be visually recognized.
When the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation, the displacement-corresponding control means provides the displacement-corresponding image in a region existing around the display surface of the predetermined display means on the display surface of the specific display means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that an image corresponding to the above is displayed.

According to the feature I4, in a situation where the predetermined display means performs a predetermined displacement operation, a part of the display surface of the specific display means exists around the display surface of the predetermined display means, and one of the display surfaces thereof. In the area of the unit, an image corresponding to the displacement-corresponding image in the predetermined display means is displayed. This makes it possible to display an image related to the displacement-corresponding image displayed on the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means performing the predetermined displacement operation, and the predetermined display means and the specific display means. It is possible to perform an integrated display effect in.

Feature I5. The predetermined display means is characterized in that it performs the predetermined displacement operation in a situation where the display surface of the specific display means is arranged at a position over the entire circumference of the display surface of the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to the feature I4.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the player illusion that the display surface of the predetermined display means is a part of the display surface of the specific display means, and the game that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. It becomes easier to display an image that makes it difficult for a person to recognize it.

Feature I6. When the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation, the predetermined correspondence control means straddles the boundary between the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means as the displacement correspondence image. The gaming machine according to feature I4 or I5, wherein images having continuity are displayed on the specific display means and the predetermined display means.

According to the feature I6, since the image of the specific display means displayed around the predetermined display means and the image displayed on the predetermined display means are displayed so as to have continuity, pay attention to those images. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is different between the timing of starting the predetermined displacement operation and the timing of ending the predetermined displacement operation.

According to the feature I7, the predetermined display means performs the displacement operation in the situation where the displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is in the displacement operation is displayed, and the arrangement state of the predetermined display means. Is different, it is expected that the player recognizes that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing it, and it becomes possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I8. The display control means displays an image (image 152 for a parallel period) on the predetermined display means so that the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. A means for causing the predetermined display means to display an image (separation period image 154) in which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation (for directing). The gaming machine according to feature I7, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S1806 to S1808 and steps S1814 to S1816 in the CPU 82, 2D control unit 96, and 3D control unit 97).

According to the feature I8, before and after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation, an image in which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is displayed by the predetermined display means, and the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. In the situation where the above is performed, the displacement corresponding image, which is difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation, is displayed by the predetermined display means. As a result, it is possible to give the player a strong impression that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing it.

Feature I9. As the predetermined display means, a first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided.
The displacement drive control means causes the first display means and the second display means to start the predetermined displacement operation in a state where the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction. The game according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side in a direction different from the predetermined direction, and the predetermined displacement operation is terminated. Machine.

According to the feature I9, the side-by-side directions of the first display means and the second display means are different before and after the predetermined displacement operation. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the first display means and the second display means are performing the predetermined displacement motion because the displacement corresponding image is displayed in the situation where the predetermined displacement motion is performed. .. As a result, it is expected that the player recognizes that the juxtaposition direction of the first display means and the second display means has been changed without noticing it, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying an image, and
A rotation drive control means (a function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) for rotating the predetermined display means, and
A display control means (effect CPU 82, effect LSI 85) that executes display control of the predetermined display means, and
With
The display control means is a ring notification control means (right-handed notification in the effect CPU 82) for displaying a ring-shaped notification image (right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side) in which character images for notification are arranged in a ring on the predetermined display means. 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97), which is a gaming machine.

According to the feature J1, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness by performing the rotation operation in the predetermined display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the character images for notification are arranged in a ring shape. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the content of the character image for notification even in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a specific rotation operation.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the ring-shaped notification control means displays the ring-shaped notification image as if it is rotating.

According to the feature J2, since the annular notification image is displayed as if it is rotating, the player can display the annular notification image in the predetermined display direction regardless of the rotation position of the predetermined display means. Can be visually recognized.

Features J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the annular notification control means changes the rotation display mode of the annular notification image according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means.

According to the feature J3, since the rotation display mode of the annular notification image is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means, the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means is circular regardless of the mode. It is possible to make the display content of the notification image a display content that is easy for the player to recognize.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J3, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Specific display means for displaying images (main display device 41) and
Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying an image, and
A function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73 to displace the predetermined display means at a predetermined facing position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces. )When,
When a notification target event occurs in a situation where control by the displacement control means is executed so that the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposite position, the specific notification image (abnormality notification image 176) is displayed in the specific display. Notification control means to be displayed on the means (function for executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2012 in the effect CPU 82, 2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, even in a situation where the control is executed so that the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposite position, the specific notification image when the event to be notified occurs is displayed in the specific display means. .. As a result, even if the predetermined display means is not arranged at the predetermined opposite position due to some trouble, the specific notification image is displayed by the specific display means, and the specific notification image is displayed to the player or the manager of the game hall. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature K2. When the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position, the notification control means is provided in a region not facing the predetermined display means on the display surface of the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that at least a part of the specific notification image is displayed.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to prevent the specific broadcast image from being completely hidden by the predetermined display means. As a result, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific broadcast image displayed on the specific display means even in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at a predetermined opposite position.

Feature K3. The displacement control means displaces the predetermined display means so that the predetermined facing position changes during a predetermined displacement period.
When the notification target event occurs in the predetermined displacement period, the notification control means is in a region where the display surface of the specific display means does not face the predetermined display means over the entire predetermined displacement period. The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that the specific notification image is displayed.

According to the feature K3, the specific broadcast image is displayed in a region that does not face the predetermined display means over the entire predetermined displacement period, so that the display position of the specific broadcast image is displayed according to the position of the predetermined display means. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means without performing control such as changing.

Features K4. There are multiple types of events to be notified.
There are a plurality of types of the specific notification image corresponding to the notification target event.
The notification control means has features K1 to K3, wherein the number of the specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature K4, in a situation where the area for displaying the specific notification image is limited by the specific display means, the number of the specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number, so that the specific display means can be used. It is possible to secure a certain size of the displayed specific notification image.

Feature K5. A priority for displaying the specific notification image is set for a plurality of types of the notification target events.
When the predetermined number of the notification target events exceeds the predetermined number in the situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposite position, the notification control means has the higher priority side of the notification target. The gaming machine according to feature K4, characterized in that the specific notification image corresponding to an event is displayed.

According to the feature K5, even if the number of specific broadcast images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at a predetermined facing position, the notification target on the higher priority side It is possible to display a specific notification image corresponding to an event.

Feature K6. When the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposite position, the notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a predetermined notification image (common notification image 175). Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5.

According to the feature K6, not only the specific notification image is displayed by the specific display means, but also the predetermined notification image is displayed by the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to emphasize that the event to be notified has occurred. Become.

Feature K7. The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined notification image is a common image that does not correspond to the type of the notification target event.

According to the feature K7, in the predetermined display means, the image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is not displayed, but the common image not corresponding to the type of the notification target event is displayed as the predetermined notification image. It is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the predetermined notification image on the means.

Feature K8. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7, wherein the notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display only one predetermined notification image even if the notification target event occurs a plurality of times. ..

According to the feature K8, even if the notification target event occurs a plurality of times, only one predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that an image other than the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to secure a wide area to be used.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A pattern display means (main display device 41) that variablely displays a pattern (decorative pattern 203, 207, 261), and
A lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main MPU 62) for executing the lottery process when a lottery opportunity occurs, and
A display control means (the symbol of FIG. 78 in the effect CPU 82) that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol ends in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process after the variable display of the symbol is started. Function to execute arithmetic processing, production LSI85),
In a gaming machine equipped with
At least a first display mode and a second display mode exist as display modes in the pattern display means.
The display control means is a mode-corresponding means (in the effect CPU 82) in which the display mode of the pattern is the first display mode in the first display mode and the display mode of the pattern is the second display mode in the second display mode. A function to execute the process of step S2709) is provided.
The gaming machine is a recognition means (step in the effect CPU 82) for displaying recognition information (common display symbol) corresponding to the display mode of the pattern immediately after the display mode is changed and immediately before the display mode is changed. A gaming machine comprising S2702 to step S2704, a function of executing the processes of steps S2712 to S2713 and steps S2717 to S2718, and a common display unit 211).

According to the feature L1, at least the first display mode and the second display mode exist as the display modes in the pattern display means, so that the display modes can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. Become. In addition, since the display mode of the pattern is changed between the first display mode and the second display mode, it is possible to make the player who is paying attention to the pattern interested in the change of the display mode. Will be.

In this case, immediately after the change of the display mode, the recognition information corresponding to the display mode of the pattern immediately before the change of the display mode is displayed. As a result, when the display mode is changed, it is possible to grasp the display mode of the pattern before the display mode is changed by visually observing the recognition information immediately after the change. Therefore, the player, the manager of the game hall, or the like can easily grasp the display mode of the pattern before the change of the display mode by visually observing the recognition information when the display mode is changed.

Feature L2. The recognition means makes it possible to start the variable display of the recognition information when the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the variable display of the pattern is terminated in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process. Alternatively, the variable display of the recognition information is terminated after the end, and the stop mode of the recognition information for which the variable display is completed is made to correspond to the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the feature L2, the variation display of the recognition information is performed from the start of the variation display of the pattern to the end of the variation display of the pattern in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process. As a result, even if an effect of temporarily stopping the pattern occurs in the middle of the execution time in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the middle of the execution time by confirming whether or not the recognition information is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not. Further, when the variable display of the pattern is terminated, not only the stop mode of the pattern but also the stop mode of the recognition information corresponds to the result of the lottery process. This makes it possible to grasp the result of the lottery process by confirming the recognition information.

Feature L3. There are a plurality of types of the patterns to be displayed by the pattern display means, and the plurality of types of the patterns have an identification information display area so that the player can recognize the identification information of each pattern. And
The symbol to be displayed in the first display mode and the symbol to be displayed in the second display mode have a predetermined common symbol (“1”” in which the identification information is common, although the display modes are different from each other. ~ "9" decorative patterns 203,207) exist,
The recognition means according to the feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the recognition information common in the first display mode and the second display mode is displayed as the recognition information corresponding to the predetermined common pattern. Game machine.

According to the feature L3, the recognition information corresponding to the predetermined common pattern is common in the first display mode and the second display mode. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of recognition information. In addition, since the recognition information is standardized for a predetermined common pattern in which the identification information is common, even if the number of types of recognition information is suppressed as described above, the recognition information is the pattern of any identification information. It becomes possible to clarify whether or not it corresponds to.

Feature L4. Among the symbols to be displayed in the first display mode, the symbol having the same identification information as at least a predetermined symbol (the first decorative symbol 203 of "0", "A", and "source") is the first. 2 It is a configuration that is not included in the pattern to be displayed in the display mode.
The recognition information includes not only the recognition information corresponding to the pattern in which the identification information is common in the first display mode and the second display mode, but also the predetermined recognition information corresponding to the predetermined pattern. The gaming machine according to feature L3.

According to the feature L4, a pattern having the same identification information as the predetermined pattern to be displayed in the first display mode does not exist as a display target in the second display mode. As a result, the display mode of the pattern can be remarkably different between the first display mode and the second display mode. In this case, the recognition information includes not only the recognition information corresponding to the pattern in which the identification information is common in the first display mode and the second display mode, but also the predetermined recognition information corresponding to the predetermined pattern. As a result, even if the display mode is changed in the situation where any of the symbols is the display target, the recognition information corresponding to the display target symbol can be displayed.

Feature L5. The recognition means makes it possible to start the variable display of the recognition information when the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the variable display of the pattern is terminated in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process. Alternatively, the variable display of the recognition information is terminated after the end, and the stop mode of the recognition information for which the variable display is completed is made to correspond to the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process. ,
The predetermined recognition information is a target of variable display in both the first display mode and the second display mode, and is a stop target after the variable display in the first display mode, while the second display mode. The gaming machine according to feature L4, which is not subject to stop after variable display in the display mode.

According to the feature L5, the variation display of the recognition information is performed from the start of the variation display of the pattern to the end of the variation display of the pattern in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process. As a result, even if an effect of temporarily stopping the pattern occurs in the middle of the execution time in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, it is in the middle of the execution time by confirming whether or not the recognition information is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not. Further, when the variable display of the pattern is terminated, not only the stop mode of the pattern but also the stop mode of the recognition information corresponds to the result of the lottery process. This makes it possible to grasp the result of the lottery process by confirming the recognition information.

In this case, the predetermined recognition information that does not have a corresponding pattern in the second display mode is also subject to variable display in the second display mode. As a result, it is possible to make the number of types of recognition information to be variable display common between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the variable display mode of the recognition information can be changed between the first display mode and the second display mode. It becomes possible to make it common. On the other hand, in the second display mode, the predetermined recognition information is not a stop target after the variable display. This makes it possible to make the stop mode of the recognition information after the variable display in the second display mode correspond to the stop mode of the pattern.

Feature L6. When the display control means is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change is changed so as to be a display mode corresponding to the change that does not include the predetermined pattern. The gaming machine according to feature L4 or L5, which comprises a corresponding means (a function of executing the process of step S2710 in the effect CPU 82).

According to the feature L6, when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, the display mode is changed so as not to include a predetermined pattern, so that the change from the first display mode to the second display mode can be performed. It is possible to clearly grasp what has occurred from the display mode of the pattern. In this case, even if the display mode is changed and the display mode of the pattern is changed to the display mode corresponding to the change due to the configuration of the above feature L4 and the recognition information is displayed, the display mode of the pattern immediately before the change is changed. Can be grasped from the display mode of the recognition information.

Feature L7. The change-corresponding means is characterized in that when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change becomes the display mode corresponding to the change. The gaming machine described in L6.

According to the feature L7, not only when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, but also when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change is changed. It becomes the corresponding display mode. That is, in both the case where the first display mode is changed to the second display mode and the case where the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change is the same in the display mode corresponding to the change. Will be. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the display mode has been changed from the display mode of the pattern. In this case, even if the display mode is changed and the display mode of the pattern is changed to the display mode corresponding to the change due to the configuration of the above feature L4 and the recognition information is displayed, the display mode of the pattern immediately before the change is changed. Can be grasped from the display mode of the recognition information.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L6 or L7, wherein the display mode corresponding to the change is a display mode formed by the pattern in which the identification information is common in the first display mode and the second display mode. ..

According to the feature L8, the display mode corresponding to the change is a display mode formed by a pattern in which the identification information is common in the first display mode and the second display mode. Even if the mode is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature L9. In the change-corresponding means, the display mode of the pattern after the change to the second display mode is changed regardless of the stop mode of the pattern immediately before the change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8, characterized in that the display mode is corresponding.

According to the feature L9, the display mode of the pattern after the change to the second display mode becomes the display mode corresponding to the change regardless of the stop mode of the pattern immediately before the display mode is changed. It is possible to reduce the processing load when setting.

Feature L10. When the first display mode is changed to the second display mode in a situation where the pattern is stopped and displayed and the predetermined recognition information is stopped and displayed as the recognition information, the recognition information is described. The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L9, wherein the state in which the predetermined recognition information is stopped and displayed is maintained.

According to the feature L10, even if a pattern having the same identification information as the predetermined pattern does not exist as a display target in the second display mode, the predetermined recognition information corresponding to the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed. When the first display mode is changed to the second display mode in the situation, the situation in which the predetermined recognition information is stopped and displayed immediately after the change to the second display mode is maintained. As a result, even if a change to the second display mode occurs in a situation where the predetermined pattern is displayed and the display mode of the pattern becomes a display mode corresponding to the change that does not include the predetermined pattern, the predetermined pattern is displayed immediately before the change. Can be made to be recognized by the player or the manager of the game hall that is displayed.

Feature L11. The display control means causes the pattern display means to display a plurality of variable display areas of the pattern, and makes a combination of the stop results of the patterns in the plurality of variable display areas correspond to the result of the lottery process.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L10, wherein the recognition means displays the recognition information in correspondence with each of the plurality of variable display areas.

According to the feature L11, since the recognition information is displayed corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas of the pattern, the recognition information is displayed in each of the pattern display areas by checking the recognition information immediately after the display mode is changed. It becomes possible to grasp the pattern that was being used.

Feature L12. The gaming machine according to feature L11, wherein the number of the symbols stopped and displayed in one variable display area is one in both the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to the feature L12, since the number of patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display area is one in both the first display mode and the second display mode, the recognition information corresponds to any of the variable display areas. It becomes easier for the player or the manager of the game hall to know whether or not the game is present.

Feature L13. The display control means includes a reach execution means for executing a reach effect by the pattern display means.
The gaming machine according to feature L11 or L12, wherein the recognition means does not perform a reach effect using the recognition information.

According to the feature L13, the reach effect using the recognition information is not executed in the configuration in which the reach effect is executed by the pattern display means. This makes it easier for the player or the manager of the game hall to recognize the role of the recognition information.

Feature L14. The recognition information is configured to be displayed by the pattern display means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the recognition means changes the number of recognition information to be displayed on the pattern display means according to a situation.

According to the feature L14, since the recognition information is displayed by the pattern display means, the visibility of the recognition information can be enhanced and the correspondence between the recognition information and the pattern can be easily grasped. In this case, by changing the number of recognition information displayed on the pattern display means according to the situation, it is possible to display the recognition information in a mode suitable for each situation.

Feature L15. The display control means causes the pattern display means to display a plurality of variable display areas of the pattern, and makes a combination of the stop results of the patterns in the plurality of variable display areas correspond to the result of the lottery process.
The recognition means
Means for displaying a predetermined number of the recognition information, which is a number corresponding to the number of the plurality of variable display areas, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is not performed (common display shown in FIG. 98A in the effect CPU 82). (Function that enables display of unit 211) and
A function for displaying a means for displaying a smaller number of the recognition information than the predetermined number in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed (a function capable of displaying the common display unit 211 shown in FIG. 98 (b) in the effect CPU 82). )When,
The gaming machine according to feature L14, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature L15, in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is performed, the number of recognition information displayed on the pattern display means is relatively small, so that a wide area for performing a display effect using the pattern is secured. It becomes possible to enhance the effect of production. On the other hand, in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is not performed, the number of recognition information corresponding to the number of the plurality of variable display areas is displayed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the above-mentioned effect while keeping the effect of clearly grasping the correspondence between the stop mode of the pattern and the recognition information.

Feature L16. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L15, wherein the recognition means causes the pattern display means to display the recognition information.

According to the feature L16, since the recognition information is displayed by the pattern display means, the visibility of the recognition information can be enhanced and the correspondence between the recognition information and the pattern can be easily grasped.

Feature L17. The gaming machine according to feature L16, wherein the display area of the recognition information is set narrower than the display area of the pattern.

According to the feature L17, since the display area of the recognition information is set narrower than the display area of the pattern, it is possible to make the pattern having a large role as an effect stand out more than the recognition information.

Feature L18. The gaming machine according to feature L16 or L17, wherein the recognition information display area exists on the display surface of the pattern display means on the peripheral edge side of the display surface with respect to the display area of the pattern.

According to the feature L18, since the recognition information display area exists on the peripheral side of the display surface of the pattern display means with respect to the pattern display area, the pattern having a large role as an effect is made more conspicuous than the recognition information. It becomes possible.

Feature L19. The gaming machine according to any one of features L16 to L18, wherein the position of the display area in which the recognition information is displayed in the pattern display means is not changed before and after the change of the display mode.

According to the feature L19, since the position of the display area where the recognition information is displayed is not changed before and after the change of the display mode, the player or the manager of the game hall can easily grasp the recognition information.

Feature L20. A movable object (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) that operates so that at least a part of the display surface faces the display surface is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L16 to L19, wherein the display area of the recognition information is set in a region that does not face the movable object on the display surface.

According to the feature L20, by setting the display area of the recognition information to a region that does not face the moving object, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the recognition information from being lowered even during the operation period of the moving object. ..

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L20, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A pattern display means (main display device 41) that variablely displays a pattern (decorative pattern 203, 207, 261), and
A lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main MPU 62) for executing the lottery process when a lottery opportunity occurs, and
A display control means (the symbol of FIG. 78 in the effect CPU 82) that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol ends in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process after the variable display of the symbol is started. Function to execute arithmetic processing, production LSI85),
In a gaming machine equipped with
At least a first display mode and a second display mode exist as display modes in the pattern display means.
The display control means
In the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern is the first display mode, and in the second display mode, the display mode of the pattern is the second display mode (execution of the process of step S2709 in the effect CPU 82). Function to do) and
When the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, the change-corresponding means (process of step S2710 in the effect CPU 82) so that the display mode of the pattern after the change becomes the display mode corresponding to the change. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature M1, at least the first display mode and the second display mode exist as the display modes in the pattern display means, so that the display modes can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. Become. In addition, since the display mode of the pattern is changed between the first display mode and the second display mode, it is possible to make the player who is paying attention to the pattern interested in the change of the display mode. Will be.

In this case, when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, the display mode corresponds to the change, so that the display of the pattern indicates that the change from the first display mode to the second display mode has occurred. It is possible to clearly grasp from the aspect.

Feature M2. The change-corresponding means is characterized in that when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change becomes the display mode corresponding to the change. The gaming machine described in M1.

According to the feature M2, not only when the first display mode is changed to the second display mode, but also when the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change is changed. It becomes the corresponding display mode. That is, in both the case where the first display mode is changed to the second display mode and the case where the second display mode is changed to the first display mode, the display mode of the pattern after the change is the same in the display mode corresponding to the change. Will be. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the display mode has been changed from the display mode of the pattern.

Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the display mode corresponding to the change is a mode in which a predetermined combination of the patterns is displayed.

According to the feature M3, when the display mode is changed, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed, so that it is possible to clearly notify the change of the display mode while using the pattern.

Features M4. There are a plurality of types of the patterns to be displayed by the pattern display means, and the plurality of types of the patterns have an identification information display area so that the player can recognize the identification information of each pattern. And
The symbol to be displayed in the first display mode and the symbol to be displayed in the second display mode have a predetermined common symbol (“1”” in which the identification information is common, although the display modes are different from each other. ~ "9" decorative symbols 203,207) are present.
Among the symbols to be displayed in the first display mode, the symbol having the same identification information as at least a predetermined symbol (the first decorative symbol 203 of "0", "A", and "source") is the first. 2 It is a configuration that is not included in the pattern to be displayed in the display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3, wherein the display mode corresponding to the change does not include the predetermined pattern.

According to the feature M4, since the display mode corresponding to the change does not include a predetermined pattern, even if the display mode corresponding to the change is displayed at the time of changing to the second display mode, the player does not feel uncomfortable. It becomes possible.

Feature M5. The gaming machine according to feature M4, wherein the display mode corresponding to the change is a display mode formed by the pattern in which the identification information is common in the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to the feature M5, the display mode corresponding to the change is a display mode formed by a pattern having common identification information in the first display mode and the second display mode. Even if the mode is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature M6. In the change-corresponding means, the display mode of the pattern after the change to the second display mode is changed regardless of the stop mode of the pattern immediately before the change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, characterized in that the display mode is corresponding.

According to the feature M6, the display mode of the pattern after the change to the second display mode becomes the display mode corresponding to the change regardless of the stop mode of the pattern immediately before the display mode is changed. It is possible to reduce the processing load when setting.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features M1 to M6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S805 in the 3D control unit 97) and viewpoint setting for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Means (a function of executing the process of step S807 in the 3D control unit 97) and the object data are projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane). Generated data storage that stores the generated data generated by the data generating means (3D control unit 97) having the drawing setting means (the function of executing the process of step S810 in the 3D control unit 97) for generating the drawing data). Means (3D drawing area 113) and
A display control means (first display circuit 98) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (main display device 41), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The arrangement means has a function of executing the processes of steps S2802 and S2804 in the effect CPU 82 for arranging special object data (refraction object 221) as the object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a 3D control unit. It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S805 in 97).
The drawing setting means
When determining the data to be drawn on each dot in the generated data having a plurality of dots, the object grasping means (3D control unit) for grasping the object data to be referenced in order from the front side of the virtual three-dimensional space. (Function to execute the process of step S2902 in 97) and
When the special object data is grasped by the target grasping means in the case of determining the data to be drawn on a predetermined dot among the plurality of dots, the specific parameter data set for the special object data is set. A drawing target determining means (drawing target determining means) that uses (refractive index) to determine data to be drawn on the predetermined dot among the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space. The function of executing the processes of steps S2903 to S2910 in the 3D control unit 97) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature N1, the existence of the special object data changes the data to be drawn on a predetermined dot among the object data existing behind the special object data. As a result, it is possible to express the refraction of the image by using the special object data, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. Further, such a refraction expression is performed using the specific parameter data set for the special object data. As a result, it is possible to specify the data to be referred to when performing the refraction expression in the process of creating the generated data, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature N2. The drawing target determining means does not draw the special object data on the dots of the generated data, or displays the special object data in a semi-transparent state so that the image corresponding to the special object data is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature N1, wherein the semi-transparency processing is performed when the generated data is reflected in the dots.

According to the feature N2, the image corresponding to the special object data is not displayed, or the image corresponding to the special object data is displayed in a semi-transparent state. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the refraction expression using the special object data from being deteriorated by the existence of the image corresponding to the special object data.

Feature N3. The predetermined placement means changes the placement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space between update timings.
Of the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot is the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, which is characterized in that it is changed accordingly.

According to the feature N3, the arrangement mode of the special object data is changed, and the display mode of the image by the refraction expression is changed accordingly. As a result, it is possible to make the display mode of the image by the refraction expression rich in variation, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image.

Feature N4. When the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is a predetermined arrangement mode, it is assumed that the special object data does not exist in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target is drawn on the predetermined dot. There is no difference in position between the data and the data to be actually drawn on the predetermined dot in the virtual three-dimensional space, or the amount of deviation is relatively small.
The drawing setting means is a visual effect means (step S2803 in the effect CPU 82) for producing a predetermined visual effect when the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is the predetermined arrangement mode. The gaming machine according to feature N3, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above (a function of executing the process of step S2909 in the 3D control unit 97).

According to the feature N4, when the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is the predetermined arrangement mode, it is assumed that the special object data does not exist in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target is drawn on the predetermined dot. Special object data due to the fact that the amount of positional deviation in the virtual three-dimensional space between the data to be and the data to be actually drawn on a predetermined dot does not exist or the amount of deviation is relatively small. When the arrangement mode of is a predetermined arrangement mode, the refractive expression disappears or the visual effect of the refractive expression is reduced. In this case, the occurrence of a predetermined visual effect does not reduce the degree of attention to the image when the refraction expression disappears or the visual effect due to the refraction expression decreases as described above. It becomes possible to.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the visual effect means makes the display mode of the image corresponding to the special object data a specific mode as the predetermined visual effect.

According to the feature N5, when the display mode of the image corresponding to the special object data becomes a specific mode as a predetermined visual effect, the visual effect due to the refraction expression disappears or the refraction expression is reduced as described above. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the image corresponding to the special object data.

Feature N6. The drawing target determining means performs semi-transparency processing when the special object data is reflected in the dots of the generated data so that the image corresponding to the special object data is displayed in a semi-transparent state. ,
As the predetermined visual effect, the visual effect means obtains the special object data as compared with the case where the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is a specific arrangement mode different from the predetermined arrangement mode. The gaming machine according to feature N4 or N5, wherein the corresponding image is made to be an image close to opaque, or the image corresponding to the special object data is made to be an opaque image.

According to the feature N6, the image corresponding to the special object data is usually displayed in a semi-transparent state, so that the visibility of the refraction expression using the special object data is determined by the existence of the image corresponding to the special object data. It is possible to prevent it from dropping. On the other hand, when the refraction expression disappears or the visual effect of the refraction expression decreases, the image corresponding to the special object data is displayed as an image closer to opaque than usual or an opaque image. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the image corresponding to the special object data when the refraction expression disappears or the visual effect of the refraction expression decreases as described above. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the special object data exists.

Feature N7. When the target grasping means determines the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot, the object grasping means obtains the object data intersecting with the linear data traveling in the depth direction from the position corresponding to the predetermined dot in the virtual three-dimensional space. It is the object of reference and
When the drawing target determining means determines the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot and the special object data is grasped by the target grasping means, the drawing target determining means first intersects the linear data in the special object data. Using the angle of the surface holding the data and the specific parameter data, the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space can be drawn on the predetermined dot. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, characterized in that the data is determined.

According to the feature N7, the degree of refraction in the refraction expression is determined by using not only the specific parameter data but also the angle of the surface having the data that first intersects the linear data in the special object data. This makes it possible to diversify the mode of refraction expression and increase the degree of attention to the image.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features N1 to N7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. A display means having a display unit (main display device 41) and
A display storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance, and
Drawing data is created using the image data in the setting storage means (3D drawing area 113) having a plurality of unit setting areas in which numerical information defining color information can be set, and the numerical information corresponding to the drawing data is generated. A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display unit based on outputting an image signal corresponding to each of the set unit setting areas to the display means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The applicable data (captured image data 241), which is one of the predetermined image data and the data created by using the predetermined image data, has a plurality of unit image data to which numerical information defining color information is associated.
The display control means executes the same application process for each of the unit image data of the application data to change the numerical information of the unit image data, so that the image has a hue different from that of the image corresponding to the application data. Is provided with an application means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3205 in the 3D control unit 97) for displaying different images.

According to the feature O1, by executing the same arithmetic processing for each unit image data of the applied data, an image having a different hue from the image corresponding to the applied data is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of types of images using the same application data, and it is possible to diversify the display mode. Further, in the case of displaying a plurality of types of images in this way, since the same arithmetic processing is executed for each unit image data of the applied data, the above display mode is used while reducing the processing load. It will be possible to diversify.

Feature O2. The display storage means has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information as the image data, and the specific image data in which the numerical information set in the unit image data is all the same (specific image data). The layer data for inversion 244) is stored,
As the application process, the application means applies the unit image data corresponding to the specific image data to each unit image data of the application data, thereby producing an image having a different hue from the image corresponding to the application data. The gaming machine according to feature O1, which is characterized in that it is displayed.

According to the feature O2, by applying each unit image data of the specific image data stored in advance in the display storage means as image data to each unit image data of the application data, the hue is different from the image corresponding to the application data. Since the configuration is such that different images are displayed, it is possible to reduce the processing load because it is only necessary to apply the specific image data to the application data when displaying the different images. Further, since all the numerical information set in the unit image data of the specific image data is the same, it is sufficient to execute the same arithmetic processing for each of the unit image data of the applied data, and the processing load can be reduced from this point as well. It becomes possible.

Feature O3. The unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value.
The display control means is configured to output the image signal so that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical information, the brighter the color is displayed at the dots of the display unit corresponding to the unit setting area.
The application means has the feature O1 or O2, which, as the application process, subtracts the numerical information set in the unit image data from the limit value for each of the unit image data of the application data. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature O3, by executing the application process, the numerical information of the unit image data is subtracted from the limit value for each of the unit image data of the application data. As a result, the numerical information of each unit image data of the applied data is inverted, and it is possible to display an image in which the hue of the image corresponding to the applied data is totally inverted.

Feature O4. The display control means means to use the applied data as data to be displayed without executing the application process on the applied data (a function of executing the processes of steps S3103 and S3108 to S3109 in the 3D control unit 97). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that

According to the feature O4, it is possible to display both the image corresponding to the applied data in the state in which the applied process is not executed and the image corresponding to the data in the state in which the applied process is executed.

Feature O5. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, wherein the applied data is data corresponding to the display of a part of the images displayed on the display means at a predetermined display timing. ..

According to the feature O5, it is possible to suppress the influence of the application process on a part of the images displayed on the display means at a predetermined display timing.

Feature O6. As a display effect in the display means, a display effect is set in which the individual image for variation is variablely displayed in front of the back image.
When a situation advantageous to the player occurs, the stop mode when the variation display of the individual image for variation is completed is the advantageous response stop mode.
The gaming machine according to feature O5, wherein the applied data is data corresponding to the display of at least a part of the back side image and not the data corresponding to the display of the individual image for variation.

According to the feature O6, it is possible to diversify the display mode for at least a part of the back image while maintaining the display mode of the individual image for variation.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features O1 to O6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic P group>
Features P1. A display means having a display unit (main display device 41) and
A display control means (production LSI85) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first aspect information group (first aspect information group) in which first aspect information that determines the display content of the first image range (lower body portion), which is a part of an image range of at least a predetermined individual image (movement target character 251), is set in time series. A second aspect in which the first animation data 255) and the second aspect information for determining the display contents of the second image range (upper body portion), which is at least a part of the predetermined individual image, are set in chronological order. An information storage means (memory module 83) for storing an information group (second animation data 256) in advance is provided.
When displaying the predetermined individual image, the display control means determines the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image by using the first aspect information set in the first aspect information group. Then, the mode determining means (step S3310 and step S3311 in the effect CPU 82) for determining the display content of the second image range in the predetermined individual image by using the second aspect information set in the second aspect information group. A game machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute the processing of.

According to the feature P1, the display content of the first image range of the predetermined individual image is determined by using the first aspect information set in the first control information group, and the display content of the second image range of the predetermined individual image is determined. The display content is determined by using the second aspect information set in the second control information group. As a result, when displaying an image in which a predetermined operation is performed in each of the first image range and the second image range of the predetermined individual image, the display of each of the first image range and the second image range is preferably performed. It becomes possible to use a suitable control information group.

Feature P2. In the first aspect information group, not only the first aspect information but also the third aspect information that determines the display content of the second image range in the predetermined individual image is set in time series.
When the predetermined individual image is displayed in the first period, the display control means uses the first aspect information in which the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image is set in the first aspect information group. The first period corresponding means (in the effect CPU 82) for determining the display content of the second image range in the predetermined individual image by using the third aspect information set in the first aspect information group. A function for executing the processes of steps S3302 and S3309) is provided.
When the predetermined individual image is displayed in the second period that occurs continuously in the first period after the first period, the mode determining means displays the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image. The second aspect determined by using the first aspect information set in the first aspect information group, and the display content of the second image range in the predetermined individual image is set in the second aspect information group. The gaming machine according to feature P1, which is characterized in that it is determined by using information.

According to the feature P2, in the first period, the display contents of both the first image range and the second image range of the predetermined individual image are determined by using the first aspect information group, and the display contents are continuously generated in the first period. In the second period, the display content is determined by using the first aspect information group as it is for the first image range of the predetermined individual image, whereas the second image range of the predetermined individual image is newly second. The display content is determined using the aspect information group. As a result, when switching from the first period to the second period, the operation continues smoothly for the first image range in the predetermined individual image while different operations are performed for the second image range in the predetermined individual image. It becomes possible to be done.

Feature P3. In the first aspect information group, not only the first aspect information but also the third aspect information that determines the display content of the second image range in the predetermined individual image is set in time series.
In the second aspect information group, not only the second aspect information but also the fourth aspect information that determines the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image is set in time series.
The case where the display contents of the first image range and the second image range of the predetermined individual image are determined by using the first aspect information group, and the case where the predetermined individual image is determined by using the second aspect information group. The gaming machine according to feature P1 or P2, wherein the display mode of the predetermined individual image is different between the case where the display contents of the first image range and the display content of the second image range are determined.

According to the feature P3, the display contents of both the first image range and the second image range of the predetermined individual image can be determined by the first aspect information group, and the first image of the predetermined individual image can be determined by the second aspect information group. The display contents of both the range and the second image range can be determined. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above by using both the first aspect information group and the second aspect information group.

Feature P4. The display content of the first image range in the case of being determined by using the first aspect information set in the first aspect information group and the fourth aspect information set in the second aspect information group are displayed. The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the display content of the first image range in the case of being determined by using the display content is the display content that the player recognizes as the same.

According to the feature P4, it is determined by using the display content of the first image range when the first aspect information of the first aspect information group is used and the fourth aspect information of the second aspect information group. In a configuration in which the display content of the first image range is the same as the display content of the first image range, the display content of the first image range is determined by using the first aspect information of the first control information group, and the display content of the second control information group is determined. By determining the display content of the second image range using the second aspect information, it is possible to smoothly change the display content of each image range.

Feature P5. The display control means
When displaying the predetermined individual image, the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image is determined by using the first aspect information set in the first aspect information group, and the predetermined individual image is displayed. Means for determining the display content of the second image range using the third aspect information set in the first aspect information group (a function of executing the processes of steps S3302 and S3309 in the effect CPU 82) and
When displaying the predetermined individual image, the display content of the first image range in the predetermined individual image is determined by using the fourth aspect information set in the second aspect information group, and the predetermined individual image is displayed. Means for determining the display content of the second image range using the second aspect information set in the second aspect information group (a function of executing the processes of steps S3304 and S3309 in the effect CPU 82) and
The gaming machine according to the feature P3 or P4, characterized in that

According to the feature P5, a situation in which the display contents of both the first image range and the second image range of the predetermined individual image are determined by using the first aspect information group, and a predetermined situation using the second aspect information group. The situation where the display contents of both the first image range and the second image range of the individual image are determined, and the first image range and the first image range of the predetermined individual image by using both the first aspect information group and the second aspect information group. There is a situation in which the display content of the second image range is determined. This makes it possible to display a predetermined individual image using a mode information group suitable for each situation.

Feature P6. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined individual image is a predetermined character image.

According to the feature P6, in a configuration in which a predetermined character image is displayed as a predetermined individual image, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features P1 to P6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. , Features H1 to H6, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J3, Features K1 to K8, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M6, Features N1 to N7, Features O1 to O6, Features P1 to P6 Alternatively, a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, the feature O group, and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display means are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which data is stored in advance, and a predetermined display is performed by a display means using the data read from the memory.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform display by the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Main display device, 43 ... First sub display device, 44 ... Second sub display device, 62 ... Main MPU, 82 ... Production CPU, 83 ... Memory module, 85 ... Production LSI, 97 ... 3D control unit, 98 ... 1st display circuit, 113 ... 3D drawing area, 203 ... 1st decorative symbol, 207 ... 2nd decorative symbol, 211 ... common display unit, 221 ... refraction object, 241 ... captured image data , 244 ... Inversion layer data, 251 ... Movement target character, 255 ... First animation data, 256 ... Second animation data.

Claims (1)

Arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. A drawing setting means for projecting and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane, and a generated data storage means for storing the generated data generated by the data generating means having.
A display control means for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The arrangement means includes a predetermined arrangement means for arranging special object data as the object data in the virtual three-dimensional space and changing the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space between update timings .
The drawing setting means
When determining the data to be drawn on each dot in the generated data having a plurality of dots, an object grasping means for grasping the object data to be referred to in order from the front side of the virtual three-dimensional space, and an object grasping means.
When the special object data is grasped by the target grasping means in the case of determining the data to be drawn on a predetermined dot among the plurality of dots, the specific parameter data set for the special object data is set. To determine the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot among the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target determining means.
Equipped with a,
Of the object data existing behind the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, the data to be drawn on the predetermined dot is the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space. It is a configuration that changes according to
When the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is a predetermined arrangement mode, it is assumed that the special object data does not exist in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the drawing target is drawn on the predetermined dot. There is no difference in position between the data and the data to be actually drawn on the predetermined dot in the virtual three-dimensional space, or the amount of deviation is relatively small.
The drawing setting means is characterized by comprising visual effect means for producing a predetermined visual effect when the arrangement mode of the special object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is the predetermined arrangement mode. A game machine to be.

Images